Jeep 2018 RENEGADE Car User Manual

Jeep is a registered trademark of FCA US LLC.

2018 RENEGADE USER GUIDE

Whether it’s providing information about speciﬁc product features, taking a tour through your

vehicle’s heritage, knowing what steps to take following an accident, or scheduling your next

appointment, we know you’ll ﬁnd the app an important extension of your Jeep

brand vehicle.

Simply download the app, select your make and model and enjoy the ride.

To get this app, go directly to the App Store or Google Play and enter the search keyword “JEEP”

(U.S. residents only).

www.jeep.com⁄en ⁄owners (U.S.) provides special oers tailored to your needs, customized vehicle galleries,

personalized service records and more. To get this information, just create an account and check back often.

Get warranty and other information online – you can review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s

Manual, Navigation / Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle

by visiting www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada). Click on the applicable link in the

“Popular Topics” area of the mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada) homepage and follow

the instructions to select the applicable year, make and model of your vehicle.

DOWNLOAD A FREE ELECTRONIC COPY of the most up-to-date Owner’s Manual,

media and warranty booklet by visiting:

www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html (U.S. residents);

www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian residents).

Jeep.com (U.S.)

Jeep.ca (Canada)

18BU-926-AA

RENEGADE

Second Edition

User Guide

3656929_18b_Renegade_UG_072518.indd 1 7/25/18 2:22 PM

Driving and Alcohol

Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of

collisions. Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with

blood alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are

drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking

driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.

WARNING!

Driving after drinking can lead to a collision. Your

perceptions are less sharp, your reﬂexes are slower, and

your judgment is impaired when you have been drinking.

Never drink and then drive.

This guide has been prepared to help you get

quickly acquainted with your new Jeep

brand

vehicle and to provide a convenient reference

source for common questions. However, it is not a

substitute for your Owner’s Manual.

For complete operational instructions, maintenance

procedures and important safety messages, please

consult your Owner’s Manual, Navigation/Uconnect

manuals found on the website on the back cover

and other Warning Labels in your vehicle.

Not all features shown in this guide may apply

to your vehicle. For additional information on

accessories to help personalize your vehicle, visit

www.mopar.com (U.S.), www.mopar.ca (Canada)

or your local Jeep

brand dealer.

Important

Get warranty and other information online – you can

review and print or download a copy of the Owner’s Manual,

Navigation/Uconnect manuals and the limited warranties

provided by FCA US LLC for your vehicle by visiting

www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada).

Click on the applicable link in the “Popular Topics” area of

the www.mopar.com (U.S.) or www.owners.mopar.ca (Canada)

homepage and follow the instructions to select the applicable

year, make and model of your vehicle.

If you are the ﬁrst registered retail owner of your vehicle, you

may obtain a complimentary printed copy of the Warranty

Booklet by calling 1-877-426-5337 (U.S.) or 1-800-387-1143

(Canada) or by contacting your dealer.

The driver’s primary responsibility is the safe operation of the

vehicle. Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control,

resulting in a collision and personal injury. FCA US LLC strongly

recommends that the driver use extreme caution when using any

device or feature that may take their attention o the road.

Use of any electrical devices, such as cellular telephones,

computers, portable radios, vehicle navigation or other devices,

by the driver while the vehicle is moving is dangerous and could

lead to a serious collision. Texting while driving is also dangerous

and should never be done while the vehicle is moving.

If you ﬁnd yourself unable to devote your full attention to vehicle

operation, pull o the road to a safe location and stop your

vehicle. Some states or provinces prohibit the use of cellular

telephones or texting while driving. It is always the driver’s

responsibility to comply with all local laws.

WARNING: Operating, servicing and maintaining a passenger vehicle or o-road

highway motor can expose you to chemicals including engine exhaust, carbon monoxide,

phthalates, and lead, which are known to the State of California to cause cancer and

birth defects or other reproductive harm. To minimize exposure, avoid breathing exhaust,

do not idle the engine except as necessary, service your vehicle in a well-ventilated area

and wear gloves or wash your hands frequently when servicing your vehicle. For more

information go to: www.p65Warnings.ca.gov/passenger-vehicle.

3656929_18b_Renegade_UG_072518.indd 2 7/25/18 2:22 PM

Congratulations on selecting your new FCA

US LLC vehicle. Be assured that it represents

precision workmanship, distinctive styling,

and high quality.

ALWAYS drive safely and pay attention to the

road. ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on

the steering wheel. You have full responsibil-

ity and assume all risks related to the use of

the features and applications in this vehicle.

Only use the features and applications when

it is safe to do so. Failure to do so may result

in an accident involving serious injury or

death.

This guide illustrates and describes the op-

eration of features and equipment that are

either standard or optional on this vehicle.

This guide may also include a description of

features and equipment that are no longer

available or were not ordered on this vehicle.

Please disregard any features and equipment

described in this guide that are not available

on this vehicle. FCA US LLC reserves the

right to make changes in design and specifi-

cations and/or make additions to or improve-

ments to its products without imposing any

obligation upon itself to install them on prod-

ucts previously manufactured.

This User Guide has been prepared to help

you quickly become acquainted with the im-

portant features of your vehicle. It contains

most things you will need to operate and

maintain the vehicle, including emergency

information.

When it comes to service, remember that your

authorized dealer knows your Jeep

vehicle

best, has factory-trained technicians and

genuine MOPAR

parts, and cares about your

satisfaction.

HOW TO FIND YOUR

OWNER’S MANUAL ONLINE

This publication has been prepared as a ref-

erence item to help you quickly become ac-

quainted with the most important features

and processes of your vehicle. It contains

most things you will need to operate and

maintain the vehicle, including emergency

information and procedures.

This User Guide is not a replacement for the full

Owner’s Manual, and does not fully cover every

operation and procedure possible with your ve-

hicle.

For more detailed descriptions of the topics

discussed in this User Guide, as well as

information covering features and processes

not covered in this User Guide, the full ve-

hicle Owner’s Manual can be accessed for

free online in a printer-friendly PDF format.

To get the full Owner’s Manual or applicable

supplement for your vehicle, follow the appro-

priate web address below:

www.mopar.com/en-us/care/owners-manual.html

(U.S. Residents)

www.owners.mopar.ca (Canadian Residents)

FCA US LLC is committed to protecting our

environment and natural resources. By con-

verting from paper to electronic delivery for

the majority of the user information for your

vehicle, together we greatly reduce the de-

mand for tree-based products and lessen the

stress on our environment.

WELCOME FROM FCA US LLC

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

Essential Information

Each time direction instructions (left/right or

forwards/backwards) about the vehicle are

given, these must be intended as regarding

an occupant in the driver's seat. Special

cases not complying with this rule will be

properly specified in the text.

The figures in this User Guide are provided by

way of example only: this might imply that

some details of the image do not correspond

to the actual arrangement of your vehicle.

In addition, the User Guide has been con-

ceived considering vehicles with the steering

wheel on the left side; it is therefore possible

that in vehicles with the steering wheel on the

right side, the position or construction of

some controls is not exactly mirror-like with

respect to the figure.

To identify the chapter with the information

needed you can consult the index at the end

of this User Guide.

Chapters can be rapidly identified with dedi-

cated graphic tabs, at the side of each odd

page. A few pages further there is a key for

getting to know the chapter order and the

relevant symbols in the tabs. There is always

a textual indication of the current chapter at

the side of each even page.

Symbols

Some vehicle components have colored la-

bels whose symbols indicate precautions to

be observed when using this component.

ROLLOVER WARNING

Utility vehicles have a significantly higher

rollover rate than other types of vehicles. This

vehicle has a higher ground clearance and a

higher center of gravity than many passenger

vehicles. It is capable of performing better in

a wide variety of off-road applications. Driven

in an unsafe manner, all vehicles can go out

of control. Because of the higher center of

gravity, if this vehicle is out of control it may

roll over while some other vehicles may not.

Do not attempt sharp turns, abrupt maneu-

vers, or other unsafe driving actions that can

cause loss of vehicle control. Failure to oper-

ate this vehicle safely may result in a colli-

sion, rollover of the vehicle, and severe or

fatal injury. Drive carefully.

Failure to use the driver and passenger seat

belts provided is a major cause of severe or

fatal injury. In fact, the U.S. government

notes that the universal use of existing seat

belts could cut the highway death toll by

10,000 or more each year and could reduce

disabling injuries by two million annually. In

a rollover crash, an unbelted person is signifi-

cantly more likely to die than a person wear-

ing a seat belt. Always buckle up.

Rollover Warning Label

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS

While reading this User Guide you will find a

series of WARNINGS to be followed to pre-

vent incorrect use of components which

could cause accidents or injuries.

There are also CAUTIONS that must be fol-

lowed to prevent against procedures that

could result in damage to your vehicle.

VEHICLE CHANGES/

ALTERATIONS

IMPORTANT: Any change or alteration of the

vehicle might seriously affect its safety and

road holding, thus causing accidents, in

which the occupants could even be fatally

injured.

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

SAFETY

STARTING AND OPERATING

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

MULTIMEDIA

CUSTOMER ASSISTANCE

INDEX

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

INSTRUMENT PANEL...........8

INTERIOR...................9

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

INSTRUMENT PANEL

Instrument Panel

1 — Air Vents 4 — Hand Grip 7 — Multifunction Lever

2 — Instrument Cluster 5 — Glove Compartment 8 — Headlight Switch

3 — Uconnect Radio 6 — Steering Wheel

GRAPHICAL TABLE OF CONTENTS

INTERIOR

Interior Features

1 — Power Window Switches 4 — Climate Controls 7 — Seats

2 — Uconnect Radio 5 — Transmission Gear Selector

(Automatic/Manual Options)

3 — Switch Panel 6 — Selec-Terrain Mode Knob — If

Equipped

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS .....................13

Key Fob With Remote Control .......13

IGNITIONSWITCH............14

Models With Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive

Entry.......................14

REMOTE STARTING SYSTEM — IF

EQUIPPED .................15

General Information .............16

SENTRYKEY................16

General Information .............16

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF

EQUIPPED .................17

To Arm The System .............17

To Disarm The System ............17

DOORS ....................18

Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry — If

Equipped ....................18

Child Locks...................21

SEATS ....................22

Heated Seats — If Equipped ........22

Split Rear Seats ................23

Unfolding The Rear Armrest 40/20/40 . .25

HEADRESTRAINTS...........25

Front Head Restraints ............25

Rear Head Restraints.............26

STEERING WHEEL............26

Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column......26

Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped . .27

MIRRORS ..................27

Folding Mirror .................27

Heated Mirrors — If Equipped .......28

EXTERIORLIGHTS............28

Headlights ...................28

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If

Equipped ....................28

High Beams ..................29

Flash-To-Pass .................29

Automatic Headlights — If Equipped . . .29

Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control —

If Equipped ..................29

Parking Lights .................30

Headlight Delay ...............30

Front Fog Lights — If Equipped ......30

Turn Signals ..................31

WIPERS AND WASHERS .......31

Front Wiper Operation ............31

Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped . . .32

Rear Wiper Operation.............33

CLIMATECONTROLS..........34

Automatic Climate Control Overview....34

Climate Control Functions ..........41

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) — If

Equipped ....................42

Operating Tips ................42

WINDOWS.................43

Power Window Controls ...........43

Auto-Down Feature ..............44

Auto-Up Feature With Auto-Reverse

Protection — If Equipped ..........44

Reset Auto-Up .................45

Wind Buffeting ................45

POWER MY SKY SUN ROOF.....45

Power My Sky Operation ...........45

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Emergency Open/Close............46

Wind Buffeting ................47

POWER GLASS SUNROOF WITH

POWER SHADE — IF EQUIPPED .47

Opening.....................48

Closing .....................48

Wind Buffeting ................48

Power Sun Shade ...............48

Auto Reverse Feature.............48

Sunroof Maintenance.............49

HOOD.....................49

To Open The Hood ..............49

To Close The Hood ..............49

LIFTGATE ..................50

Opening.....................50

Closing .....................51

INTERNAL EQUIPMENT ........51

Power Outlet ..................51

Power Inverter — If Equipped .......52

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

KEYS

Your vehicle uses a keyless ignition system.

The ignition system consists of a key fob with

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) and a START/

STOP push button ignition system. The Re-

mote Keyless Entry system consists of a key

fob and Keyless Enter-N-Go feature if

equipped.

NOTE:

The key fob may not be found if it is located

next to a mobile phone, laptop or other elec-

tronic device; these devices may block the

key fob’s wireless signal.

Key Fob With Remote Control

The key fob with Remote Control contains a

Remote Keyless Entry feature. The Remote

Keyless Entry system allows you to lock or

unlock the doors and liftgate or activate the

Panic Alarm from distances up to approxi-

mately 66 ft (20 m) using a handheld key

fob. The key fob does not need to be pointed

at the vehicle to activate the system.

Key Fobs

To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate

Push and release the unlock button on the

key fob once to unlock the driver's door or

twice within five seconds to unlock all doors

and the liftgate.

All doors can be programmed to unlock on the

first push of the unlock button. Refer to

“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in the

Owner’s Manual for further information.

NOTE:

If the vehicle is unlocked by key fob, and no

door is opened within 60 seconds, the vehicle

will re-lock and if equipped, the security

alarm will arm. To change the current setting,

refer to "Uconnect Settings" in "Multimedia"

in the Owner’s Manual for further informa-

tion.

To Lock The Doors And Liftgate

Push and release the lock button on the key

fob to lock all doors and liftgate.

Keyless Ignition Key Fob

1 — Unlock

2 — Lock

3 — Remote Start

4 — Panic

5 — Emergency Key

Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go —

Passive Entry

If one or more doors are open, or the liftgate

is open, the doors will lock. The doors will

unlock again automatically if the key is left

inside the passenger compartment, other-

wise the doors will stay locked.

Request For Additional Key Fobs

NOTE:

Only key fobs that are programmed to the

vehicle electronics can be used to start and

operate the vehicle. Once a key fob is pro-

grammed to a vehicle, it cannot be pro-

grammed to any other vehicle.

WARNING!

• Always remove the key fobs from the

vehicle and lock all doors when leaving

the vehicle unattended.

• Always remember to place the ignition in

the OFF mode.

Duplication of key fobs may be performed at

an authorized dealer. This procedure consists

of programming a blank key fob to the vehicle

electronics. A blank key fob is one that has

never been programmed.

NOTE:

• When having the Sentry Key Immobilizer

System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with

you to an authorized dealer.

• Keys must be ordered to the correct key cut

to match the vehicle locks.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to

all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in

this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules and with Industry Canada license-

exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-

ject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference.

2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to oper-

ate the equipment.

IGNITION SWITCH

Models With Keyless Enter-N-Go —

Passive Entry

This feature allows the driver to operate the

ignition switch with the push of a button as

long as the key fob is in the passenger com-

partment.

The push button ignition has three operating

positions. The three positions are OFF, ON,

and RUN.

NOTE:

If the ignition switch does not change with

the push of a button, the key fob may have a

low or dead battery. In this situation, a back

up method can be used to operate the igni-

tion switch. Put the nose side (side opposite

of the emergency key) of the key fob against

the ENGINE START/STOP button and push to

operate the ignition switch.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

The vehicle will not start if the key fob is

located inside the cargo area and the liftgate

is opened.

WARNING!

• When leaving the vehicle, always remove

the key fob from the vehicle and lock

your vehicle.

WARNING!

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,

or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle un-

attended is dangerous for a number of

reasons. A child or others could be seri-

ously or fatally injured. Children should

be warned not to touch the parking

brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the

vehicle, or in a location accessible to

children, and do not leave the ignition in

the ON or RUN mode. A child could

operate power windows, other controls,

or move the vehicle.

• Do not leave children or animals inside

parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior

heat build-up may cause serious injury

or death.

CAUTION!

An unlocked vehicle is an invitation for

thieves. Always remove key fob from the

vehicle and lock all doors when leaving the

vehicle unattended.

NOTE:

For further information, refer to "Starting The

Engine," in "Starting And Operating" in the

Owner’s Manual.

REMOTE STARTING

SYSTEM — IF EQUIPPED

Push the remote start button on the key fob

twice within five seconds. Pushing the re-

mote start button a third time shuts the

engine off.

To drive the vehicle, push the START/STOP

button to turn the ignition to the ON/RUN

mode.

NOTE:

• With remote start, the engine will only run

for 15 minutes (timeout) unless the igni-

tion is placed in the ON/RUN mode.

• The vehicle must be started with the key

after two consecutive timeouts.

START/STOP Ignition Button

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to

all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in

this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules and with Industry Canada license-

exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-

ject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and

2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to oper-

ate the equipment.

SENTRY KEY

The Sentry Key Immobilizer system prevents

unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling

the engine. The system does not need to be

armed or activated. Operation is automatic,

regardless of whether the vehicle is locked or

unlocked.

CAUTION!

The Sentry Key Immobilizer system is not

compatible with some aftermarket remote

starting systems. Use of these systems

may result in vehicle starting problems

and loss of security protection.

All of the key fobs provided with your new

vehicle have been programmed to the vehicle

electronics.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to

all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in

this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules and with Industry Canada license-

exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-

ject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and

2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to oper-

ate the equipment.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM

— IF EQUIPPED

The vehicle security alarm monitors the ve-

hicle doors, hood, liftgate, and the Keyless

Enter-N-Go — Ignition for unauthorized op-

eration. While the vehicle security alarm is

armed, interior switches for door locks and

liftgate release are disabled. If something

triggers the alarm, the vehicle security alarm

will provide the following audible and visible

signals:

• The horn will pulse.

• The turn signals will flash.

• The vehicle security light in the instrument

cluster will flash.

To Arm The System

Follow these steps to arm the vehicle security

alarm:

1. Make sure the vehicle’s ignition is placed

in the “OFF” mode.

2. Perform one of the following methods to

lock the vehicle:

• Push the lock button on the interior

power door lock switch with the driver

and/or passenger door open.

• Push the lock button on the exterior

Passive Entry Door Handle with a valid

key fob available in the same exterior

zone (refer to "Doors" in "Getting To

Know Your Vehicle" in your Owner’s

Manual for further information).

• Push the lock button on the key fob.

3. If any doors are open, close them.

To Disarm The System

The vehicle security alarm can be disarmed

using any of the following methods:

• Push the unlock button on the key fob.

• Grasp the passive entry door handle to

unlock the door, refer to "Doors" in "Getting

To Know Your Vehicle" in your Owner’s

Manual for further information.

• Cycle the ignition out of the off mode to

disarm the system.

NOTE:

• The driver's door key cylinder and the lift-

gate button on the key fob cannot arm or

disarm the vehicle security alarm.

• The vehicle security alarm remains armed

during liftgate entry. If someone enters the

vehicle through the liftgate and opens any

door, the alarm will sound.

• When the vehicle security alarm is armed,

the interior power door lock switches will

not unlock the doors.

The vehicle security alarm is designed to

protect your vehicle. However, you can create

conditions where the system will give you a

false alarm. If one of the previously described

arming sequences has occurred, the vehicle

security alarm will arm, regardless of whether

you are in the vehicle or not. If you remain in

the vehicle and open a door, the alarm will

sound. If this occurs, disarm the vehicle

security alarm.

If the vehicle security alarm is armed and the

battery becomes disconnected, the vehicle

security alarm will remain armed when the

battery is reconnected; the exterior lights will

flash, and the horn will sound. If this occurs,

disarm the vehicle security alarm.

DOORS

Keyless Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry — If

Equipped

The Passive Entry system is an enhancement

to the vehicle’s Remote Keyless Entry system

and a feature of Keyless Enter-N-Go. This

feature allows you to lock and unlock the

vehicle’s door(s) without having to push the

key fob lock or unlock buttons.

NOTE:

• Passive Entry can be enabled or disabled.

Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-

dia” in the Owner’s Manual for further in-

formation.

• If wearing gloves on your hands, or if it has

been raining/snowing on the Passive Entry

door handle, the unlock sensitivity can be

affected, resulting in a slower response

time.

• If the vehicle is unlocked by the Passive

Entry Door Handle, and no door is opened

within 60 seconds, the vehicle will re-lock

and if equipped, the security alarm will

arm.

• The key fob may not be able to be detected

by the vehicle keyless-go system if it is

located next to a mobile phone, laptop or

other electronic device; these devices may

block the key fob’s wireless signal and

prevent the keyless-go system from starting

the vehicle.

To Unlock From The Driver's Side

With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft

(1.5 m) of the driver's door handle, grab the

front driver door handle to unlock the driver's

door automatically.

NOTE:

If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is pro-

grammed, all doors will unlock when you grab

hold of the front driver’s door handle. To

select between “Unlock Driver Door 1st

Press” and “Unlock All Doors 1st Press,”

refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-

dia” in the Owner’s Manual for further infor-

mation.

Grab The Door Handle To Unlock

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

To Unlock From The Passenger Side

With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft

(1.5 m) of the passenger door handle, grab

the front passenger door handle to unlock all

four doors and the liftgate automatically.

NOTE:

All doors will unlock when the front passen-

ger door handle is grabbed regardless of the

driver’s door unlock preference setting (“Un-

lock Driver Door 1st Press” or “Unlock All

Doors 1st Press”).

To Lock The Vehicle’s Doors And Liftgate

With one of the vehicle’s Passive Entry key

fobs within 5 ft (1.5 m) of the driver or

passenger front door handles, push the door

handle lock button to lock all four doors.

Do NOT grab the door handle when pushing

the door handle lock button. This could un-

lock the door(s).

NOTE:

The Passive Entry system will not operate if

the key fob battery is dead.

The vehicle doors can also be locked by using

the lock button located on the vehicle’s inte-

rior door panel.

Push The Door Handle Button To Lock DO NOT Grab The Door Handle When

Locking

Preventing Inadvertent Locking Of Passive Entry

Key Fob In Vehicle (FOBIK-Safe)

To minimize the possibility of unintentionally

locking a Passive Entry key fob inside your

vehicle, the Passive Entry system is equipped

with an automatic door unlock feature.

FOBIK-Safe only executes in vehicles with

Passive Entry. There are three situations that

trigger a FOBIK-Safe search in any Passive

Entry vehicle:

1. A lock request is made by a valid Passive

Entry key fob while a door is open.

2. A lock request is made by the Passive

Entry door handle while a door is open.

3. A lock request is made by the door panel

switch while the door is open.

When any of these situations occur, after all

open doors are shut, the FOBIK-Safe search

will be executed. If it finds a Passive Entry

key fob inside the car, and it does not find any

Passive Entry key fobs outside the car, then

the car will unlock and alert the customer.

NOTE:

The vehicle will only unlock the doors when a

valid Passive Entry key fob is detected inside

the vehicle, and no valid Passive Entry key

fob is detected outside the vehicle. The ve-

hicle will not unlock the doors when any of

the following conditions are met:

• The doors are manually locked using the

door lock knobs.

• There is a valid Passive Entry key fob out-

side the vehicle and within 5 ft (1.5 m) of

either Passive Entry door handle.

To Unlock/Enter The Liftgate

The liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is

built into the electronic liftgate release. With

a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft

(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Electronic

Liftgate release to open with one fluid mo-

tion.

To Lock The Liftgate

With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5ft

(1.5 m) of the liftgate, push the Passive Entry

lock button located to the right of electronic

liftgate release.

NOTE:

• The liftgate Passive Entry lock button will

lock the liftgate and the doors. The liftgate

unlock feature is built into the Electronic

Liftgate release.

• If “Unlock All Doors 1st Press” is pro-

grammed in the instrument cluster display,

if equipped, only the liftgate will unlock

when you push the Electronic Release. If

"Unlock Driver Door 1st Press" is pro-

grammed in Uconnect, the liftgate will un-

lock when you push the electronic unlock/

lock button on the liftgate. For further

information, refer to “Uconnect Settings”

in “Multimedia” in the Owner’s Manual for

further information.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Emergency Unlocking Driver Door

If the key fob battery is low or dead, the

emergency key can be used to unlock the

driver side door lock cylinder.

To release the emergency key, proceed as

follows:

1. Slide the emergency key release button to

the side.

2. Remove the emergency key from the key

fob with Remote Control housing.

NOTE:

The Emergency Key can be inserted into the

door lock cylinder from either direction.

WARNING!

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,

or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

Allowing children to be in a vehicle

unattended is dangerous for a number

of reasons. A child or others could be

severely injured or killed. Children

should be warned not to touch the

parking brake, brake pedal, or the gear

selector. Do not leave the key fob in or

near the vehicle, or in a location acces-

sible to children, and do not leave the

ignition in the ON or RUN mode. A

child could start the vehicle, operate

WARNING!

power windows, other controls, or move

the vehicle.

• Do not leave children or animals inside

parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior

heat buildup may cause them to be

severely injured or killed

Child Locks

To provide a safer environment for small chil-

dren riding in the rear seats, the rear doors

are equipped with a Child-Protection Door

Lock system.

To use the system, open each rear door, use a

flat blade screwdriver (or ignition key) and

rotate the dial to the lock or unlock position.

When the system on a door is engaged, that

door can only be opened by using the outside

door handle even if the inside door lock is in

the unlocked position.

Liftgate Release/Passive Entry

1 — Liftgate Handle

2 — Liftgate Passive Entry Location

NOTE:

• When the child lock system is engaged, the

door can only be opened by using the out-

side door handle even though the inside

door lock is in the unlocked position.

• After disengaging the Child-Protection

Door Lock system, always test the door from

the inside to make certain it is in the

desired position.

• After engaging the Child-Protection Door

Lock system, always test the door from the

inside to make certain it is in the desired

position.

• For emergency exit with the system en-

gaged, rotate the lock/unlock dial to the

unlocked position, roll down the window,

and open the door with the outside door

handle.

WARNING!

Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a

collision. Remember that the rear doors

can only be opened from the outside when

the Child-Protection locks are engaged

(locked).

SEATS

Seats are a part of the Occupant Restraint

System of the vehicle.

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,

inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-

WARNING!

sion, people riding in these areas are

more likely to be seriously injured or

killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of

your vehicle that is not equipped with

seats and seat belts. In a collision,

people riding in these areas are more

likely to be seriously injured or killed.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a

seat and using a seat belt properly.

Heated Seats — If Equipped

The heated seat buttons are located in your

vehicle’s touchscreen.

You can choose between two heating levels:

• Press the heated seat button

once to

turn the HI setting on.

• Press the heated seat button

a second

time to turn the LO setting on.

• Press the heated seat button

a third

time to turn the heating elements off.

Child-Protection Door Lock Function

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

If the HI-level setting is selected, the system

will automatically switch to LO-level after

approximately 145 minutes of continuous

operation. At that time, the display will

change from HI to LO, indicating the change.

The LO-level setting will turn off automati-

cally after approximately 60 minutes.

NOTE:

The engine must be running for the heated

seats to operate.

Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped

In vehicles equipped with Auto On Comfort,

when turning on the vehicle the driver’s

heated seat will automatically turn on when

temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C).

Auto Comfort Systems can be enabled or

disabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in

“Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual for

further information.

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to

the skin because of advanced age,

chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord in-

WARNING!

jury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-

tion or other physical condition must

exercise care when using the seat

heater. It may cause burns even at low

temperatures, especially if used for long

periods of time.

• Do not place anything on the seat or

seatback that insulates against heat,

such as a blanket or cushion. This may

cause the seat heater to overheat. Sit-

ting in a seat that has been overheated

could cause serious burns due to the

increased surface temperature of the

seat.

Split Rear Seats

The split rear seat has the ability to fold flat

which increases the storage of the rear cargo

area.

NOTE:

• Prior to folding the rear seat down, it may

be necessary to position the front seat to its

mid-track position. Be sure that the front

seats are fully upright and positioned for-

ward, this will allow the rear seat to fold

down easily.

• Prior to folding the rear seat, you must

secure the rear armrest in the upright posi-

tion.

• You may experience deformation in the seat

cushion from the seat belt buckles if the

seats are left folded for an extended period

of time. This is normal and by simply open-

ing the seats to the open position, over time

the seat cushion will return to its normal

shape.

WARNING!

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a

cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.

In a collision, people riding in these

areas are more likely to be seriously

injured or killed.

WARNING!

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of

your vehicle that is not equipped with

seats and seat belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a

seat and using a seat belt properly.

Cargo Area Enlargement

Folding both sides of the rear seat provides

additional storage in the rear cargo area.

Proceed as follows:

1. Fully lower the rear seat head restraints.

2. Move the safety belts to the outboard side

of the seat.

3. Pull the seatback release lever to fold

both sides of the rear seatbacks com-

pletely forward.

Partial Enlargement Of The Cargo Area

Enlargement of the left side of the cargo area

allows you to carry a single passenger on the

right side of the rear seat, while the enlarge-

ment of the right side allows you to carry two

passengers.

Proceed as follows:

1. Remove the rear shelf (if equipped). Refer

to “Removable Rear Shelf” in “Cargo Area

Features” in your Owner’s Manual for fur-

ther information.

2. Fully lower the rear seat head restraints.

3. Move the safety belts to the outboard side

of the seat and rest them on the seat belt

guide.

4. Pull the seatback release lever to fold the

left or right rear seatback completely

forward.

Seatback Repositioning

NOTE:

If interference from the cargo area prevents

the seatback from fully locking, you will have

difficulty returning the seat to its proper

position.

Rear Seat

Release Lever

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

1. Move the safety belts to the seat belt

guides on the top edge of the seat to

ensure the seatbacks properly latch.

2. Lift the seatbacks, pushing them back

until they lock on both the latches. Verify

the red notches are no longer visible on

the release lever. If the red notches are

visible, the seatback is not secure.

Unfolding The Rear Armrest 40/20/40

Tilt the head restraint forward and pull the

rear armrest tab to release it from the seat

and pull forward.

The center part of the rear seat can also be

used as rear armrest with cupholders.

WARNING!

Be certain that the seatback is securely

locked into position. If the seatback is not

securely locked into position the seat will

not provide the proper stability for child

seats and/or passengers. An improperly

latched seat could cause serious injury.

HEAD RESTRAINTS

Head restraints are designed to reduce the

risk of injury by restricting head movement in

the event of a rear impact. Head restraints

should be adjusted so that the top of the head

restraint is located above the top of your ear.

WARNING!

• All occupants, including the driver,

should not operate a vehicle or sit in a

vehicle’s seat until the head restraints

are placed in their proper positions in

order to minimize the risk of neck injury

in the event of a crash.

• Head restraints should never be ad-

justed while the vehicle is in motion.

Driving a vehicle with the head restraints

improperly adjusted or removed could

cause serious injury or death in the event

of a collision.

Front Head Restraints

Your vehicle is equipped with front driver and

passenger head restraints.

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on the

head restraint. To lower the head restraint,

push the adjustment button, located at the

base of the head restraint, and push down-

ward on the head restraint.

NOTE:

The head restraints should only be removed

by qualified technicians, for service purposes

only. If either of the head restraints require

removal, see an authorized dealer.

Head Restraint Adjustment Button

WARNING!

• All occupants, including the driver,

should not operate a vehicle or sit in a

vehicle’s seat until the head restraints

are placed in their proper positions in

order to minimize the risk of neck injury

in the event of a crash.

• Head restraints should never be ad-

justed while the vehicle is in motion.

Driving a vehicle with the head restraints

improperly adjusted or removed could

cause serious injury or death in the

event of a collision.

Rear Head Restraints

Your vehicle is equipped with two outboard

head restraints and one center head restraint

for its rear passengers. The rear head re-

straints can be raised or lowered. When the

center seat is being occupied, the head re-

straint should be in the raised position. When

there are no occupants in the center seat, the

head restraint can be lowered for maximum

visibility for the driver.

To raise the head restraint, pull upward on

the head restraint.

To lower the head restraint, push the adjust-

ment button, located at the base of the head

restraint, and push downward on the head

restraint.

NOTE:

The head restraints should only be removed

by qualified technicians, for service purposes

only. If either of the head restraints require

removal, see an authorized dealer.

STEERING WHEEL

Tilt/Telescoping Steering Column

This feature allows you to tilt the steering

column upward or downward. It also allows

you to lengthen or shorten the steering col-

umn. The tilt/telescoping lever is located

below the steering wheel at the end of the

steering column.

Adjustment Button Locations

Tilt Steering Wheel Lever

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

To unlock the steering column, push the

tilt/telescoping lever downward (toward the

floor). To tilt the steering column, move the

steering wheel upward or downward as de-

sired. To lengthen or shorten the steering

column, pull the steering wheel outward or

push it inward as desired.

To lock the steering column in position, pull

the tilt/telescoping lever upward until fully

engaged.

WARNING!

Do not adjust the steering column while

driving. Adjusting the steering column

while driving or driving with the steering

column unlocked, could cause the driver

to lose control of the vehicle. Failure to

follow this warning may result in serious

injury or death.

Heated Steering Wheel — If Equipped

The steering wheel contains a heating ele-

ment that helps warm your hands in cold

weather. The heated steering wheel has only

one temperature setting. Once the heated

steering wheel switch

has been turned

on, it will stay on for an average of 80 minutes

or more before automatically shutting off.

This time will vary based on environmental

temperatures. The heated steering wheel can

shut off early or may not turn on when the

steering wheel is already warm. The heated

steering wheel control button is located in

your vehicle’s touchscreen.

Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped

In vehicles equipped with Auto On Comfort,

when turning on the vehicle the heated steer-

ing wheel will automatically turn on when

temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C).

Auto Comfort Systems can be enabled or

disabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in

“Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual for

further information.

WARNING!

• Persons who are unable to feel pain to

the skin because of advanced age,

WARNING!

chronic illness, diabetes, spinal cord in-

jury, medication, alcohol use, exhaus-

tion, or other physical conditions must

exercise care when using the steering

wheel heater. It may cause burns even at

low temperatures, especially if used for

long periods.

• Do not place anything on the steering

wheel that insulates against heat, such

as a blanket or steering wheel covers of

any type and material. This may cause

the steering wheel heater to overheat.

MIRRORS

Folding Mirror

The exterior mirrors are hinged to allow the

mirror to pivot forward or rearward to help

avoid damage. The mirror has three detent

positions: full forward, normal and full rear-

ward.

Power Folding/Unfolding Mirrors — If Equipped

Push the mirror fold/unfold switch briefly to

fold or unfold the exterior mirrors.

To fold or unfold the exterior mirrors, the

ignition must be in the RUN position.

NOTE:

The fold/unfold mirrors switch will remain

active for up to three minutes after the igni-

tion is cycled to the OFF position. Opening

either front door will cancel this feature.

Heated Mirrors — If Equipped

These mirrors are heated to melt

frost or ice. This feature can be ac-

tivated whenever you turn on the

Rear Window Defroster.

EXTERIOR LIGHTS

Headlights

The headlight switch is located on the left

side of the instrument panel. The headlight

switch controls the operation of the head-

lights, side marker lights, daytime running

lights, fog lights and the dimming of the

instrument cluster and interior lighting.

Turning on the headlights will illuminate the

instrument cluster and the controls located

on the instrument panel.

Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If

Equipped

The Daytime Running Lights (DRLs) will turn

on when the engine is started and remain on

unless the headlights are turned on or the

engine is shut off.

Power Mirror Switch

1 — Power Folding Mirror Switch

2 — Mirror Adjustment Switch

3 — Mirror Selector Switch

Headlight Switch

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

The DRLs will be disabled during turn signal

operation and resume operation when the

turn signal operation has ended.

High Beams

To turn on the high beam headlights, push

the turn signal lever forward (toward the front

of the vehicle) and an indicator will illumi-

nate in the cluster. To turn off the high

beams, pull the turn signal lever rearward

(toward the rear of the vehicle).

NOTE:

The headlights must be on for the high beams

to activate.

Flash-To-Pass

You can signal another vehicle with your

headlights by lightly pulling the multifunc-

tion lever toward you. This will cause the

headlights to turn on at high beam and re-

main on until the lever is released.

Automatic Headlights — If Equipped

This system automatically turns the head-

lights on or off according to ambient light

levels. To turn the system on, rotate the

headlight switch clockwise to the last detent

(AUTO position) for automatic headlight op-

eration. When the system is on, the headlight

time delay feature is also on. This means the

headlights will stay on for up to 90 seconds

after you place the ignition into the OFF

position. To turn the automatic system off,

move the headlight switch out of the AUTO

position.

Refer to “Headlight Delay” in this section for

more information.

NOTE:

The ignition must be in the RUN or START

position before the headlights will come on in

the automatic mode.

Light Sensor

The light sensor is equipped with an infrared

LED, located on the windshield. It detects

changes in light intensity outside the vehicle,

based on the sensitivity of light set by using

the menu on the display or on the Uconnect

system.

The higher the sensitivity, the lesser the

amount of external light required for control-

ling the lighting.

Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control

— If Equipped

The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Control

system provides increased forward lighting at

night by automating high beam control

through the use of a digital camera mounted

on the inside rearview mirror. This camera

detects vehicle specific light and automati-

cally switches from high beams to low beams

until the approaching vehicle is out of view.

NOTE:

• The multifunction lever must be in the high

beam position in order to activate the Au-

tomatic High Beams.

High Beam And Turn Signal Controls

• The Automatic High Beam Headlamp Con-

trol can be turned on or off using the

Uconnect System. Refer to “Uconnect Set-

tings” in “Multimedia” in your Owner’s

Manual for further information.

• Broken, muddy, or obstructed headlights

and taillights of vehicles in the field of view

will cause headlights to remain on longer

(closer to the vehicle). Also, dirt, film, and

other obstructions on the windshield or

camera lens will cause the system to func-

tion improperly.

When set to AUTO, the system automatically

turns the headlights on or off based on am-

bient light levels.

Parking Lights

From the O (off) position, rotate the headlight

switch to the first detent (parking position) to

turn on the parking lights. The parking light

indicator in the instrument cluster will illu-

minate.

Headlight Delay

This feature provides the safety of headlight

illumination for up to 90 seconds when leav-

ing your vehicle in an unlit area.

The time delay of the headlights is program-

mable between 0, 30, 60 and 90 seconds.

Headlight Delay Activation

To activate the delay feature, place the igni-

tion in the OFF position while the headlights

are still on. Then, turn off the headlights

within two minutes. The delay interval begins

when the headlight switch is turned off from

the “Low beam” position.

If the headlight switch is in AUTO position

and headlights were on before the ignition is

OFF, the delay interval begins automatically.

Headlight Delay Deactivation

The feature is disabled by turning on the

headlights, the parking lights or by placing

the ignition in the RUN position.

If you shut off the lights before the ignition is

turned on, they will turn off in the normal

manner.

NOTE:

The lights must be turned off within two

minutes of placing the ignition in the OFF

position to activate this feature.

Front Fog Lights — If Equipped

The front fog light switch is built into the

headlight switch.

To activate the front fog lights, turn on the

parking lights or the low beam headlights and

push the fog light button on the headlight

switch. To turn off the front fog lights, push

the fog light button on the headlight switch a

second time or turn off the headlight switch.

An indicator light in the instrument cluster

illuminates when the fog lights are turned on.

NOTE:

The fog lights will operate with the low beam

headlights or parking lights on. Selecting the

high beam headlights will turn off the fog

lights.

Cornering Lights

The cornering lights are a feature to improve

visibility at night while turning the vehicle.

When activated, a light incorporated in the

front fog light will illuminate on the side of

the vehicle the steering wheel is rotated or

the turn signal indicator is on. It can be

activated through the Uconnect System.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-

dia” in your Owner’s Manual for further infor-

mation.

Turn Signals

Move the multifunction lever up or down and

the arrows on each side of the instrument

cluster flash to show proper operation of the

front and rear turn signal lights.

NOTE:

When the Daytime Running Lights are on and

a turn signal is activated, the Daytime Run-

ning Lamp will turn off on the side of the

vehicle in which the turn signal is flashing.

The Daytime Running Lamp will turn back on

when the turn signal is turned off.

WIPERS AND WASHERS

The windshield wiper/washer controls are lo-

cated on the lever on the right side of the

steering column. The front wipers are oper-

ated by rotating a switch, located on the end

of the lever.

CAUTION!

Always remove any buildup of snow that pre-

vents the windshield wiper blades from re-

turning to the “park” position. If the wind-

shield wiper switch is turned off, and the

blades cannot return to the “park” position,

damage to the wiper motor may occur.

Front Wiper Operation

Rotate the windshield wiper knob to one of

the two detent positions for intermittent set-

tings, the third detent for low wiper operation

and the fourth for high wiper operation.

Windshield Washer Operation

To use the washer, pull the lever toward you

and hold while spray is desired. If the lever is

pulled while in the intermittent setting, the

wipers will turn on and operate for several

wipe cycles after the lever is released, and

then resume the intermittent interval previ-

ously selected.

If the lever is pulled while the wipers are in

the off position, the wipers will operate for

several wipe cycles, then turn off.

WARNING!

Sudden loss of visibility through the wind-

shield could lead to a collision. You might

not see other vehicles or other obstacles. To

avoid sudden icing of the windshield during

freezing weather, warm the windshield with

the defroster before and during windshield

washer use.

Mist

Use this feature when weather conditions

make occasional usage of the wipers neces-

sary. Push the lever upward to the MIST

position and release for a single wiping cycle.

Windshield Wiper Stalk

NOTE:

The Mist feature does not activate the washer

pump; therefore, no washer fluid will be

sprayed on the windshield. The wash func-

tion must be used in order to spray the

windshield with washer fluid.

Rain Sensing Wipers — If Equipped

This feature senses moisture on the wind-

shield and automatically activates the wipers

for the driver. The feature is especially useful

for road splash or overspray from the wind-

shield washers of the vehicle ahead. Rotate

the end of the multifunction lever to one of

the two detent positions for intermittent set-

tings, to activate this feature.

NOTE:

If the end of the multifunction lever rotates

from off to the first intermittent setting or

from the first intermittent setting to the sec-

ond intermittent setting, the wipers will per-

form a round up to clean the windshield.

This function can be activated or deactivated

by the Uconnect Settings through the radio.

Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in “Multime-

dia” in your Owner’s Manual for further infor-

mation.

The sensitivity of the system can be adjusted

with the multifunction lever. Wiper delay po-

sition one is the least sensitive, and wiper

delay position two is the most sensitive.

Place the wiper switch in the off position

when not using the system.

Rain Sensing Wipers – Inhibition

When the user switches the ignition from OFF

to RUN or START with the lever already in the

intermittent position, no wipe cycle is per-

formed for safety reasons. This temporary

inhibition avoids accidental activations of the

wiping (e.g during the hand washing of the

windscreen, blocking the blades in ice/snow

conditions). The user can activate the Rain

Sensing Wipers in three ways:

• Moving the level in off position and then in

Intermittent positions.

• One MIST command actuation.

• The vehicle speed exceeds 3 mph (5 km/h)

and the rain sensor detects the presence of

rain.

NOTE:

On vehicles equipped with automatic trans-

mission, the Rain Sensing Wipers will be-

come inactive even if the lever is in one of the

intermittent positions if the vehicle is placed

in NEUTRAL and the vehicle speed is less

than 3 mph (5 km/h). This prevents damage

to the windshield wipers during an automatic

car wash.

NOTE:

• The Rain Sensing feature will not operate

when the wiper switch is in the low or

high-speed position.

• The Rain Sensing feature may not function

properly when ice, or dried salt water is

present on the windshield.

• Use of Rain-X or products containing wax or

silicone may reduce Rain Sensing perfor-

mance.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

• The Rain Sensing feature can be turned on

and off using the Uconnect System, refer to

“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in

your Owner’s Manual for further

information.

Rear Wiper Operation

The rear wiper/washer controls are located on

the lever on the right side of the steering

column. The rear wiper/washer is operated by

rotating a switch, located at the middle of the

lever.

NOTE:

If the front wiper is moving and the vehicle is

shifted in REVERSE, the rear wiper will per-

form one round up to clean the rear window.

Rotate the center portion of the lever upward

to the first detent for intermittent operation

and to the second detent for continuous rear

wiper operation. If the front wiper is set to

Automatic Mode (on the wiper stalk as well as

“Enabled” through Uconnect settings), plac-

ing the rear wiper in an intermittent position

will cause the front and rear wipers to sync

up. Turning the front wipers off will cause the

rear wipers to also stop.

To use the washer, push the lever forward and

hold while spray is desired. If the lever is

pushed while in the intermittent setting, the

wiper will turn on and operate for several wipe

cycles after the end of the lever is released,

and then resume the intermittent interval

previously selected.

If the lever is pushed while the wiper is in the

off position, the wiper will operate for several

wipe cycles, then turn off.

NOTE:

As a protective measure, the pump will stop if

the switch is held for more than 30 seconds.

Once the lever is released, the pump will

resume normal operation.

Rear Window Defroster

The rear window defroster button is located

with the Climate Controls on the instrument

panel. Push this button to turn on the rear

window defroster. An indicator in the button

will illuminate when the rear window de-

froster is on. The rear window defroster auto-

matically turns off after approximately

20 minutes. To manually shut the defroster

off, push the button a second time.

Auto Comfort Systems — If Equipped

In vehicles equipped with Auto On Comfort,

when turning on the vehicle the driver’s

heated seat will automatically turn on when

temperatures are below 40° F (4.4° C).

Auto Comfort Systems can be enabled or

disabled. Refer to “Uconnect Settings” in

“Multimedia” in your Owner’s Manual for

further information.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause

damage to the heating elements:

• Use care when washing the inside of the

rear window. Do not use abrasive window

cleaners on the interior surface of the

window. Use a soft cloth and a mild

washing solution, wiping parallel to the

heating elements. Labels can be peeled

off after soaking with warm water.

• Do not use scrapers, sharp instruments,

or abrasive window cleaners on the inte-

rior surface of the window.

• Keep all objects a safe distance from the

window.

CLIMATE CONTROLS

Automatic Climate Control Overview

Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch Display Automatic Climate Controls

Automatic Temperature Controls (ATC)

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Automatic Climate Control Descriptions

Icon Description

MAX A/C Button

MAX A/C sets the system for maximum cooling performance. Push the button to turn on the MAX A/C setting. In MAX

A/C, the blower speed and mode position can be adjusted to desired user settings.

A/C Button

Push the A/C Control Button to change the current setting. The indicator illuminates when the A/C is ON. Pushing the

AUTO control button will cause the A/C operation to change to AUTO mode and the A/C indicator will turn off.

Recirculation Button

Push to change the current setting. The LED illuminates when ON.

NOTE:

• When in Max Defrost mode, the Recirculation button will change the setting to normal Defrost mode. This indicates

that you can not enter to this mode due to fogging risk.

• When the Auto indicator is ON and the Recirculation indicator is off, the Recirculation is in AUTO mode. If the Re-

circulation indicator is on, the Recirculation setting is manual and Recirculation is on.

AUTO Button

Pushing this button will automatically control the interior cabin temperature by adjusting airflow distribution and

amount. Performing this function will cause the automatic climate controls to change between manual mode and

automatic modes. Refer to “Automatic Operation” within this section for more information.

FRONT

Front Defrost Button

The Front Defrost button changes the current airflow setting to Defrost mode. The indicator illuminates when this

feature is on. Air comes from the windshield and side window demist outlets. When the defrost button is selected,

the blower level may increase. Use Defrost mode with maximum temperature settings for best windshield and side

window defrosting and defogging. When toggling the front defrost mode button, the climate system will return to pre-

vious setting.

Icon Description

Rear Defrost Button

Push the Rear Defrost button to turn on the rear window defroster and the heated outside mirrors (if equipped). An indi-

cator will illuminate when the rear window defroster is on.

Faceplate Knob

MODE

Touchscreen Buttons

Blower Control

Blower Control is used to regulate the amount of air forced through the climate system. There are seven blower speeds

available. The speeds can be selected using either the blower control knob on the faceplate or the buttons on the touch-

screen.

• Faceplate: The blower speed increases as you turn the blower control knob clockwise from the lowest blower setting. The

blower speed decreases as you turn the blower control knob counterclockwise.

•

Touchscreen: Use the small blower icon to reduce the blower setting and the large blower icon to increase the blower

setting. Blower speed can also be selected by pressing the blower bar area between the icons.

Driver and Passenger Temperature Control

Push these buttons to regulate the temperature of the driver and passenger settings independently. Pushing the blue

arrow indicates cooler temperatures, while pushing the red button indicates warmer temperatures.

SYNC Button

Press the SYNC button on the touchscreen to toggle the SYNC feature on/off. The SYNC indicator is illuminated when

this feature is enabled. SYNC is used to synchronize the passenger temperature setting with the driver temperature set-

ting. Changing the passenger’s temperature setting while in SYNC will automatically exit this feature.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Icon Description

Mode Button

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy con-

ditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture

on the windshield.

Panel Mode

Air comes from the outlets in the instrument panel. Each of these outlets can be individually adjusted to direct the flow

of air. The air vanes of the center outlets and outboard outlets can be moved up and down or side to side to regulate

airflow direction. There is a shut off wheel located below the air vanes to shut off or adjust the amount of airflow from

these outlets.

Bi-Level Mode

Air comes from the instrument panel outlets and floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and

side window demister outlets.

NOTE:

Bi-Level mode is designed under comfort conditions to provide cooler air out of the panel outlets and warmer air from

the floor outlets.

Floor Mode

Air comes from the floor outlets. A slight amount of air is directed through the defrost and side window demister out-

lets.

Mix Mode

Air is directed through the floor, defrost, and side window demister outlets. This setting works best in cold or snowy con-

ditions that require extra heat to the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining comfort while reducing moisture

on the windshield.

Icon Description

Climate Control OFF Button

This button turns the Climate Control System off.

Climate Control System Compressor

Push the A/C Control button to activate/

deactivate the compressor (activation is indi-

cated by the LED on the button turning on).

The system remembers that the compressor

has been turned off, even after the engine

has stopped.

Pushing the A/C button will stop AUTO

MODE (AUTO LED will turn off). To restore

automatic control of compressor, push the

AUTO button again.

NOTE:

With the compressor off, air cannot be intro-

duced to the passenger compartment with a

temperature lower than the outside tempera-

ture. Under certain environmental condi-

tions, windows could fog rapidly since the air

is not dehumidified.

Rapid Window Demisting (MAX-Defrost Func-

tion)

Push the MAX-defrost button to activate

(LED on) the windshield and side window

demisting function.

The Climate Control system carries out the

following operations:

• Turns on the air conditioning compressor

when environmental conditions are suit-

able.

• Turns air recirculation off.

• Sets blower fan to the maximum speed.

• Directs air flow to windshield and front side

window diffusers.

When the Recirculation Control or AUTO but-

tons are pushed, the Climate Control system

will deactivate the Front Defrost (MAX-DEF)

function.

Selecting the footwell/windshield or only

windshield distribution activates the Climate

Control system compressor and the air recir-

culation is set to outside air intake.

This logic guarantees optimum visibility at

the windows. Max-defrost is also available in

manual mode.

Rear Window Defrosting

Push and release the rear window defrost

button to turn the function on/off.

Activation of this function is indicated by the

rear defrost indicator light on the instrument

panel turning on. If equipped, push the rear

defrost button to activate the defrosting of

door mirrors and heated rear window.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

To avoid causing damage to the rear win-

dow defroster heating filaments do not

affix stickers or other objects to the inside

of the rear glass.

Turning Off The Climate Control System

Push the ON/OFF button.

With the Climate Control system off:

• Air recirculation is on, isolating the passen-

ger compartment from the outside.

• The A/C compressor is off.

• The blower is off.

• The heated rear window can be

activated/deactivated.

NOTE:

The Climate Control unit stores the tempera-

tures set before the system was turned off

and restores them when one of the following

knobs/buttons is pushed:

• A/C

• Recirculation

• Max Defrost

• Blower Increase

• AUTO

To restart the Climate Control system in fully

automatic mode, push the AUTO button.

System Maintenance

In Winter, the Climate Control system must

be turned on at least once a month for ap-

proximately ten minutes.

Have the system inspected at an authorized

dealership before the summer.

NOTE:

This AC system uses R1234yf Refrigerant.

Climate Control Functions

A/C (Air Conditioning)

The Air Conditioning (A/C) button allows the

operator to manually activate or deactivate

the air conditioning system. When the air

conditioning system is turned on, cool dehu-

midified air will flow through the outlets into

the cabin. For improved fuel economy, press

the A/C button to turn off the air conditioning

and manually adjust the blower and airflow

mode settings. Also, make sure to select only

Panel, Bi-Level, or Floor modes.

NOTE:

• If fog or mist appears on the windshield or

side glass, select Defrost mode and in-

crease blower speed if needed.

• If your air conditioning performance seems

lower than expected, check the front of the

A/C condenser (located in front of the ra-

diator), for an accumulation of dirt or in-

sects. Clean with a gentle water spray from

the front of the radiator and through the

condenser.

MAX A/C

MAX A/C sets the control for maximum cool-

ing performance. Press and release to toggle

between MAX A/C and the prior settings. The

button illuminates when MAX A/C is ON.

Pressing blower speed, temperature, recircu-

lation, or mode settings, will cause the MAX

A/C operation to switch to the selected set-

ting and MAX A/C to exit.

Recirculation

In cold weather, use of Recirculation mode

may lead to excessive window fogging. The

Recirculation feature may be unavailable

(button on the touchscreen greyed out) if

conditions exist that could create fogging on

the inside of the windshield.

On systems with Manual Climate Controls,

the Recirculation mode is not allowed in

Defrost mode to improve window clearing

operation. Recirculation is disabled auto-

matically if this mode is selected. Attempting

to use Recirculation while in this mode

causes the LED in the control button to blink

and then turns off.

Automatic Temperature Control (ATC) —

If Equipped

Automatic Operation

1. Push the AUTO button on the front ATC

panel. The system regulates the amount

of airflow.

2. Adjust the temperature you would like the

system to maintain, by adjusting the

driver, and passenger temperatures. Once

the desired temperature is displayed, the

system will achieve and automatically

maintain that comfort level.

3. When the system is set up for your comfort

level, it is not necessary to change the

settings. You will experience the greatest

efficiency by simply allowing the system

to function automatically.

NOTE:

• It is not necessary to move the temperature

settings. The system automatically adjusts

the temperature, mode, and fan speed to

provide comfort as quickly as possible.

To provide you with maximum comfort in the

automatic mode, during cold start-ups, the

blower fan will remain on low until the engine

warms up. The fan will engage immediately if

the Defrost mode is selected, or by changing

the front blower knob setting.

Operating Tips

Summer Operation

The engine cooling system must be protected

with a high-quality antifreeze coolant to pro-

vide proper corrosion protection and to pro-

tect against engine overheating. OAT coolant

(conforming to MS.90032) is recommended.

Winter Operation

To ensure the best possible heater and defroster

performance, make sure the engine cooling sys-

tem is functioning properly and the proper

amount, type, and concentration of coolant is

used. Use of the Air Recirculation mode during

Winter months is not recommended, because it

may cause window fogging.

Vacation/Storage

Before you store your vehicle, or keep it out of

service (i.e., vacation) for two weeks or more,

run the air conditioning system at idle for

about five minutes, in fresh air with the

blower setting on high. This will ensure ad-

equate system lubrication to minimize the

possibility of compressor damage when the

system is started again.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

Window Fogging

Vehicle windows tend to fog on the inside in

mild, rainy, and/or humid weather. To clear

the windows, select Defrost or Mix mode and

increase the front blower speed. Do not use

the Recirculation mode without A/C for long

periods, as fogging may occur.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these cautions can cause

damage to the heating elements:

• Use care when washing the inside of

the rear window. Do not use abrasive

window cleaners on the interior surface

of the window. Use a soft cloth and a

mild washing solution, wiping parallel

to the heating elements. Labels can be

peeled off after soaking with warm

water.

• Do not use scrapers, sharp instru-

ments, or abrasive window cleaners on

the interior surface of the window.

• Keep all objects a safe distance from

the window.

Outside Air Intake

Make sure the air intake, located directly in

front of the windshield, is free of obstruc-

tions, such as leaves. Leaves collected in the

air intake may reduce airflow, and if they

enter the plenum, they could plug the water

drains. In Winter months, make sure the air

intake is clear of ice, slush, and snow.

Cabin Air Filter

The climate control system filters out dust

and pollen from the air. Contact an autho-

rized dealer to service your cabin air filter,

and to have it replaced when needed.

WINDOWS

Power Window Controls

The power window switch is located on the

driver’s door panel. The driver’s power win-

dow switch controls the operation of all the

windows.

Power Window Switches

1 — Window Lockout Switch (Rear

Doors)

2 — Opening/Closing Left/Right Rear

Window

3 — Opening/Closing Left/Right Front

Window

There are single window controls on each

passenger door trim panel, which operate the

passenger door windows. The window con-

trols will operate only when the ignition is in

the ON or RUN position.

NOTE:

• If the Remote Start functionality is active,

it is not possible to move any windows.

• The power window switches will remain

active for up to three minutes after the

ignition is cycled to the OFF position.

Opening either front door will cancel this

feature.

Push the Window Lockout switch to disable

rear passenger window controls. When this

feature is active, the LED light will illuminate

and only the driver can operate the rear

passenger windows. To undo this feature,

push the switch again and the LED will turn

off.

WARNING!

Never leave children unattended in a ve-

hicle, and do not let children play with

WARNING!

power windows. Do not leave the key fob in

or near the vehicle, or in a location acces-

sible to children, and do not leave the

ignition of a vehicle equipped with Keyless

Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN mode.

Occupants, particularly unattended chil-

dren, can become entrapped by the win-

dows while operating the power window

switches. Such entrapment may result in

serious injury or death.

Auto-Down Feature

The driver door power window switch and the

front and rear passenger doors window

switches have an Auto-Down feature.

Push the window switch down for half a

second and release. The window will go down

automatically.

To stop the window from going all the way

down during the Auto-Down operation, pull

up or push down on the switch briefly.

To open the window part way (manually),

push the window switch down briefly and

release.

Auto-Up Feature With Auto-Reverse

Protection — If Equipped

The driver door power window switch and the

front passenger door window switch have an

Auto-Up feature.

Pull the window switch up, for about half a

second, and release and the window will go

up automatically.

To stop the window from going all the way up

during the Auto-Up operation, pull up or push

down on the switch briefly.

To close the window part way (manually), pull

the window switch up briefly and release it.

NOTE:

• If the window runs into any obstacle during

auto-closure, it will reverse direction and

then go back down. Remove the obstacle

and use the window switch again to close

the window.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

• Any impact due to rough road conditions

may trigger the auto-reverse function unex-

pectedly during auto-closure. If this hap-

pens, pull the switch lightly to the first

detent and hold to close the window

manually.

WARNING!

There is no auto-reverse protection when

the window is almost closed. To avoid

personal injury be sure to clear your arms,

hands, fingers and all objects from the

window path before closing.

Reset Auto-Up

Should the Auto-Up feature stop working, the

window probably needs to be reset. To reset

Auto-Up:

1. Pull the window switch up to close the

window completely and continue to hold

the switch up for an additional two sec-

onds after the window is closed.

2. Push the window switch down firmly to

open the window completely and continue

to hold the switch down for an additional

two seconds after the window is fully

open.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the per-

ception of pressure on the ears or a

helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your ve-

hicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the

windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in

certain open or partially open positions. This

is a normal occurrence and can be mini-

mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear

windows open, open the front and rear win-

dows together to minimize the buffeting. If

the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,

adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the

buffeting or open any window.

POWER MY SKY SUN ROOF

Power My Sky Operation

Open/Close The Front Panel

The power My Sky switches are located on the

overhead console. The switches are used to

open and close the front panel.

To automatically retract the front panel to the

open position, push the open/close button

and release. From the fully open position,

pull the open/close switch and release. The

front panel will close completely.

To stop the movement of the front panel

during automatic closing or opening, briefly

push the open/close switch.

Venting The Front Panel

To vent the front panel push and release the

vent switch.

During the vent operation any push on the

open/close switch will stop the closing of the

panel.

NOTE:

• If the My Sky is in open position, the vent

switch must be held until the panel vents.

• The power roof controls will operate only

when the ignition is in the ON or RUN

position.

• If the Remote Start functionality is active,

it will not be possible to move the roof.

Auto-Reverse Feature

The front panel of the retractable roof is

equipped with a auto-reverse safety system

that is able to detect the presence of an

obstacle during the opening and closing mo-

tion of the panel.

When this event occurs, the front panel stops

and reverses immediately.

NOTE:

With both panels removed the retractable

roof cannot be opened or closed.

Sunroof Reinitialization

The following procedure must be followed to

reinitialize the sunroof and calibrate obstacle

detection:

1. Place the ignition in the RUN position.

2. Push and hold the front panel close

switch until the sunroof panel is fully

closed, then release the switch.

3. Open the driver side front door.

4. Turn the ignition OFF.

5. After 10 seconds, place the ignition back

in the RUN position.

6. Push and hold the front panel close

switch again. The reinitialization process

will begin within 10 seconds. Do not re-

lease the switch.

7. The sunroof will stop and an audible

“click” will be heard.

8. Release the front panel close switch, then

push and hold it again within 5 seconds.

Do not release the switch.

9. As the front panel close switch is held, the

sunroof panel will cycle to the fully open

position and then back to the fully closed

position again.

10. Once all sunroof motion has stopped,

release the front panel close switch.

Sunroof reinitialization and obstacle

calibration is now complete.

NOTE:

If the switch is released prior to the sunroof

completing the above procedure, the entire

process must be repeated.

Emergency Open/Close

If the Power My Sky switch fails, the retract-

able roof can be operated manually as fol-

lows:

1. Remove the protective cap located on the

inner lining.

2. Remove the Allen Key or My Sky Key that

is supplied in the tool bag in the cargo

area.

3. Insert the Allen Key or My Sky Key into the

key hole and turn it clockwise to open the

roof or counter-clockwise to close.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

CAUTION!

• When refitting panels, be careful to

avoid fingers, scarves, ties and items of

clothing from getting caught under the

panels themselves.

• Do not open the roof in the presence of

snow or ice. There is risk of damage.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the per-

ception of pressure on the ears or a

helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your ve-

hicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the

windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in

certain open or partially open positions. This

is a normal occurrence and can be mini-

mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear

windows open, then open the front and rear

windows together to minimize the buffeting.

If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,

adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the

buffeting or open any window.

POWER GLASS SUNROOF

WITH POWER SHADE — IF

EQUIPPED

The power sunroof switches are located be-

tween the sun visors on the overhead console.

WARNING!

• Never leave children unattended in a

vehicle, or with access to an unlocked

vehicle. Never leave the key fob in or

near the vehicle, or in a location acces-

sible to children. Do not leave the igni-

tion of a vehicle equipped with Keyless

Enter-N-Go in the ON/RUN mode. Occu-

pants, particularly unattended children,

can become entrapped by the power

sunroof while operating the power sun-

roof switch. Such entrapment may result

in serious injury or death.

• In a collision, there is a greater risk of

being thrown from a vehicle with an

open sunroof. You could also be seri-

ously injured or killed. Always fasten

your seat belt properly and make sure all

passengers are also properly secured.

• Do not allow small children to operate

the sunroof. Never allow your fingers,

other body parts, or any object, to proj-

ect through the sunroof opening. Injury

may result.

Power Sunroof Switches

1 — Power Sunshade Open/Close

2 — Power Sunroof Open/Close

3 — Venting Sunroof

Opening

Opening Sunroof

To retract the sunroof to the open position,

push the Open/Close switch and the sunroof

will fully open. The sunroof can be stopped in

any position by pushing/pulling the switch a

second time while is opening.

Venting Sunroof

To vent the sunroof push the Vent switch.

NOTE:

The vent switch has the automatic function

only at the opening of the sunroof. During the

closing of the sunroof, the switch must be

held until closed.

Closing

Closing Sunroof

To close the sunroof completely, pull the

Open/Close switch and the sunroof will fully

close. The sunroof can be stopped in any

position by pushing/pulling the switch a sec-

ond time while it is closing.

Wind Buffeting

Wind buffeting can be described as the per-

ception of pressure on the ears or a

helicopter-type sound in the ears. Your ve-

hicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the

windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in

certain open or partially open positions. This

is a normal occurrence and can be mini-

mized. If the buffeting occurs with the rear

windows open, then open the front and rear

windows together to minimize the buffeting.

If the buffeting occurs with the sunroof open,

adjust the sunroof opening to minimize the

buffeting or open any window.

Power Sun Shade

Opening Power Shade — Automatic Mode

Push the shade switch for about one-half

second and the shade will automatically

open. During the automatic open operation,

any movement of the shade switch will stop

the shade.

Opening Power Shade — Manual Mode

To open the shade part way (manually), push

the shade switch briefly and release.

Closing Power Shade — Automatic Mode

Pull the shade switch for about one-half sec-

ond and the shade will automatically close.

During the automatic close operation, any

movement of the shade switch will stop the

shade.

Closing Power Shade — Manual Mode

To close the shade part way (manually), pull

the shade switch briefly and release.

NOTE:

• The sunroof and the shade controls will

operate only when the ignition is in the ON

or RUN position.

• If the Remote Start functionality is active,

it is not possible to move the sunroof.

Auto Reverse Feature

This feature will detect an obstruction in the

opening of the sunroof during the Automatic

Close operation. If an obstruction in the path

of the sunroof is detected, the sunroof will

automatically retract. Remove the obstruc-

tion if this occurs.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

WARNING!

• Do not let children play with the sunroof.

Never leave children unattended in a

vehicle, or with access to an unlocked

vehicle. Do not leave the key fob in or

near the vehicle, and do not leave the

ignition of a vehicle equipped with Key-

less Enter-N-Go in the ACC or ON/RUN

mode. Occupants, particularly unat-

tended children, can become entrapped

by the power sunroof while operating the

power sunroof switch. Such entrapment

may result in serious injury or death.

• In a collision, there is a greater risk of

being thrown from a vehicle with an

open sunroof. You could also be severely

injured or killed. Always fasten your seat

belt properly and make sure all passen-

gers are properly secured.

• Do not allow small children to operate

the sunroof. Never allow your fingers,

other body parts, or any object to project

through the sunroof opening. Injury may

result.

Sunroof Maintenance

Use only a non-abrasive cleaner and a soft

cloth to clean the glass panel.

HOOD

To Open The Hood

Two latches must be released to open the

hood.

1. Pull the hood release lever located under

the driver’s side of the instrument panel.

2. Move to the outside of the vehicle and

push the safety latch release lever toward

the passenger side of the vehicle. The

hood release lever is located behind the

center front edge of the hood.

Remove the support rod from the locking tab

and insert it into the seat located on the

underside of the hood. Be sure the rod is

locked into position.

To Close The Hood

Hold up the hood with one hand, and with the

other hand, remove the support rod from its

seat and reinsert it into the locking tab.

Hood Release Lever

Lower the hood to approximately 12 inches

(30 cm) from the engine compartment and

drop. Make sure that the hood is completely

closed.

WARNING!

Be sure the hood is fully latched before

driving your vehicle. If the hood is not fully

latched, it could open when the vehicle is

in motion and block your vision. Failure to

follow this warning could result in serious

injury or death.

CAUTION!

To prevent possible damage, do not slam

the hood to close it. Lower hood to approxi-

mately 12 inches (30 cm) and drop the

hood to close. Make sure hood is fully

closed for both latches. Never drive ve-

hicle unless hood is fully closed, with both

latches engaged.

LIFTGATE

Opening

To unlock the liftgate, use the key fob or

activate the power door lock switches located

on the driver door handle.

To open the liftgate, squeeze the electronic

liftgate release and pull the liftgate open with

one fluid motion.

The Liftgate Passive Entry unlock feature is

built into the Electronic Liftgate release.

With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft

(1.5 m) of the Liftgate, push the Electronic

Liftgate release to open with one fluid mo-

tion.

Emergency Opening

Proceed as follows:

1. Remove the rear shelf (if equipped).

2. Fold the rear seats forward.

Liftgate Release/Passive Entry

1 — Liftgate Handle

2 — Liftgate Passive Entry Location

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

3. Using the supplied screwdriver (located

under cargo floor in tool kit), remove the

yellow tab.

4. Insert the screwdriver into the release tab

slot to trigger the release tab of the

liftgate.

Closing

Grasp the liftgate pull handle and initiate

lowering the liftgate. Release the handle

when the liftgate reaches self closing posi-

tion.

NOTE:

Before closing the liftgate, make sure to be in

possession of the key because the liftgate

may be locked.

To Lock The Liftgate

With a valid Passive Entry key fob within 5 ft

(1.5 m) of the liftgate, pushing the Keyless

Enter-N-Go — Passive Entry lock button lo-

cated to the right of the outside handle re-

lease will lock the vehicle.

NOTE:

The liftgate unlock feature is built into the

electronic liftgate release.

INTERNAL EQUIPMENT

Power Outlet

There are two 12 Volt (13 Amp) power outlets

in this vehicle, one located under the HVAC

controls and one located in the drivers side

rear cargo area. These power outlets can

power mobile phones, electronics and other

low power devices.

• This power outlet is located in front of the

gear selector.

• This power outlet is located in the drivers

side rear cargo area.

NOTE:

• Do not exceed the maximum power of

160 Watts (13 Amps) at 12 Volts. If the

160 Watt (13 Amp) power rating is ex-

ceeded, the fuse protecting the system will

need to be replaced.

Front Power Outlet

Rear Cargo Power Outlet

• Power outlets are designed for accessory

plugs only. Do not insert any other object in

the power outlet as this will damage the

outlet and blow the fuse. Improper use of

the power outlet can cause damage not

covered by your new vehicle warranty.

Power Inverter — If Equipped

There is a 115 Volt, 150 Watt power inverter

outlet located on the back of the center

console. This outlet can power cellular

phones, electronics and other low power de-

vices requiring power up to 150 Watts.

• To turn on the power outlet, simply plug in

the device. The outlet automatically turns

off when the device is unplugged.

Engine Compartment Fuses

F18 Fuse 20A Yellow Rear Cargo Power

Outlet.

Body Computer Fuses

F94 Fuse 15A Blue Instrument Panel

Power Outlet.

Power Inverter

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR VEHICLE

NOTE:

The power inverter is designed with built-in

overload protection. If the power rating of

150 Watts is exceeded, the power inverter

will automatically shut down. Once the elec-

trical device has been removed from the out-

let, the inverter should automatically reset. If

the power rating exceeds approximately

170 Watts, the power inverter may have to be

reset manually. To reset the inverter manu-

ally, unplug the device and plug it in again. To

avoid overloading the circuit, check the

power ratings on electrical devices prior to

using the inverter.

WARNING!

To Avoid Serious Injury or Death DO NOT:

• insert any objects into the receptacles

• touch with wet hands

Close the lid when not in use. If this outlet

is mishandled, it may cause an electric

shock and failure.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISPLAY

. .56

Instrument Cluster Display Controls ....56

Oil Change Reset ...............57

Instrument Cluster Display Selectable

Items ......................57

TRIP COMPUTER .............58

WARNING/INDICATOR LIGHTS AND

MESSAGES.................58

Red Warning Lights ..............59

Yellow Warning Lights ............62

Yellow Indicator Lights ............65

White Indicator Lights ............66

Blue Indicator Lights .............66

Green Indicator Lights ............66

Gray Indicator Lights .............67

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM

(OBDII) ...................67

Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)

Cybersecurity .................67

EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND

MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS ....68

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER

DISPLAY

Your vehicle may be equipped with an instru-

ment cluster display, which offers useful in-

formation to the driver. With the ignition in

the STOP/OFF position, opening/closing of a

door will activate the display for viewing, and

display the total miles, or kilometers, in the

odometer. Your instrument cluster display is

designed to display important information

about your vehicle’s systems and features.

Using a driver interactive display located on

the instrument panel, your instrument clus-

ter display can show you how systems are

working and give you warnings when they

aren’t. The steering wheel mounted controls

allow you to scroll through and enter the main

menus and submenus. You can access the

specific information you want and make se-

lections and adjustments.

Instrument Cluster Display Controls

The instrument cluster display features a

driver interactive display that is located in the

instrument cluster. Pushing the controls on

the left side of the steering wheel allows the

driver to select vehicle information and Per-

sonal Settings.

• Push the up arrow button to scroll upward

through the main menus and submenus

(Speedometer, Vehicle Info, Driver Assist,

Fuel Economy, Trip, Audio, Messages,

Screen Set Up).

• Push the down arrow button to scroll down-

ward through the main menu and sub-

menus (Speedometer, Vehicle Info, Driver

Assist, Fuel Economy, Trip, Audio, Mes-

sages, Screen Set Up).

• Push the right arrow button to access the

information screens or submenu screens of

a main menu item.

• Push the back/left arrow button to access

the information screens or submenu

screens of a main menu item.

Instrument Cluster Display Controls

1 — Arrow Up/Down Scroll Through

Menus And Submenus

2 — Arrow Right/Left Access

Information/Submenu Screens

3 — OK Button For Selecting And Re-

setting Information

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• Push the OK button to access/select the

information screens or submenu screens of

a main menu item. Push and hold the OK

arrow button for two seconds to reset

displayed/selected features that can be

reset.

Oil Change Reset

Oil Change Due

Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil

change indicator system. The “Oil Change

Due” message will display in the instrument

cluster display for five seconds after a single

chime has sounded to indicate the next

scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil

change indicator system is duty cycle based,

which means the engine oil change interval

may fluctuate, dependent upon your personal

driving style.

Unless reset, this message will continue to

display each time you turn the ignition is

cycled to the ON or RUN position. To reset

the oil change indicator system (after per-

forming the scheduled maintenance), refer to

the following procedure:

1. Without pushing the brake pedal, push

the ENGINE START/STOP button and

cycle the ignition to the ON/RUN position

(do not start the engine).

2. Fully push the accelerator pedal, slowly,

three times within 10 seconds.

3. Without pushing the brake pedal, push

the ENGINE START/STOP button once to

return the ignition to the OFF/LOCK

position.

NOTE:

If the indicator message illuminates when

you start the vehicle, the oil change indicator

system did not reset. See an authorized

dealer to have the oil life reset.

Instrument Cluster Display Selectable

Items

The instrument cluster display can be used to

view the following main menu items:

NOTE:

Depending on the vehicles options, feature

settings may vary.

•

Speedometer

• Stop & Start – If

Equipped

•

Vehicle Info

•

Audio

•

Driver Assist

•

Messages

•

Fuel Economy

•

Screen Setup

•

Trip

•

Settings

NOTE:

Refer to your Owner's Manual for further

information.

TRIP COMPUTER

The Trip computer is used to display informa-

tion on car operation when the key is turned

to the RUN position.

This function allows you to define two sepa-

rate trips called “Trip A” and “Trip B” where

the car's "complete trips" are monitored in an

independent manner.

Both trips can be reset (reset - start of a new

trip). To perform a reset, push and hold the

OK button on the steering wheel controls.

“Trip A” and “Trip B” are used to display the

figures relating to:

• Distance Travelled

• Average Consumption

• Travel Time (driving time)

Quantities Displayed

Distance Travelled

• Indicates the distance travelled by the start

of the new trip.

Average Consumption

• Represents the average fuel consumption

since the start of the new trip.

Travel Time

• Elapsed time since the start of the new trip.

OK Button

Short Push Of The Button: display of various

parameters.

Long Push Of The Button: reset quantities

and begin a new trip.

New trip

Starts after reset:

• "Manual" by pushing the OK button.

• "Automatic" when the "distance" reaches

the value of 62140 (99999.9 km) or when

the "time travel" reaches the value of

999.59 (999 hours and 59 minutes).

• After each disconnection and reconnection

of the battery.

WARNING/INDICATOR

LIGHTS AND MESSAGES

The warning/indicator light switches on in the

instrument panel together with a dedicated

message and/or acoustic signal when appli-

cable. These indications are indicative and

precautionary and as such must not be con-

sidered as exhaustive and/or alternative to

the information contained in the Owner

Manual, which you are advised to read care-

fully in all cases. Always refer to the informa-

tion in this chapter in the event of a failure

indication.

All active telltales will display first, if appli-

cable. The system check menu may appear

different based upon equipment options and

current vehicle status. Some telltales are

optional and may not appear.

The following warning lamps and indicators

will alert you to a vehicle condition that may

become serious. Some lamps will illuminate

when you start your vehicle to make sure they

work. If any lamps remain on after starting

your vehicle, refer to the respective system

warning lamp for further information.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

Red Warning Lights

— Air Bag Warning Light

This light will turn on for four to eight seconds

as a bulb check when the ignition is placed in

the ON/RUN or MAR/ON/RUN position. If the

light is either not on during startup, stays on,

or turns on while driving, have the system

inspected at an authorized dealer as soon as

possible. This light will illuminate with a

single chime when a fault with the Air Bag

Warning Light has been detected, it will stay

on until the fault is cleared. If the light comes

on intermittently or remains on while driving,

have an authorized dealer service the vehicle

immediately.

— Brake Warning Light

(English)

— Brake Warning Light (Met-

ric)

This light monitors various brake functions,

including brake fluid level and parking brake

application. If the brake light turns on it may

indicate that the parking brake is applied,

that the brake fluid level is low, or that there

is a problem with the anti-lock brake system

reservoir.

If the light remains on when the parking

brake has been disengaged, and the fluid

level is at the full mark on the master cylinder

reservoir, it indicates a possible brake hy-

draulic system malfunction or that a problem

with the Brake Booster has been detected by

the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) / Elec-

tronic Stability Control (ESC) system. In this

case, the light will remain on until the condi-

tion has been corrected. If the problem is

related to the brake booster, the ABS pump

will run when applying the brake, and a brake

pedal pulsation may be felt during each stop.

The dual brake system provides a reserve

braking capacity in the event of a failure to a

portion of the hydraulic system. A leak in

either half of the dual brake system is indi-

cated by the Brake Warning Light, which will

turn on when the brake fluid level in the

master cylinder has dropped below a speci-

fied level.

The light will remain on until the cause is

corrected.

NOTE:

The light may flash momentarily during sharp

cornering maneuvers, which change fluid

level conditions. The vehicle should have

service performed, and the brake fluid level

checked.

If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair

is necessary.

WARNING!

Driving a vehicle with the red brake light

on is dangerous. Part of the brake system

may have failed. It will take longer to stop

the vehicle. You could have a collision.

Have the vehicle checked immediately.

Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake

System (ABS) are also equipped with Elec-

tronic Brake Force Distribution (EBD). In the

event of an EBD failure, the Brake Warning

Light will turn on along with the ABS Light.

Immediate repair to the ABS system is re-

quired.

Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be

checked by turning the ignition switch from

the OFF position to the ON/RUN position.

The light should illuminate for approximately

two seconds. The light should then turn off

unless the parking brake is applied or a brake

fault is detected. If the light does not illumi-

nate, have the light inspected by your autho-

rized dealer.

The light also will turn on when the parking

brake is applied with the ignition switch in

the ON/RUN position.

NOTE:

This light shows only that the parking brake is

applied. It does not show the degree of brake

application.

— Battery Charge Warning Light

This light illuminates when the battery is not

charging properly. If it stays on while the

engine is running, there may be a malfunc-

tion with the charging system. Contact an

authorized dealer as soon as possible.

This indicates a possible problem with the

electrical system or a related component.

— Door Open Warning Light

This indicator will illuminate when a door is

ajar/open and not fully closed.

NOTE:

If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a

single chime.

— Electric Power Steering Fault

Warning Light

This light will turn on when there's a fault

with the EPS (Electric Power Steering) sys-

tem. Refer to “Power Steering” in “Starting

And Operating” in the Owner’s Manual for

further information.

WARNING!

Continued operation with reduced assist

could pose a safety risk to yourself and

others. Service should be obtained as soon

as possible.

— Electronic Throttle Control (ETC)

Warning Light

This light informs you of a problem with the

Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a

problem is detected while the vehicle is run-

ning, the light will either stay on or flash

depending on the nature of the problem.

Cycle the ignition when the vehicle is safely

and completely stopped and the transmission

is placed in the PARK position. The light

should turn off. If the light remains on with

the vehicle running, your vehicle will usually

be drivable; however, see an authorized

dealer for service as soon as possible.

NOTE:

This light may turn on if the accelerator and

brake pedals are pressed at the same time.

If the light continues to flash when the ve-

hicle is running, immediate service is re-

quired and you may experience reduced per-

formance, an elevated/rough idle, or engine

stall and your vehicle may require towing.

The light will come on when the ignition is

placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN posi-

tion and remain on briefly as a bulb check. If

the light does not come on during starting,

have the system checked by an authorized

dealer.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

— Engine Temperature Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate to warn of

an overheated engine condition. If the engine

coolant temperature is too high, this light will

illuminate and a single chime will sound.

If the light turns on while driving, safely pull

over and stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is

on, turn it off. Also, shift the transmission

into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the

temperature reading does not return to nor-

mal, turn the engine off immediately and call

for service. Refer to “If Your Engine Over-

heats” in “In Case Of Emergency” for further

information.

— Hood Open Warning Light

This indicator will illuminate when the hood

is left open and not fully closed.

NOTE:

If the vehicle is moving, there will also be a

single chime.

— Liftgate Open Warning Light

This indicator will illuminate when the lift-

gate is left open and not fully closed.

— Oil Pressure Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate to indicate

low engine oil pressure. If the light turns on

while driving, stop the vehicle and shut off

the engine as soon as possible. A chime will

sound when this light turns on.

Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is

corrected. This light does not indicate how

much oil is in the engine. The engine oil level

must be checked under the hood.

— Oil Pressure Sensor Failure

Warning Light

This light will illuminate if there is a failure of

the oil pressure sensor. If this light illumi-

nates, take it to an authorized dealer and

have them inspect it.

— Oil Temperature Warning Light

This warning light will illuminate to indicate

the engine oil temperature is high. If the light

turns on while driving, stop the vehicle and

shut off the engine as soon as possible. Wait

for oil temperature to return to normal levels.

— Seat Belt Reminder Warning Light

This light indicates when the driver or pas-

senger seat belt is unbuckled. When the

ignition is first placed in the ON/RUN or

ACC/ON/RUN position and if the driver’s seat

belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound and the

light will turn on. When driving, if the driver

or front passenger seat belt remains unbuck-

led, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will flash or

remain on continuously and a chime will

sound.

Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in

“Safety” for further information.

— Transmission Fault Warning Light —

If Equipped

This light will illuminate (together with a

message in the instrument cluster display

and a buzzer) to indicate a transmission fault.

Contact your authorized dealer if the message

remains after restarting the engine.

— Vehicle Security Warning Light — If

Equipped

This light will flash at a fast rate for approxi-

mately 15 seconds when the vehicle security

alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly

until the vehicle is disarmed.

Yellow Warning Lights

— Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Warning

Light

This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake Sys-

tem (ABS). The light will turn on when the

ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/

RUN position and may stay on for as long as

four seconds.

If the ABS light remains on or turns on while

driving, then the Anti-Lock portion of the

brake system is not functioning and service is

required as soon as possible. However, the

conventional brake system will continue to

operate normally, assuming the Brake Warn-

ing Light is not also on.

If the ABS light does not turn on when the

ignition is placed in the ON/RUN or ACC/ON/

RUN position, have the brake system in-

spected by an authorized dealer.

— Audio System Failure Light — If

Equipped

This light will illuminate to report a failure of

the Audio System. Contact an authorized

dealership as soon as possible.

— Electronic Park Brake Warning

Light

This warning light will illuminate to indicate

the Electronic Park Brake is not functioning

properly and service is required. Contact an

authorized dealer.

— Icy Road Condition Indicator Light

— If Equipped

This light will illuminate during an icy road

condition.

— Low Fuel Warning Light

When the fuel level reaches approximately

1.3–1.8 gal (5–7 L) this light will turn on,

and remain on until fuel is added.

— LaneSense Warning Light — If

Equipped

The LaneSense system provides the driver

with visual and steering torque warnings

when the vehicle starts to drift out of its lane

unintentionally without the use of a turn

signal.

• When the LaneSense system senses a lane

drift situation, the LaneSense indicator

changes from solid green to solid yellow.

• When the LaneSense system senses the

lane has been approached and is in a lane

departure situation, the LaneSense indica-

tor changes from solid white/green to flash-

ing yellow.

• Refer to “LaneSense – If Equipped" in

“Starting And Operating” for further

information.

— Service LaneSense Warning Light

— If Equipped

This warning light will illuminate when the

LaneSense system is not operating and re-

quires service. Please see an authorized

dealer.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

— Engine Check/Malfunction Indica-

tor Warning Light (MIL)

The Engine Check/Malfunction Indicator

Light (MIL) is a part of an Onboard Diagnostic

System called OBD II that monitors engine

and automatic transmission control systems.

This warning light will illuminate when the

ignition is in the ON/RUN position before

engine start. If the bulb does not come on

when turning the ignition switch from OFF to

ON/RUN, have the condition checked

promptly.

The vehicle should be serviced if the light

stays on through several typical driving

styles. In most situations, the vehicle will

drive normally and will not require towing.

When the engine is running, the MIL may

flash to alert serious conditions that could

lead to immediate loss of power or severe

catalytic converter damage. The vehicle

should be serviced as soon as possible if this

occurs.

WARNING!

A malfunctioning catalytic converter, as

referenced above, can reach higher tem-

peratures than in normal operating condi-

tions. This can cause a fire if you drive

slowly or park over flammable substances

such as dry plants, wood, cardboard, etc.

This could result in death or serious injury

to the driver, occupants or others.

CAUTION!

Prolonged driving with the Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL) on could cause dam-

age to the vehicle control system. It also

could affect fuel economy and driveability.

If the MIL is flashing, severe catalytic

converter damage and power loss will soon

occur. Immediate service is required.

— Service Stop/Start System Warning

Light — If Equipped

This warning light will illuminate when the

Stop/Start system is not functioning properly

and service is required. Contact an autho-

rized dealer for service.

— Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) Warning Light

The warning light switches on and a message

is displayed to indicate that the tire pressure

is lower than the recommended value and/or

that slow pressure loss is occurring. In these

cases, optimal tire duration and fuel con-

sumption may not be guaranteed.

Should one or more tires be in the condition

mentioned above, the display will show the

indications corresponding to each tire in

sequence.

CAUTION!

Do not continue driving with one or more

flat tires as handling may be compro-

mised. Stop the vehicle, avoiding sharp

braking and steering. If a tire puncture

CAUTION!

occurs, repair immediately using the dedi-

cated tire repair kit and contact your au-

thorized dealer as soon as possible.

Each tire, including the spare (if provided),

should be checked monthly when cold and

inflated to the inflation pressure recom-

mended by the vehicle manufacturer on the

vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure la-

bel. (If your vehicle has tires of a different

size than the size indicated on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label, you

should determine the proper tire inflation

pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your vehicle has

been equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitor-

ing System (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire

pressure telltale when one or more of your

tires is significantly under-inflated. Accord-

ingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illu-

minates, you should stop and check your tires

as soon as possible, and inflate them to the

proper pressure. Driving on a significantly

under-inflated tire causes the tire to overheat

and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation

also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread

life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling

and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute

for proper tire maintenance, and it is the

driver’s responsibility to maintain correct tire

pressure, even if under-inflation has not

reached the level to trigger illumination of the

TPMS low tire pressure telltale.

Your vehicle has also been equipped with a

TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when

the system is not operating properly. The

TPMS malfunction indicator is combined

with the low tire pressure telltale. When the

system detects a malfunction, the telltale will

flash for approximately one minute and then

remain continuously illuminated. This se-

quence will continue upon subsequent ve-

hicle start-ups as long as the malfunction

exists. When the malfunction indicator is

illuminated, the system may not be able to

detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of

reasons, including the installation of replace-

ment or alternate tires or wheels on the ve-

hicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning

properly. Always check the TPMS malfunc-

tion telltale after replacing one or more tires

or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the

replacement or alternate tires and wheels

allow the TPMS to continue to function

properly.

CAUTION!

The TPMS has been optimized for the

original equipment tires and wheels.

TPMS pressures and warning have been

established for the tire size equipped on

your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-

tion or sensor damage may result when

using replacement equipment that is not

of the same size, type, and/or style. After-

market wheels can cause sensor damage.

Using aftermarket tire sealants may cause

the Tire Pressure Monitoring System

(TPMS) sensor to become inoperable. Af-

ter using an aftermarket tire sealant it is

recommended that you take your vehicle

to your authorized dealer to have your

sensor function checked.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

— Towing Hook Breakdown Warning

Light — If Equipped

This light illuminates when there is a failure

with the tow hook. Contact your authorized

dealer for service.

— Transmission Temperature Warning

Light

This light indicates that the transmission

fluid temperature is running hot. This may

occur with severe usage, such as trailer tow-

ing. If this light turns on, safely pull over and

stop the vehicle. Then, shift the transmission

into PARK and run the engine at idle or

slightly higher until the light turns off.

WARNING!

If you continue operating the vehicle when

the Transmission Temperature Warning

Light is illuminated you could cause the

fluid to boil over, come in contact with hot

engine or exhaust components and cause a

fire.

CAUTION!

Continuous driving with the Transmission

Temperature Warning Light illuminated

will eventually cause severe transmission

damage or transmission failure.

Yellow Indicator Lights

— Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

Active Warning Light — If Equipped

This light will indicate when the Electronic

Stability Control system is Active. The “ESC

Indicator Light” in the instrument cluster will

come on when the ignition is placed in the

ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position, and when

ESC is activated. It should go out with the

engine running. If the “ESC Indicator Light”

comes on continuously with the engine run-

ning, a malfunction has been detected in the

ESC system. If this light remains on after

several ignition cycles, and the vehicle has

been driven several miles (kilometers) at

speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see

an authorized dealer as soon as possible to

have the problem diagnosed and corrected.

• The “ESC Off Indicator Light” and the

“ESC Indicator Light” come on momen-

tarily each time the ignition is placed in the

ON/RUN or ACC/ON/RUN position.

• The ESC system will make buzzing or click-

ing sounds when it is active. This is normal;

the sounds will stop when ESC becomes

inactive.

• This light will come on when the vehicle is

in an ESC event.

— Electronic Stability Control (ESC) Off

Warning Light — If Equipped

This light indicates the Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) is off.

Each time the ignition is turned to ON/RUN

or ACC/ON/RUN, the ESC system will be on,

even if it was turned off previously.

— Exterior Bulb Failure Indicator Light

— If Equipped

This light will illuminate when there is a

malfunction in one of the exterior bulbs.

— Fuel Cutoff Warning Light — If

Equipped

This warning light will illuminate after an

accident has occurred, and the system has

shut the fuel off.

— Immobilizer Fail / VPS Electrical

Alarm Indicator Light

This telltale will illuminate when the vehicle

security alarm system has detected an at-

tempt to break into the vehicle.

White Indicator Lights

— Cruise Control ON Indicator — If

Equipped

This light will turn on when the speed control

is ready, but not set.

— Light Sensor Failure

This light illuminates when there is light

sensor failure. If this light illuminates, have

an authorized dealer inspect it.

— Set Speed Warning Light — If

Equipped

When Set Speed Warning is turned on, the

speed warning telltale will illuminate in the

instrument cluster with a number matching

the set speed. When the set speed is ex-

ceeded, a single chime will sound along with

pop up message of speed warning exceeded.

Speed Warning can be turned on and off in

the instrument cluster display, for further

information refer to “Instrument Cluster Dis-

play Menu Items” in “Getting To Know Your

Instrument Panel.”

The number “55” is only an example of a

speed that can be set.

Blue Indicator Lights

— High Beam Indicator Light

This indicator light will illuminate to indicate

that the high beam headlights are on. With

the low beams activated, push the multifunc-

tion lever forward (toward the front of the

vehicle) to turn on the high beams. Pull the

multifunction lever rearward (toward the rear

of the vehicle) to turn off the high beams. If

the high beams are off, pull the lever toward

you for a temporary high beam on, "flash to

pass" scenario.

Green Indicator Lights

— Automatic High Beam Indicator

Light — If Equipped

This indicator shows that the automatic high

beam headlights are on.

— Speed Control Set Indicator Light

— If Equipped

This light will turn on when the speed control

is set to the desired speed. Refer to “Speed

Control” in “Starting And Operating” for fur-

ther information.

— Front Fog Indicator Light — If

Equipped

This indicator light will illuminate when the

front fog lights are on.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

— Hazard Warning Lights

The hazard warning indicators light up when

the vehicles Hazard Warning flasher switch

has been pushed.

— Park/Headlight On Indicator Light

This indicator light will illuminate when the

park lights or headlights are turned on.

— Stop/Start Active Indicator Light —

If Equipped

This indicator light will illuminate when the

Stop/Start function is in “Autostop” mode.

— Turn Signal Indicator Lights

When the left or right turn signal is activated,

the turn signal indicator will flash indepen-

dently and the corresponding exterior turn

signal lamps will flash. Turn signals can be

activated when the multifunction lever is

moved down (left) or up (right).

NOTE:

• A continuous chime will sound if the ve-

hicle is driven more than 1 mile (1.6 km)

with either turn signal on.

• Check for an inoperative outside light bulb

if either indicator flashes at a rapid rate.

Gray Indicator Lights

— Electronic Speed Control Canceled

Indicator Light

This light will turn on when the speed control

has been cancelled by the driver. Refer to

"Speed Control — If Equipped" in "Starting

and Operating" for further information.

ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC

SYSTEM (OBD II)

Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated

onboard diagnostic system called OBD II.

This system monitors the performance of the

emissions, engine, and automatic transmis-

sion control systems. When these systems are

operating properly, your vehicle will provide

excellent performance and fuel economy, as

well as engine emissions well within current

government regulations.

If any of these systems require service, the

OBD II system will turn on the “Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL).” It will also store diag-

nostic codes and other information to assist

your service technician in making repairs.

Although your vehicle will usually be drivable

and not need towing, see your authorized

dealer for service as soon as possible.

CAUTION!

• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could

cause further damage to the emission

control system. It could also affect fuel

economy and driveability. The vehicle

must be serviced before any emissions

tests can be performed.

• If the MIL is flashing, while the engine is

running, severe catalytic converter dam-

age and power loss will soon occur. Im-

mediate service is required.

Onboard Diagnostic System (OBD II)

Cybersecurity

Your vehicle is required to have an Onboard

Diagnostic system (OBD II) and a connection

port to allow access to information related to

the performance of your emissions controls.

Authorized service technicians may need to

access this information to assist with the

diagnosis and service of your vehicle and

emissions system.

WARNING!

• ONLY an authorized service technician

should connect equipment to the OBD II

connection port in order to read the VIN,

diagnose, or service your vehicle.

• If unauthorized equipment is connected

to the OBD II connection port, such as a

driver-behavior tracking device, it may:

• Be possible that vehicle systems,

including safety related systems,

could be impaired or a loss of ve-

hicle control could occur that may

result in an accident involving seri-

ous injury or death.

• Access, or allow others to access,

information stored in your vehicle

systems, including personal infor-

mation.

For further information, refer to “Cybersecu-

rity” in “Multimedia”.

EMISSIONS INSPECTION

AND MAINTENANCE

PROGRAMS

In some localities, it may be a legal require-

ment to pass an inspection of your vehicle's

emissions control system. Failure to pass

could prevent vehicle registration.

For states that require an Inspec-

tion and Maintenance (I/M), this

check verifies the “Malfunction

Indicator Light (MIL)” is functioning and is

not on when the engine is running, and that

the OBD II system is ready for testing.

Normally, the OBD II system will be ready.

The OBD II system may not be ready if your

vehicle was recently serviced, recently had a

dead battery or a battery replacement. If the

OBD II system should be determined not

ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail

the test.

Your vehicle has a simple ignition actuated

test, which you can use prior to going to the

test station. To check if your vehicle's OBD II

system is ready, you must do the following:

1. Cycle the ignition switch to the ON posi-

tion, but do not crank or start the engine.

NOTE:

If you crank or start the engine, you will

have to start this test over.

2. As soon as you cycle the ignition switch to

the ON position, you will see the “Mal-

function Indicator Light (MIL)” symbol

come on as part of a normal bulb check.

3. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of

two things will happen:

• The MIL will flash for about ten seconds

and then return to being fully illuminated

until you turn OFF the ignition or start the

engine. This means that your vehicle's OBD

II system is not ready and you should not

proceed to the I/M station.

GETTING TO KNOW YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL

• The MIL will not flash at all and will remain

fully illuminated until you place the igni-

tion in the off position or start the engine.

This means that your vehicle's OBD II sys-

tem is ready and you can proceed to the I/M

station.

If your OBD II system is not ready, you should

see an authorized dealer or repair facility. If

your vehicle was recently serviced or had a

battery failure or replacement, you may need

to do nothing more than drive your vehicle as

you normally would in order for your OBD II

system to update. A recheck with the above

test routine may then indicate that the sys-

tem is now ready.

Regardless of whether your vehicle's OBD II

system is ready or not, if the MIL is illumi-

nated during normal vehicle operation you

should have your vehicle serviced before go-

ing to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail

your vehicle because the MIL is on with the

engine running.

SAFETY

SAFETY FEATURES ...........72

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ......72

Electronic Brake Control System .....73

AUXILIARY DRIVING SYSTEMS. . .81

Blind Spot Monitoring ............81

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) .....82

Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . .83

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT

SYSTEMS ..................89

Occupant Restraint Systems ........89

Important Safety Precautions ........89

Seat Belt Systems ..............90

Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) .97

Child Restraints ...............108

Transporting Pets ..............119

SAFETY TIPS ...............119

Transporting Passengers ..........119

Exhaust Gas .................120

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The

Vehicle ....................120

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make

Outside The Vehicle.............122

SAFETY

SAFETY FEATURES

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)

The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) provides

increased vehicle stability and brake perfor-

mance under most braking conditions. The

system automatically prevents wheel lock,

and enhances vehicle control during braking.

The ABS performs a self-check cycle to en-

sure that the ABS is working properly each

time the vehicle is started and driven. During

this self-check, you may hear a slight clicking

sound as well as some related motor noises.

ABS is activated during braking when the

system detects one or more wheels begin to

lock. Road conditions such as ice, snow,

gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose debris,

or panic stops may increase the likelihood of

ABS activation(s).

You also may experience the following when

ABS activates:

• The ABS motor noise (it may continue to

run for a short time after the stop).

• The clicking sound of solenoid valves.

• Brake pedal pulsations.

• A slight drop of the brake pedal at the end

of the stop.

These are all normal characteristics of ABS.

WARNING!

• The ABS contains sophisticated elec-

tronic equipment that may be suscep-

tible to interference caused by improp-

erly installed or high output radio

transmitting equipment. This interfer-

ence can cause possible loss of anti-lock

braking capability. Installation of such

equipment should be performed by

qualified professionals.

• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will

diminish their effectiveness and may

lead to a collision. Pumping makes the

stopping distance longer. Just press

firmly on your brake pedal when you

need to slow down or stop.

• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws

of physics from acting on the vehicle,

nor can it increase braking or steering

efficiency beyond that afforded by the

WARNING!

condition of the vehicle brakes and tires

or the traction afforded.

• The ABS cannot prevent collisions, in-

cluding those resulting from excessive

speed in turns, following another vehicle

too closely, or hydroplaning.

• The capabilities of an ABS equipped

vehicle must never be exploited in a

reckless or dangerous manner that could

jeopardize the user’s safety or the safety

of others.

ABS is designed to function with the OEM

tires. Modification may result in degraded

ABS performance.

Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light

The yellow “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light”

will turn on when the ignition is turned to the

ON/RUN mode and may stay on for as long as

four seconds.

If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” re-

mains on or comes on while driving, it indi-

cates that the anti-lock portion of the brake

system is not functioning and that service is

SAFETY

required. However, the conventional brake

system will continue to operate normally if

the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on.

If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning Light” is on,

the brake system should be serviced as soon

as possible to restore the benefits of anti-lock

brakes. If the “Anti-Lock Brake Warning

Light” does not come on when the ignition is

turned to the ON/RUN mode, have the light

repaired as soon as possible.

Electronic Brake Control System

Your vehicle is equipped with an advanced

Electronic Brake Control system (EBC). This

system includes Anti-Lock Brake System

(ABS), Brake Assist System (BAS), Hill Start

Assist (HSA), Traction Control System (TCS),

Electronic Stability Control (ESC), and Elec-

tronic Roll Mitigation (ERM). These systems

work together to enhance both vehicle stabil-

ity and control in various driving conditions.

Your vehicle may also be equipped with

Trailer Sway Control (TSC), Dynamic Steering

Torque (DST), and Hill Descent Control

(HDC).

Brake Assist System (BAS)

The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s

braking capability during emergency braking

maneuvers. The system detects an emer-

gency braking situation by sensing the rate

and amount of brake application and then

applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This

can help reduce braking distances. The BAS

complements the anti-lock brake system

(ABS). Applying the brakes very quickly re-

sults in the best BAS assistance. To receive

the benefit of the system, you must apply

continuous braking pressure during the stop-

ping sequence, (do not “pump” the brakes).

Do not reduce brake pedal pressure unless

braking is no longer desired. Once the brake

pedal is released, the BAS is deactivated.

WARNING!

The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot

prevent the natural laws of physics from

acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase

the traction afforded by prevailing road

conditions. BAS cannot prevent collisions,

including those resulting from excessive

WARNING!

speed in turns, driving on very slippery

surfaces, or hydroplaning. The capabilities

of a BAS-equipped vehicle must never be

exploited in a reckless or dangerous man-

ner, which could jeopardize the user's

safety or the safety of others.

Hill Start Assist (HSA)

The HSA system is designed to help the driver

accelerate the vehicle from a complete stop

while on an incline. If the driver releases the

brake while stopped on an incline, HSA will

continue to hold the brake pressure for a

short period. If the driver does not apply the

throttle before this time expires, the system

will release brake pressure and the vehicle

will roll down the hill as normal. The system

will release brake pressure in proportion to

amount of throttle applied.

The following conditions must be met in

order for HSA to activate:

• The vehicle must be stopped.

• The vehicle must be on a 5% (approximate)

grade or greater hill.

• The gear selection must match vehicle up-

hill direction (i.e., vehicle facing uphill is in

forward gear; vehicle backing uphill is in

REVERSE gear).

• For vehicles equipped with an automatic

transmission, the HSA will work in RE-

VERSE gear and all forward gears. The

system will not activate if the transmission

is in PARK.

WARNING!

There may be situations where the Hill

Start Assist (HSA) will not activate and

slight rolling may occur, such as on minor

hills or with a loaded vehicle, or while

pulling a trailer. HSA is not a substitute for

active driving involvement. It is always the

driver’s responsibility to be attentive to

distance to other vehicles, people, and

objects, and most importantly brake op-

eration to ensure safe operation of the

vehicle under all road conditions. Your

complete attention is always required

while driving to maintain safe control of

WARNING!

your vehicle. Failure to follow these warn-

ings can result in a collision or serious

personal injury.

Disabling and Enabling HSA

This feature can be turned on or turned off.

To change the current setting, proceed as

follows:

• For vehicles equipped with the instrument

cluster display, refer to “Instrument Cluster

Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instru-

ment Panel” for further information.

Trailer Sway Control (TSC) — If Equipped

TSC uses sensors in the vehicle to recognize

an excessively swaying trailer and will take

the appropriate actions to attempt to stop the

sway. The system may reduce engine power

and apply the brake of the appropriate

wheel(s) to counteract the sway of the trailer.

TSC will become active automatically once

an excessively swaying trailer is recognized.

NOTE:

TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying.

Always use caution when towing a trailer and

follow the trailer tongue weight recommenda-

tions. Refer to “Trailer Towing” in “Starting

And Operating” for further information.

When TSC is functioning, the “ESC

Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” will

flash, the engine power may be reduced and

you may feel the brakes being applied to

individual wheels to attempt to stop the

trailer from swaying. TSC is disabled when

the ESC system is in the “Partial Off” mode.

WARNING!

If TSC activates while driving, slow the

vehicle down, stop at the nearest safe

location, and adjust the trailer load to

eliminate trailer sway.

Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

This system enhances directional control and

stability of the vehicle under various driving

conditions. ESC corrects for oversteering or

understeering of the vehicle by applying the

brake of the appropriate wheel(s) to assist in

SAFETY

counteracting the oversteer or understeer

condition. Engine power may also be reduced

to help the vehicle maintain the desired path.

ESC uses sensors in the vehicle to determine

the vehicle path intended by the driver and

compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.

When the actual path does not match the

intended path, ESC applies the brake of the

appropriate wheel to assist in counteracting

the oversteer or understeer condition.

• Oversteer — when the vehicle is turning

more than appropriate for the steering

wheel position.

• Understeer — when the vehicle is turning

less than appropriate for the steering wheel

position.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” located in the instrument cluster will

start to flash as soon as the ESC system

becomes active. The “ESC Activation/

Malfunction Indicator Light” also flashes

when the TCS is active. If the “ESC

Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light” be-

gins to flash during acceleration, ease up on

the accelerator and apply as little throttle as

possible. Be sure to adapt your speed and

driving to the prevailing road conditions.

WARNING!

• Electronic Stability Control (ESC) can-

not prevent the natural laws of physics

from acting on the vehicle, nor can it

increase the traction afforded by prevail-

ing road conditions. ESC cannot prevent

accidents, including those resulting

from excessive speed in turns, driving on

very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning.

ESC also cannot prevent accidents re-

sulting from loss of vehicle control due

to inappropriate driver input for the con-

ditions. Only a safe, attentive, and skill-

ful driver can prevent accidents. The

capabilities of an ESC equipped vehicle

must never be exploited in a reckless or

dangerous manner which could jeopar-

dize the user’s safety or the safety of

others.

• Vehicle modifications, or failure to prop-

erly maintain your vehicle, may change

the handling characteristics of your ve-

WARNING!

hicle, and may negatively affect the per-

formance of the ESC system. Changes to

the steering system, suspension, brak-

ing system, tire type and size or wheel

size may adversely affect ESC perfor-

mance. Improperly inflated and un-

evenly worn tires may also degrade ESC

performance. Any vehicle modification

or poor vehicle maintenance that re-

duces the effectiveness of the ESC sys-

tem can increase the risk of loss of

vehicle control, vehicle rollover, per-

sonal injury and death.

ESC Operation Modes

To disable ESC and other safety systems,

follow the instruction below.

There are three modes of active safety sys-

tems present on the vehicle:

• ESC On

• Partial Off

• Full Off

ESC On – Two Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four

Wheel Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High

Range

This is the normal operating mode for ESC

when operating a two-wheel drive vehicle. It

is also the normal mode for operating a four-

wheel drive vehicle in 2WD or 4WD HIGH

range. The ESC system will be in “ESC On”

mode whenever the vehicle is started or the

power transfer unit (if equipped) is shifted

out of 4WD LOW range. This mode should be

used for most driving situations. ESC should

only be turned to “Partial Off” or “Full Off”

for specific reasons as noted. Refer to “Par-

tial Off” and to “Full Off” for additional

information.

NOTE:

It is recommended to select the mode "Partial

Off" or "Full Off" only for specific reasons.

Partial Off – Two Wheel Drive Vehicles And Four

Wheel Drive Vehicles In 2WD And 4WD High

Range

The “Partial Off” mode is intended for driving

in deep snow, sand, or gravel. This mode

raises the threshold for TCS and ESC activa-

tion, which allows for more wheel spin than

what ESC normally allows.

To enter the “Partial Off” mode, momentarily

push the “ESC Off” button and the ESC Off

indicator light will illuminate. To turn the

ESC on again, momentarily push the ESC

OFF button and the ESC Off indicator light

will turn off. This will restore the normal

“ESC On” mode of operation.

NOTE:

To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving

with snow chains, or when starting off in deep

snow, sand, or gravel, it may be desirable to

switch to the “Partial Off” mode by momen-

tarily pushing the “ESC Off” button. Once

the situation requiring “Partial Off” mode is

overcome, turn ESC back on by momentarily

pushing the “ESC Off” button. This may be

done while the vehicle is in motion.

WARNING!

• When in “Partial Off” mode, the TCS

functionality of ESC, (except for the lim-

ited slip feature described in the TCS

section), has been disabled and the

“ESC Off Indicator Light” will be illumi-

nated. When in “Partial Off” mode, the

engine power reduction feature of TCS is

disabled, and the enhanced vehicle sta-

ESC OFF Button

SAFETY

WARNING!

bility offered by the ESC system is re-

duced.

• Trailer Sway control (TSC) is disabled

when the ESC system is in the “Partial

Off” mode.

Full Off – Four-Wheel Drive Vehicles In 4WD

High And 4WD Low Range

The “Full Off” mode is intended for off-

highway and off-road use when ESC stability

features could inhibit vehicle maneuverabil-

ity due to trail conditions. The “ESC Off”

button is located in the lower switch bank

above the climate control panel. To enter

“Full Off” mode, push and hold the “ESC

Off” button for five seconds while the vehicle

is stopped with the engine running. After five

seconds, the ESC Off indicator light will illu-

minate and an “ESC Off” message will ap-

pear in the odometer.

In this mode, ESC and TCS are turned off

(except for the “limited slip” feature de-

scribed in the TCS section) until the vehicle

reaches a speed of 40 mph (64 km/h). At

speeds over 40 mph (64 km/h), the system

automatically switches to “Partial Off” mode,

described above. When the vehicle speed

returns to less than 35 mph (56 km/h), the

ESC system will return to “Full Off” mode.

The ESC OFF indicator light is always illumi-

nated when ESC is off. To turn ESC on again,

momentarily push the “ESC Off” button. This

will restore the normal “ESC On” mode of

operation.

NOTE:

With the ESC switched off, the enhanced

vehicle stability offered by ESC is unavail-

able. In an emergency evasive maneuver, the

ESC system will not engage to assist in main-

taining stability. “Full Off” mode is only in-

tended for off-highway or off-road use.

NOTE:

• “Full Off” is the only operating mode for

ESC in 4WD LOW range. The ESC system

will be in this mode whenever the vehicle is

started in 4WD LOW range or the power

transfer unit is shifted into 4WD LOW

range.

• The “ESC OFF” message will display and a

chime will sound when the gear selector is

moved from any position to the PARK posi-

tion and then moved out of the PARK posi-

tion. This will occur even if the message

was cleared previously.

Selec-Terrain — If Equipped

On models equipped with Selec-Terrain, the

activation of some driving modes provide par-

tial off or full off of some active safety sys-

tems in order to optimize performance in

specific modes.

Partial or full off of the active safety systems

will be indicated by a light in the instrument

cluster.

In "SAND" and "MUD", the active safety sys-

tems are partially disabled and put in place to

ensure maximum performance in the specific

mode of operation. However, you can reacti-

vate them completely at any time by pushing

the ESC button.

NOTE:

In 4WD LOW, the active safety systems are

completely bypassed in order to ensure maxi-

mum off-road performance.

ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator Light

And ESC OFF Indicator Light

The “ESC Activation/

Malfunction Indicator Light” in

the instrument cluster will come

on when the ignition switch is

turned to the ON position. It

should go out with the engine running. If the

“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” comes on continuously with the en-

gine running, a malfunction has been de-

tected in the ESC system. If this light re-

mains on after several ignition cycles, and

the vehicle has been driven several miles/

kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph

(48 km/h), see an authorized dealer as soon

as possible to have the problem diagnosed

and corrected.

The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” (located in the instrument cluster)

starts to flash as soon as the tires lose trac-

tion and the ESC system becomes active. The

“ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” also flashes when Traction Control

System is active. If the “ESC Activation/

Malfunction Indicator Light” begins to flash

during acceleration, ease up on the accelera-

tor and apply as little throttle as possible. Be

sure to adapt your speed and driving to the

prevailing road conditions.

NOTE:

• The “ESC Activation/Malfunction Indicator

Light” and the “ESC OFF Indicator Light”

come on momentarily each time the igni-

tion switch is turned ON.

• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the

ESC system will be ON even if it was turned

off previously.

• The ESC system will make buzzing or click-

ing sounds when it is active. This is normal;

the sounds will stop when ESC becomes

inactive following the maneuver that

caused the ESC activation.

The "ESC OFF Indicator Light"

indicates the Electronic Stability

Control (ESC) is partially off or

full off.

The ESC OFF switch is located in the center

console.

Electronic Roll Mitigation (ERM)

This system anticipates the potential for

wheel lift by monitoring the driver’s steering

wheel input and the speed of the vehicle.

When ERM determines that the rate of

change of the steering wheel angle and vehi-

cle's speed are sufficient to potentially cause

wheel lift, it then applies the appropriate

brake and may also reduce engine power to

lessen the chance that wheel lift will occur.

ERM will only intervene during very severe or

evasive driving maneuvers. ERM can only

reduce the chance of wheel lift occurring

during severe or evasive driving maneuvers. It

cannot prevent wheel lift due to other factors,

such as road conditions, leaving the roadway,

or striking objects or other vehicles.

NOTE:

ERM is disabled anytime the ESC is in “Full

Off” mode. Refer to Electronic Stability Con-

trol (ESC) in this section for a complete

explanation of the available ESC modes.

SAFETY

WARNING!

Many factors, such as vehicle loading,

road conditions, and driving conditions,

influence the chance that wheel lift or

rollover may occur. Electronic Roll Mitiga-

tion (ERM) cannot prevent all wheel lift or

rollovers, especially those that involve

leaving the roadway or striking objects or

other vehicles. The capabilities of an

ERM-equipped vehicle must never be ex-

ploited in a reckless or dangerous manner,

which could jeopardize the user's safety or

the safety of others.

Traction Control System (TCS)

This system monitors the amount of wheel

spin of each of the driven wheels. If wheel

spin is detected, brake pressure is applied to

the slipping wheel(s) and engine power is

reduced to provide enhanced acceleration

and stability. A feature of the TCS system,

Brake Limited Differential (BLD), functions

similar to a limited slip differential and con-

trols the wheel spin across a driven axle. If

one wheel on a driven axle is spinning faster

than the other, the system will apply the

brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow

more engine torque to be applied to the wheel

that is not spinning. This feature remains

active even if TCS and ESC are in the “Partial

Off” mode or the “Full Off” mode. Refer to

“Electronic Stability Control (ESC)” in this

section for further information.

Dynamic Steering Torque (DST)

The DST function uses the integration of the

ESC system with the electric power steering

to increase the safety level of the whole car.

In critical situations (understeering, over-

steering, braking with different grip condi-

tions), through the DST function the ESC

system controls the steering to implement an

additional torque contribution on the steering

wheel, to suggest the most correct maneuver

to the driver. The coordinated action of

brakes and steering increases the safety and

car control feeling.

NOTE:

The DST is a driving aid system and does not

replace the driver’s actions while driving the

car.

Hill Descent Control (HDC) — If Equipped

HDC is intended for low speed off road driving

while in 4WD Low Range. HDC maintains

vehicle speed while descending hills during

various driving situations. HDC controls ve-

hicle speed by actively controlling the brakes.

HDC has three states:

1. Off (feature is not enabled and will not

activate).

Hill Descent Control (Trailhawk)

2. Enabled (feature is enabled and ready but

activation conditions are not met, or

driver is actively overriding with brake or

throttle application).

3. Active (feature is enabled and actively

controlling vehicle speed).

Enabling HDC

HDC is enabled by pushing the HDC switch,

but the following conditions must also be met

to enable HDC:

• Driveline is in 4WD Low Range.

• Vehicle speed is below 7.5 mph (12 km/h).

• Electric Park Brake (EPB) is released.

• Driver’s door is closed.

Activating HDC

Once HDC is enabled, it will activate auto-

matically if driven down a grade of sufficient

magnitude (greater than approximately 8%).

The set speed for HDC is selectable by the

driver and can be adjusted using brake and

throttle input.

Driver Override:

The driver may override HDC activation with

throttle or brake application at anytime.

Deactivating HDC

HDC will be deactivated but remain available

if any of the following conditions occur:

• Driver overrides HDC set speed with throttle

or brake application.

• Vehicle speed exceeds 7.5 mph (12 km/h)

but remains below 25 mph (40 km/h).

• Vehicle is on a downhill grade of insuffi-

cient magnitude (less than approximately

8%), is on level ground, or is on an uphill

grade.

• Vehicle is shifted to PARK.

Disabling HDC

HDC will be deactivated and disabled if any

of the following conditions occur:

• The driver pushes the HDC switch.

• The driveline is shifted out of 4WD Low

Range.

• Driver’s door opens.

• The vehicle is driven greater than 25 mph

(40 km/h) (HDC exits immediately.)

Feedback To The Driver:

The instrument cluster has an HDC icon and the

HDC switch has an LED which offer feedback to

the driver about the state HDC is in.

• The cluster icon and switch lamp will illu-

minate and remain solid when HDC is en-

abled or activated. This is the normal oper-

ating condition for HDC.

• The switch lamp will flash for several sec-

onds then extinguish when the driver

pushes the HDC switch when enable con-

ditions have not been met.

The Hill Descent Switch is located within the

Selec-Terrain knob in the upper right

position.

WARNING!

HDC is only intended to assist the driver in

controlling vehicle speed when descend-

ing hills. The driver must remain attentive

to the driving conditions and is respon-

sible for maintaining a safe vehicle speed.

SAFETY

AUXILIARY DRIVING

SYSTEMS

Blind Spot Monitoring

The Blind Spot Monitoring (BSM) system

uses two radar-based sensors, located inside

the rear bumper fascia, to detect highway

licensable vehicles (automobiles, trucks, mo-

torcycles, etc.) that enter the blind spot

zones from the rear/front/side of the vehicle.

The BSM detection zone covers approxi-

mately one lane width on both sides of the

vehicle, 10 ft (3 m). The zone length starts at

the outside mirror and extends approximately

20 ft (6 m) beyond the rear bumper of the

vehicle. The BSM system monitors the detec-

tion zones on both sides of the vehicle when

the vehicle speed reaches approximately

6 mph (10 km/h) or higher and will alert the

driver of vehicles in these areas.

When the vehicle is started, the BSM warning

light will momentarily illuminate in both out-

side rear view mirrors to let the driver know

that the system is operational. The BSM

system sensors operate when the vehicle is in

any forward gear or REVERSE and enters

stand-by mode when the vehicle is in PARK.

The BSM system notifies the driver of objects

in the detection zones by illuminating the

BSM warning light located in the outside

mirrors in addition to sounding an audible

(chime) alert and reducing the radio volume.

Three selectable modes of operation are

available in the Uconnect System. Refer to

“Uconnect Settings” in “Multimedia” in your

Owner’s Manual for further information.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to

all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in

this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules and with Industry Canada license-

exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-

ject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference.

2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to oper-

ate the equipment.

Rear Detection Zones

Forward Collision Warning (FCW)

The Forward Collision Warning (FCW) System

with Mitigation provides the driver with au-

dible warnings, visual warnings (within the

instrument cluster display), and may apply a

brake jerk to warn the driver when it detects a

potential frontal collision. The warnings and

limited braking are intended to provide the

driver with enough time to react, avoid or

mitigate the potential collision.

NOTE:

FCW monitors the information from the for-

ward looking sensors as well as the Electronic

Brake Controller (EBC), to calculate the prob-

ability of a forward collision. When the sys-

tem determines that a forward collision is

probable, the driver will be provided with

audible and visual warnings and may provide

a brake jerk warning.

Turning FCW On Or Off

The forward collision menu setting is located

in the Uconnect settings.

• To turn the FCW system off, press the

forward collision button once to turn the

system off.

• To turn the FCW system back on, press the

forward collision button again to turn the

system on.

NOTE:

• The default status of FCW is “Warning +

Active Braking,” this allows the system to

warn you of a possible collision with the

vehicle in front of you and enable the active

braking.

• Changing the FCW status to “off” deacti-

vates the system, so no warning or active

braking will be available in case of a pos-

sible collision

• Changing the FCW status to “Only warning”

prevents the system from providing limited

active braking, or additional brake support

if the driver is not braking adequately in the

event of a potential frontal collision, but

maintains the audible and visual warnings.

Changing FCW Status

The FCW feature has three settings and can

be changed within the Uconnect System

Screen:

•

Far

•

Medium

•

Near

Far

The far setting provides warnings for poten-

tial collisions more distant in front of the

vehicle, allowing the driver to have the most

reaction time to avoid a collision.

More cautious drivers that do not mind fre-

quent warnings may prefer this setting.

NOTE:

This setting gives you the most reaction time.

Medium

The default setting is "Medium". This setting

provides that the system notify the driver of a

possible accident with the vehicle ahead of it

when the latter is at a standard distance,

intermediate between the other two possible

settings.

Near

By changing the option to "Near", the system

will warn the driver of a possible accident

with the vehicle ahead of it when the latter is

a reduced distance. This setting offers a

SAFETY

reaction time to the driver lower than the

settings "Medium" and "Far", in the case of a

potential accident, while a more dynamic

driving of the vehicle.

NOTE:

Changing the Active Braking status to “off”

prevents the system from providing autono-

mous braking, or additional brake support if

the driver is not braking adequately in the

event of a potential frontal collision. Active

braking can be turned “off” in the Uconnect

controls settings.

Refer to your Owner's Manual for further

details.

WARNING!

Forward Collision Warning (FCW) is not

intended to avoid a collision on its own,

nor can FCW detect every type of potential

collision. The driver has the responsibility

to avoid a collision by controlling the ve-

hicle via braking and steering. Failure to

follow this warning could lead to serious

injury or death.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to

all Radio Frequency (RF) devices equipped in

this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules and with Industry Canada license-

exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-

ject to the following two conditions:

1. This device may not cause harmful

interference.

2. This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to oper-

ate the equipment.

Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)

will warn the driver of a low tire pressure

based on the vehicle recommended cold

placard pressure.

The tire pressure will vary with temperature

by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F

(6.5°C). This means that when the outside

temperature decreases, the tire pressure will

decrease. Tire pressure should always be set

based on cold inflation tire pressure. This is

defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle

has not been driven for at least three hours, or

driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after a three

hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure

must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-

sure molded into the tire sidewall. Refer to

“Tires” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for

information on how to properly inflate the

vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also

increase as the vehicle is driven. This is

normal and there should be no adjustment for

this increased pressure.

The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire

pressure if the tire pressure falls below the

low-pressure warning limit for any reason,

including low temperature effects and natu-

ral pressure loss through the tire.

The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of

low tire pressure as long as the condition

exists, and will not turn off until the tire

pressure is at or above the recommended

cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pres-

sure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell-

tale Light) illuminates, you must increase the

tire pressure to the recommended cold plac-

ard pressure in order for the “Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light” to turn off.

NOTE:

When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may

need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi

(28 kPa) above the recommended cold plac-

ard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light off.

The system will automatically update and the

“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will

turn off once the system receives the updated

tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be

driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph

(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive

this information.

For example, your vehicle may have a recom-

mended cold (parked for more than three

hours) placard pressure of 33 psi (227 kPa).

If the ambient temperature is 68°F (20°C)

and the measured tire pressure is 28 psi

(193 kPa), a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C)

will decrease the tire pressure to approxi-

mately 24 psi (165 kPa). This tire pressure is

low enough to turn ON the “Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light.” Driving the ve-

hicle may cause the tire pressure to rise to

approximately 28 psi (193 kPa), but the “Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will still

be on. In this situation, the “Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light” will turn off only

after the tires are inflated to the vehicle’s

recommended cold placard pressure value.

NOTE:

When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may

need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi

(28 kPa) above the recommended cold plac-

ard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light off.

CAUTION!

• The TPMS has been optimized for the

original equipment tires and wheels.

TPMS pressures and warning have been

CAUTION!

established for the tire size equipped on

your vehicle. Undesirable system opera-

tion or sensor damage may result when

using replacement equipment that is not

of the same size, type, and/or style. The

TPM sensor is not designed for use on

aftermarket wheels, and may contribute

to a poor overall system performance.

Customers are encouraged to use OEM

wheels to assure TPMS feature opera-

tion.

• Using aftermarket tire sealants may

cause the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sys-

tem (TPMS) sensor to become inoper-

able. After using an aftermarket tire

sealant it is recommended that you take

your vehicle to an authorized dealer to

have your sensor function checked.

• After inspecting or adjusting the tire

pressure always reinstall the valve stem

cap. This will prevent moisture and dirt

from entering the valve stem, which

could damage the TPMS sensor.

SAFETY

NOTE:

• The TPMS is not intended to replace nor-

mal tire care and maintenance, or to pro-

vide warning of a tire failure or condition.

• The TPMS should not be used as a tire

pressure gauge while adjusting your tire

pressure.

• Driving on a significantly underinflated tire

causes the tire to overheat and can lead to

tire failure. Underinflation also reduces

fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may

affect the vehicle’s handling and stopping

ability.

• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire

maintenance, and it is the driver’s respon-

sibility to maintain correct tire pressure

using an accurate tire pressure gauge, even

if underinflation has not reached the level

to trigger illumination of the “Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light”.

• Seasonal temperature changes will affect

TPMS information on your instrument

cluster.

Base System

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)

uses wireless technology with wheel rim

mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire

pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each

wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire

pressure readings to the receiver module.

NOTE:

It is particularly important for you to check

the tire pressure in all of the tires on your

vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper

pressure.

The TPMS consists of the following compo-

nents:

• Receiver Module.

• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors.

• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warn-

ings

The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell-

tale Light” will illuminate in the in-

strument cluster, a “LOW TIRE

PRESSURE” message will display in the in-

strument cluster, an "Inflate to XX" message

will be displayed and a chime will sound

when tire pressure is low in one or more of the

four active road tires. Should this occur, you

should stop as soon as possible, check the

inflation pressure of each tire on your vehicle,

and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s recom-

mended cold placard pressure value as

shown in the "Inflate to XX" message. Once

the system receives the updated tire pres-

sures, the system will automatically update

and the “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale

Light” will turn off.

NOTE:

When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may

need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi

(28 kPa) above the recommended cold plac-

ard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light off. The vehicle may

need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above

15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to

receive this information.

Service TPMS Warning

When a system fault is detected, the “Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash

on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on

solid. The system fault will also sound a

chime. If the ignition is cycled, this sequence

will repeat, providing the system fault still

exists. The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale

Light” will turn off when the fault condition

no longer exists. A system fault can occur due

to any of the following:

• Jamming due to electronic devices or driv-

ing next to facilities emitting the same

radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors.

• Installing some form of aftermarket window

tinting that affects radio wave signals.

• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or

wheel housings.

• Using tire chains on the vehicle.

• Using wheels/tires not equipped with

TPMS sensors.

Vehicles With Compact Spare or non-Matching

Full Size Spare

1. The compact spare tire or non-matching

full size spare tire does not have a tire

pressure monitoring sensor. Therefore,

the TPMS will not monitor the pressure in

the spare tire.

2. If you install the compact or non-

matching full size spare tire in place of a

road tire that has a pressure below the

low-pressure warning limit, a chime will

sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light” and

“LOW TIRE PRESSURE” and "Inflate to

XX" messages will turn on upon the next

ignition cycle.

3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 min-

utes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS

Telltale Light” will flash on and off for

75 seconds and then remain on solid.

4. For each subsequent ignition cycle, a

chime will sound and the “TPMS Telltale

Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds

and then remain on solid.

5. Once you repair or replace the original

road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in

place of the compact spare or non-

matching full size spare, the TPMS will

update automatically and the “TPMS Tell-

tale Light” will turn off, as long as no tire

pressure is below the low-pressure warn-

ing limit in any of the four active road

tires. The vehicle may need to be driven

for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph

(24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive

this information.

Tire Pressure Monitor System Operation

The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS)

uses wireless technology with wheel rim

mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire

pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each

wheel as part of the valve stem, transmit tire

pressure readings to the receiver module.

NOTE:

It is particularly important for you to check

the tire pressure in all of the tires on your

vehicle monthly and to maintain the proper

pressure.

The TPMS consists of the following compo-

nents:

• Receiver Module.

• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors.

• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System

messages, which display in the instrument

cluster.

• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light.

SAFETY

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warn-

ings

The “Tire Pressure Monitoring Tell-

tale Light” will illuminate in the in-

strument cluster and a chime will

sound when tire pressure is low in one or

more of the four active road tires. In addition,

the instrument cluster will display a "Tire

Low" message for a minimum of five seconds

and a graphic showing the pressure values of

each tire with the low tire pressure values in a

different color.

Should this occur, you should stop as soon as

possible and inflate the tires with low pres-

sure (those in a different color in the instru-

ment cluster graphic) to the vehicle’s recom-

mended cold placard pressure value as

shown in the "Inflate to XX" message. Once

the system receives the updated tire pres-

sures, the system will automatically update,

the pressure values in the graphic display in

the instrument cluster will return to their

original color, and the “Tire Pressure Monitor-

ing Telltale Light” will turn off.

NOTE:

When filling warm tires, the tire pressure may

need to be increased up to an additional 4 psi

(28 kPa) above the recommended cold plac-

ard pressure in order to turn the Tire Pressure

Monitoring Telltale Light off. The vehicle may

need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above

15 mph (24 km/h) in order for the TPMS to

receive this information.

Service TPMS Warning

When a system fault is detected, the “Tire

Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will flash

on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on

solid. The system fault will also sound a

chime. In addition, the instrument cluster

will display a "SERVICE TPM SYSTEM" mes-

sage for a minimum of five seconds and then

display dashes (- -) in place of the pressure

value to indicate which sensor is not being

received.

If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence

will repeat, providing the system fault still

exists. If the system fault no longer exists, the

Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure

Warning

“Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light” will

no longer flash, and the “SERVICE TPM SYS-

TEM” message will no longer display, and a

pressure value will display in place of the

dashes. A system fault can occur due to any

of the following:

• Jamming due to electronic devices or driv-

ing next to facilities emitting the same

radio frequencies as the TPMS sensors.

• Installing some form of aftermarket window

tinting that affects radio wave signals.

• Lots of snow or ice around the wheels or

wheel housings.

• Using tire chains on the vehicle.

• Using wheels/tires not equipped with

TPMS sensors.

Vehicles With Matching Full-Size Spare

1. The matching full size spare wheel and

tire assembly has a tire pressure monitor-

ing sensor that can be monitored by the

TPMS.

2. If you install the full size spare in place of

a road tire that has a pressure below the

low-pressure warning limit, a chime will

sound and the “TPMS Telltale Light” will

turn on upon the next ignition key cycle.

In addition, the instrument cluster will

display a Tire Low message, an "Inflate to

XX" message and a graphic showing the

low tire pressure value in a different color.

3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 min-

utes above 15 mph (24 km/h) the “TPMS

Telltale Light” will turn OFF, as long as no

tire pressure is below the low-pressure

warning limit in any of the four active road

tires.

4. The instrument cluster will display a

graphic showing the tire pressure value in

the same color as the other pressure val-

ues in place of the different color low tire

pressure value. The instrument cluster

will also display a dedicated message to

remind you to service the flat tire.

Vehicles With Compact Spare or Non-Matching

Full Size Spare

1. The compact spare tire or non-matching

full size does not have a tire pressure

monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS

will not monitor the pressure in the com-

pact spare tire.

2. If you install the compact or non-

matching full size spare tire in place of a

road tire that has a pressure below the

low-pressure warning limit, upon the next

ignition key cycle, the “TPMS Telltale

Light” will remain on and a chime will

sound. In addition, the graphic in the

instrument cluster will still display a dif-

ferent color pressure value and an "Inflate

to XX" message.

3. After driving the vehicle for up to 20 min-

utes above 15 mph (24 km/h), the “TPMS

Telltale Light” will flash on and off for

75 seconds and then remain on solid. In

addition, the instrument cluster will dis-

play a “SERVICE TPM SYSTEM” message

for five seconds and then display dashes

(- -) in place of the pressure value.

4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a

chime will sound, the “TPMS Telltale

Light” will flash on and off for 75 seconds

and then remain on solid, and the instru-

ment cluster will display a “SERVICE

TPM SYSTEM” message for five seconds

and then display dashes (- -) in place of

the pressure value.

SAFETY

5. Once you repair or replace the original

road tire and reinstall it on the vehicle in

place of the compact spare or non-

matching full size, the TPMS will update

automatically. In addition, the “TPMS

Telltale Light” will turn off and the

graphic in the instrument cluster will dis-

play a new pressure value instead of

dashes (- -), as long as no tire pressure is

below the low-pressure warning limit in

any of the four active road tires. The

vehicle may need to be driven for up to

20 minutes above 15 mph (24 km/h) in

order for the TPMS to receive this

information.

General Information

The following regulatory statement applies to

all radio frequency (RF) devices equipped in

this vehicle:

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC

Rules and with Industry Canada license-

exempt RSS standard(s). Operation is sub-

ject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful inter-

ference, and

(2) This device must accept any interference

received, including interference that may

cause undesired operation.

NOTE:

Changes or modifications not expressly ap-

proved by the party responsible for compli-

ance could void the user’s authority to oper-

ate the equipment.

OCCUPANT RESTRAINT

SYSTEMS

Some of the most important safety features in

your vehicle are the restraint systems:

Occupant Restraint Systems

• Seat Belt Systems

• Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS) Air

Bags

• Child Restraints

Some of the safety features described in this

section may be standard equipment on some

models, or may be optional equipment on

others. If you are not sure, ask your autho-

rized dealer.

Important Safety Precautions

Please pay close attention to the information

in this section. It tells you how to use your

restraint system properly, to keep you and

your passengers as safe as possible.

Here are some simple steps you can take to

minimize the risk of harm from a deploying

air bag:

1. Children 12 years old and under should

always ride buckled up in the rear seat of

a vehicle with a rear seat.

2. If a child from 2 to 12 years old (not in a

rear-facing child restraint) must ride in

the front passenger seat, move the seat as

far back as possible and use the proper

child restraint. (Refer to “Child Re-

straints” in the section for further

information).

3. Children that are not big enough to wear

the vehicle seat belt properly (refer to

“Child Restraints” in this section for fur-

ther information) should be secured in the

rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat in

child restraints or belt-positioning booster

seats. Older children who do not use child

restraints or belt-positioning booster seats

should ride properly buckled up in the

rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.

4. Never allow children to slide the shoulder

belt behind them or under their arm.

5. You should read the instructions provided

with your child restraint to make sure that

you are using it properly.

6. All occupants should always wear their lap

and shoulder belts properly.

7. The driver and front passenger seats

should be moved back as far as practical

to allow the front air bags room to inflate.

8. Do not lean against the door or window. If

your vehicle has side air bags, and deploy-

ment occurs, the side air bags will inflate

forcefully into the space between occu-

pants and the door and occupants could

be injured.

9. If the air bag system in this vehicle needs

to be modified to accommodate a dis-

abled person, refer to “Customer Assis-

tance” for customer service contact

information.

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint

in front of an air bag. A deploying pas-

senger front air bag can cause death or

serious injury to a child 12 years or

younger, including a child in a rear-

facing child restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in

the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.

Seat Belt Systems

Buckle up even though you are an excellent

driver, even on short trips. Someone on the

road may be a poor driver and could cause a

collision that includes you. This can happen

far away from home or on your own street.

Research has shown that seat belts save

lives, and they can reduce the seriousness of

injuries in a collision. Some of the worst

injuries happen when people are thrown from

the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility

of ejection and the risk of injury caused by

striking the inside of the vehicle. Everyone in

a motor vehicle should be belted at all times.

Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System

(BeltAlert)

Driver and Passenger BeltAlert (if equipped)

BeltAlert is a feature intended to remind

the driver and outboard front seat passenger

(if equipped with outboard front passenger

seat BeltAlert) to buckle their seat belts. The

Belt Alert feature is active whenever the igni-

tion switch is in the START or ON/RUN posi-

tion.

Initial Indication

If the driver is unbuckled when the ignition

switch is first in the START or ON/RUN posi-

tion, a chime will signal for a few seconds. If

the driver or outboard front seat passenger (if

equipped with outboard front passenger seat

BeltAlert) is unbuckled when the ignition

switch is first in the START or ON/RUN posi-

tion the Seat Belt Reminder Light will turn on

and remain on until both outboard front seat

belts are buckled. The outboard front passen-

ger seat BeltAlert is not active when an out-

board front passenger seat is unoccupied.

SAFETY

BeltAlert Warning Sequence

The BeltAlert warning sequence is activated

when the vehicle is moving above a specified

vehicle speed range and the driver or out-

board front seat passenger is unbuckled (if

equipped with outboard front passenger seat

BeltAlert) (the outboard front passenger seat

BeltAlert is not active when the outboard

front passenger seat is unoccupied). The

BeltAlert warning sequence starts by blinking

the Seat Belt Reminder Light and sounding

an intermittent chime. Once the BeltAlert

warning sequence has completed, the Seat

Belt Reminder Light will remain on until the

seat belts are buckled. The BeltAlert warning

sequence may repeat based on vehicle speed

until the driver and occupied outboard front

seat passenger seat belts are buckled. The

driver should instruct all occupants to buckle

their seat belts.

Change of Status

If the driver or outboard front seat passenger

(if equipped with outboard front passenger

seat BeltAlert) unbuckles their seat belt while

the vehicle is traveling, the BeltAlert warning

sequence will begin until the seat belts are

buckled again.

The outboard front passenger seat BeltAlert

is not active when the outboard front passen-

ger seat is unoccupied. BeltAlert may be

triggered when an animal or other items are

placed on the outboard front passenger seat

or when the seat is folded flat (if equipped). It

is recommended that pets be restrained in

the rear seat (if equipped) in pet harnesses or

pet carriers that are secured by seat belts,

and cargo is properly stowed.

BeltAlert can be activated or deactivated by

an authorized dealer. FCA US LLC does not

recommend deactivating BeltAlert.

NOTE:

If BeltAlert has been deactivated and the

driver or outboard front seat passenger (if

equipped with outboard front passenger seat

BeltAlert) is unbuckled the Seat Belt Re-

minder Light will turn on and remain on until

the driver and outboard front seat passenger

seat belts are buckled.

Lap/Shoulder Belts

All seating positions in your vehicle are

equipped with lap/shoulder belts.

The seat belt webbing retractor will lock only

during very sudden stops or collisions. This

feature allows the shoulder part of the seat

belt to move freely with you under normal

conditions. However, in a collision the seat

belt will lock and reduce your risk of striking

the inside of the vehicle or being thrown out

of the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead

to more severe injuries in a collision. The

air bags work with your seat belt to

restrain you properly. In some collisions,

the air bags won’t deploy at all. Always

wear your seat belt even though you have

air bags.

• In a collision, you and your passengers

can suffer much greater injuries if you

are not properly buckled up. You can

strike the interior of your vehicle or other

passengers, or you can be thrown out of

the vehicle. Always be sure you and

others in your vehicle are buckled up

properly.

• It is dangerous to ride in a cargo area,

inside or outside of a vehicle. In a colli-

sion, people riding in these areas are

more likely to be seriously injured or

killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of

your vehicle that is not equipped with

seats and seat belts.

WARNING!

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a

seat and using a seat belt properly. Oc-

cupants, including the driver, should al-

ways wear their seat belts whether or not

an air bag is also provided at their seat-

ing position to minimize the risk of se-

vere injury or death in the event of a

crash.

• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could

make your injuries in a collision much

worse. You might suffer internal injuries,

or you could even slide out of the seat

belt. Follow these instructions to wear

your seat belt safely and to keep your

passengers safe, too.

• Two people should never be belted into a

single seat belt. People belted together

can crash into one another in a collision,

hurting one another badly. Never use a

lap/shoulder belt or a lap belt for more

than one person, no matter what their

size.

WARNING!

• A lap belt worn too high can increase the

risk of injury in a collision. The seat belt

forces won’t be at the strong hip and

pelvic bones, but across your abdomen.

Always wear the lap part of your seat belt

as low as possible and keep it snug.

• A twisted seat belt may not protect you

properly. In a collision, it could even cut

into you. Be sure the seat belt is flat

against your body, without twists. If you

can’t straighten a seat belt in your ve-

hicle, take it to an authorized dealer

immediately and have it fixed.

• A seat belt that is buckled into the wrong

buckle will not protect you properly. The

lap portion could ride too high on your

body, possibly causing internal injuries.

Always buckle your seat belt into the

buckle nearest you.

• A seat belt that is too loose will not

protect you properly. In a sudden stop,

you could move too far forward, increas-

ing the possibility of injury. Wear your

seat belt snugly.

SAFETY

WARNING!

• A seat belt that is worn under your arm is

dangerous. Your body could strike the

inside surfaces of the vehicle in a colli-

sion, increasing head and neck injury. A

seat belt worn under the arm can cause

internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as

shoulder bones. Wear the seat belt over

your shoulder so that your strongest

bones will take the force in a collision.

• A shoulder belt placed behind you will

not protect you from injury during a

collision. You are more likely to hit your

head in a collision if you do not wear

your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder

belt are meant to be used together.

• A frayed or torn seat belt could rip apart

in a collision and leave you with no

protection. Inspect the seat belt system

periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or

loose parts. Damaged parts must be re-

placed immediately. Do not disassemble

or modify the seat belt system. Seat belt

assemblies must be replaced after a

collision.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions

1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit

back and adjust the seat.

2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back

of the front seat, and next to your arm in

the rear seat (for vehicles equipped with a

rear seat). Grasp the latch plate and pull

out the seat belt. Slide the latch plate up

the webbing as far as necessary to allow

the seat belt to go around your lap.

3. When the seat belt is long enough to fit,

insert the latch plate into the buckle until

you hear a “click.”

Pulling Out The Latch Plate

1 — Seat Belt Buckle

2 — Seat Belt Latch Plate

4. Position the lap belt so that it is snug and

lies low across your hips, below your ab-

domen. To remove slack in the lap belt

portion, pull up on the shoulder belt. To

loosen the lap belt if it is too tight, tilt the

latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug

seat belt reduces the risk of sliding under

the seat belt in a collision.

5. Position the shoulder belt across the

shoulder and chest with minimal, if any

slack so that it is comfortable and not

resting on your neck. The retractor will

withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.

6. To release the seat belt, push the red

button on the buckle. The seat belt will

automatically retract to its stowed posi-

tion. If necessary, slide the latch plate

down the webbing to allow the seat belt to

retract fully.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Untwisting Procedure

Use the following procedure to untwist a

twisted lap/shoulder belt.

1. Position the latch plate as close as pos-

sible to the anchor point.

2. At about 6 to 12 inches (15 to 30 cm)

above the latch plate, grasp and twist the

seat belt webbing 180 degrees to create a

fold that begins immediately above the

latch plate.

3. Slide the latch plate upward over the

folded webbing. The folded webbing must

enter the slot at the top of the latch plate.

4. Continue to slide the latch plate up until it

clears the folded webbing and the seat

belt is no longer twisted.

Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage

In the driver and front passenger seats, the

top of the shoulder belt can be adjusted

upward or downward to position the seat belt

away from your neck. Push or squeeze the

anchorage button to release the anchorage,

and move it up or down to the position that

serves you best.

As a guide, if you are shorter than average,

you will prefer the shoulder belt anchorage in

a lower position, and if you are taller than

average, you will prefer the shoulder belt

anchorage in a higher position. After you

release the anchorage button, try to move it

up or down to make sure that it is locked in

position.

Adjustable Upper Anchorage

SAFETY

NOTE:

The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchor-

age is equipped with an Easy Up feature. This

feature allows the shoulder belt anchorage to

be adjusted in the upward position without

pushing or squeezing the release button. To

verify the shoulder belt anchorage is latched,

pull downward on the shoulder belt anchor-

age until it is locked into position.

WARNING!

• Wearing your seat belt incorrectly could

make your injuries in a collision much

worse. You might suffer internal injuries,

or you could even slide out of the seat

belt. Follow these instructions to wear

your seat belt safely and to keep your

passengers safe, too.

• Position the shoulder belt across the

shoulder and chest with minimal, if any

slack so that it is comfortable and not

resting on your neck. The retractor will

withdraw any slack in the shoulder belt.

• Misadjustment of the seat belt could

reduce the effectiveness of the safety

belt in a crash.

Seat Belts And Pregnant Women

Seat belts must be worn by all occupants

including pregnant women: the risk of injury

in the event of an accident is reduced for the

mother and the unborn child if they are wear-

ing a seat belt.

Position the lap belt snug and low below the

abdomen and across the strong bones of the

hips. Place the shoulder belt across the chest

and away from the neck. Never place the

shoulder belt behind the back or under the

arm.

Seat Belt Pretensioner

The front seat belt system is equipped with

pretensioning devices that are designed to

remove slack from the seat belt in the event

of a collision. These devices may improve the

performance of the seat belt by removing

slack from the seat belt early in a collision.

Pretensioners work for all size occupants,

including those in child restraints.

NOTE:

These devices are not a substitute for proper

seat belt placement by the occupant. The

seat belt still must be worn snugly and posi-

tioned properly.

The pretensioners are triggered by the Occu-

pant Restraint Controller (ORC). Like the air

bags, the pretensioners are single use items.

A deployed pretensioner or a deployed air bag

must be replaced immediately.

Pregnant Women And Seat Belts

Energy Management Feature

The front seat belt system is equipped with

an Energy Management feature that may help

further reduce the risk of injury in the event

of a collision. The seat belt system has a

retractor assembly that is designed to release

webbing in a controlled manner.

Switchable Automatic Locking Retractor

(ALR)

The seat belts in the passenger seating posi-

tions are equipped with a Switchable Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) which is used

to secure a child restraint system. For addi-

tional information, refer to “Installing Child

Restraints Using The Vehicle Seat Belt” un-

der the “Child Restraints” section of this

manual. The figure below illustrates the lock-

ing feature for each seating position.

If the passenger seating position is equipped

with an ALR and is being used for normal

usage, only pull the seat belt webbing out far

enough to comfortably wrap around the occu-

pant’s mid-section so as to not activate the

ALR. If the ALR is activated, you will hear a

clicking sound as the seat belt retracts. Allow

the webbing to retract completely in this case

and then carefully pull out only the amount of

webbing necessary to comfortably wrap

around the occupant’s mid-section. Slide the

latch plate into the buckle until you hear a

"click.”

In Automatic Locking Mode, the shoulder

belt is automatically pre-locked. The seat

belt will still retract to remove any slack in

the shoulder belt. Use the Automatic Locking

Mode anytime a child restraint is installed in

a seating position that has a seat belt with

this feature. Children 12 years old and under

should always be properly restrained in a

vehicle with a rear seat.

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint

in front of an air bag. A deploying pas-

senger front air bag can cause death or

serious injury to a child 12 years or

younger, including a child in a rear-

facing child restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in

the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.

ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking

Retractor

SAFETY

How To Engage The Automatic Locking Mode

1. Buckle the combination lap and shoulder

belt.

2. Grasp the shoulder portion and pull down-

ward until the entire seat belt is extracted.

3. Allow the seat belt to retract. As the seat

belt retracts, you will hear a clicking

sound. This indicates the seat belt is now

in the Automatic Locking Mode.

How To Disengage The Automatic Locking Mode

Unbuckle the combination lap/shoulder belt

and allow it to retract completely to disen-

gage the Automatic Locking Mode and acti-

vate the vehicle sensitive (emergency) lock-

ing mode.

WARNING!

• The seat belt assembly must be replaced

if the switchable Automatic Locking Re-

tractor (ALR) feature or any other seat

belt function is not working properly

when checked according to the proce-

dures in the Service Manual.

WARNING!

• Failure to replace the seat belt assembly

could increase the risk of injury in colli-

sions.

• Do not use the Automatic Locking Mode

to restrain occupants who are wearing

the seat belt or children who are using

booster seats. The locked mode is only

used to install rear-facing or forward-

facing child restraints that have a har-

ness for restraining the child.

Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS)

Some of the safety features described in this

section may be standard equipment on some

models, or may be optional equipment on

others. If you are not sure, ask your autho-

rized dealer.

The air bag system must be ready to protect

you in a collision. The Occupant Restraint

Controller (ORC) monitors the internal cir-

cuits and interconnecting wiring associated

with the electrical Air Bag System Compo-

nents. Your vehicle may be equipped with the

following Air Bag System Components:

Air Bag System Components

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

• Air Bag Warning Light

• Steering Wheel and Column

• Instrument Panel

• Knee Impact Bolsters

• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags

• Seat Belt Buckle Switch

• Supplemental Side Air Bags

• Supplemental Knee Air Bags

• Front and Side Impact Sensors

• Seat Belt Pretensioners

• Seat Track Position Sensors

Air Bag Warning Light

The ORC monitors the readiness of the

electronic parts of the air bag system when-

ever the ignition switch is in the AVV/START

or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN position. If the ignition

switch is in the STOP/OFF/LOCK position the

air bag system is not on and the air bags will

not inflate.

The ORC contains a backup power supply

system that may deploy the air bag system

even if the battery loses power or it becomes

disconnected prior to deployment.

The ORC turns on the Air Bag Warning Light

in the instrument panel for approximately

four to eight seconds for a self-check when

the ignition switch is in the MAR/ACC/ON/

RUN position. After the self-check, the Air

Bag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC

detects a malfunction in any part of the

system, it turns on the Air Bag Warning Light,

either momentarily or continuously. A single

chime will sound to alert you if the light

comes on again after initial startup.

The ORC also includes diagnostics that will

illuminate the instrument panel Air Bag

Warning Light if a malfunction is detected

that could affect the air bag system. The

diagnostics also record the nature of the

malfunction. While the air bag system is

designed to be maintenance free, if any of

the following occurs, have an authorized

dealer service the air bag system immedi-

ately.

• The Air Bag Warning Light does not come

on during the four to eight seconds when

the ignition switch is first in the MAR/ACC/

ON/RUN position.

• The Air Bag Warning Light remains on after

the four to eight-second interval.

• The Air Bag Warning Light comes on inter-

mittently or remains on while driving.

NOTE:

If the speedometer, tachometer, or any en-

gine related gauges are not working, the Oc-

cupant Restraint Controller (ORC) may also

be disabled. In this condition the air bags

may not be ready to inflate for your protec-

tion. Have an authorized dealer service the

air bag system immediately.

WARNING!

Ignoring the Air Bag Warning Light in your

instrument panel could mean you won’t

have the air bag system to protect you in a

collision. If the light does not come on as a

bulb check when the ignition is first

turned on, stays on after you start the

vehicle, or if it comes on as you drive, have

WARNING!

an authorized dealer service the air bag

system immediately.

Redundant Air Bag Warning Light

If a fault with the Air Bag Warning Light is

detected, which could affect the Supplemen-

tal Restraint System (SRS), the Redundant

Air Bag Warning Light will illuminate on the

instrument panel. The Redundant Air Bag

Warning Light will stay on until the fault is

cleared. In addition, a single chime will

sound to alert you that the Redundant Air Bag

Warning Light has come on and a fault has

been detected. If the Redundant Air Bag

Warning Light comes on intermittently or

remains on while driving have an authorized

dealer service the vehicle immediately.

For additional information regarding the Re-

dundant Air Bag Warning Light refer to “Get-

ting To Know Your Instrument Panel” section

of this manual.

SAFETY

Front Air Bags

This vehicle has front air bags and lap/

shoulder belts for both the driver and front

passenger. The front air bags are a supple-

ment to the seat belt restraint systems. The

driver front air bag is mounted in the center of

the steering wheel. The passenger front air

bag is mounted in the instrument panel,

above the glove compartment. The words

“SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” are embossed

on the air bag covers.

WARNING!

• Being too close to the steering wheel or

instrument panel during front air bag

deployment could cause serious injury,

including death. Air bags need room to

inflate. Sit back, comfortably extending

your arms to reach the steering wheel or

instrument panel.

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint

in front of an air bag. A deploying pas-

senger front air bag can cause death or

serious injury to a child 12 years or

younger, including a child in a rear-

facing child restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in

the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.

Driver And Passenger Front Air Bag Features

The Advanced Front Air Bag system has mul-

tistage driver and front passenger air bags.

This system provides output appropriate to

the severity and type of collision as deter-

mined by the Occupant Restraint Controller

(ORC), which may receive information from

the front impact sensors (if equipped) or

other system components.

Front Air Bag/Knee Impact Bolster

Locations

1 — Driver And Passenger Front Air

Bags

2 — Driver Knee Impact Bolster/

Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag

3 — Passenger Knee Impact Bolster

The first stage inflator is triggered immedi-

ately during an impact that requires air bag

deployment. A low energy output is used in

less severe collisions. A higher energy output

is used for more severe collisions.

This vehicle may be equipped with a driver

and/or front passenger seat belt buckle

switch that detects whether the driver or front

passenger seat belt is buckled. The seat belt

buckle switch may adjust the inflation rate of

the Advanced Front Air Bags.

This vehicle may be equipped with driver

and/or front passenger seat track position

sensors that may adjust the inflation rate of

the Advanced Front Air Bags based upon seat

position.

WARNING!

• No objects should be placed over or near

the air bag on the instrument panel or

steering wheel because any such objects

could cause harm if the vehicle is in a

collision severe enough to cause the air

bag to inflate.

WARNING!

• Do not put anything on or around the air

bag covers or attempt to open them

manually. You may damage the air bags

and you could be injured because the air

bags may no longer be functional. The

protective covers for the air bag cush-

ions are designed to open only when the

air bags are inflating.

• Relying on the air bags alone could lead

to more severe injuries in a collision. The

air bags work with your seat belt to

restrain you properly. In some collisions,

air bags won’t deploy at all. Always wear

your seat belts even though you have air

bags.

Front Air Bag Operation

Front Air Bags are designed to provide addi-

tional protection by supplementing the seat

belts. Front air bags are not expected to

reduce the risk of injury in rear, side, or

rollover collisions. The front air bags will not

deploy in all frontal collisions, including

some that may produce substantial vehicle

damage — for example, some pole collisions,

truck underrides, and angle offset collisions.

On the other hand, depending on the type

and location of impact, front air bags may

deploy in crashes with little vehicle front-end

damage but that produce a severe initial

deceleration.

Because air bag sensors measure vehicle

deceleration over time, vehicle speed and

damage by themselves are not good indica-

tors of whether or not an air bag should have

deployed.

Seat belts are necessary for your protection in

all collisions, and also are needed to help

keep you in position, away from an inflating

air bag.

When the ORC detects a collision requiring

the front air bags, it signals the inflator units.

A large quantity of non-toxic gas is generated

to inflate the front air bags.

The steering wheel hub trim cover and the

upper passenger side of the instrument panel

separate and fold out of the way as the air

bags inflate to their full size. The front air

SAFETY

100

bags fully inflate in less time than it takes to

blink your eyes. The front air bags then

quickly deflate while helping to restrain the

driver and front passenger.

Knee Impact Bolsters

The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the

knees of the driver and front passenger, and

position the front occupants for improved

interaction with the front air bags.

WARNING!

• Do not drill, cut, or tamper with the knee

impact bolsters in any way.

• Do not mount any accessories to the

knee impact bolsters such as alarm

lights, stereos, citizen band radios, etc.

Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag

This vehicle is equipped with a Supplemental

Driver Knee Air Bag mounted in the instru-

ment panel below the steering column. The

Supplemental Driver Knee Air Bag provides

enhanced protection during a frontal impact

by working together with the seat belts, pre-

tensioners, and front air bags.

Supplemental Side Air Bags

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags

(SABs)

This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental

Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags (SABs).

Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side Air Bags

(SABs) are located in the outboard side of the

front seats. The SABs are marked with “SRS

AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG” on a label or on the

seat trim on the outboard side of the seats.

The SABs may help to reduce the risk of

occupant injury during certain side impacts,

in addition to the injury reduction potential

provided by the seat belts and body structure.

When the SAB deploys, it opens the seam on

the outboard side of the seatback’s trim

cover. The inflating SAB deploys through the

seat seam into the space between the occu-

pant and the door. The SAB moves at a very

high speed and with such a high force that it

could injure occupants if they are not seated

properly, or if items are positioned in the area

where the SAB inflates. Children are at an

even greater risk of injury from a deploying air

bag.

Front Supplemental Seat-Mounted Side

Air Bag

101

WARNING!

Do not use accessory seat covers or place

objects between you and the Side Air

Bags; the performance could be adversely

affected and/or objects could be pushed

into you, causing serious injury.

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains

(SABICs)

This vehicle is equipped with Supplemental

Side Air Bag Inflatable Curtains (SABICs).

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable Cur-

tains (SABICs) are located above the side

windows. The trim covering the SABICs is

labeled “SRS AIRBAG” or “AIRBAG.”

SABICs may help reduce the risk of head and

other injuries to front and rear seat outboard

occupants in certain side impacts, in addi-

tion to the injury reduction potential provided

by the seat belts and body structure.

The SABIC deploys downward, covering the

side windows. An inflating SABIC pushes the

outside edge of the headliner out of the way

and covers the window. The SABICs inflate

with enough force to injure occupants if they

are not belted and seated properly, or if items

are positioned in the area where the SABICs

inflate. Children are at an even greater risk of

injury from a deploying air bag.

The SABICs may help reduce the risk of

partial or complete ejection of vehicle occu-

pants through side windows in certain side

impact events.

WARNING!

• Do not mount equipment, or stack lug-

gage or other cargo up high enough to

block the deployment of the SABICs.

The trim covering above the side win-

dows where the SABIC and its deploy-

ment path are located should remain

free from any obstructions.

• In order for the SABICs to work as in-

tended, do not install any accessory

items in your vehicle which could alter

the roof. Do not add an aftermarket

sunroof to your vehicle. Do not add roof

racks that require permanent attach-

ments (bolts or screws) for installation

Supplemental Side Air Bag Inflatable

Curtain (SABIC) Label Location

SAFETY

102

WARNING!

on the vehicle roof. Do not drill into the

roof of the vehicle for any reason.

Side Impacts

The Side Air Bags are designed to activate in

certain side impacts. The Occupant Restraint

Controller (ORC) determines whether the de-

ployment of the Side Air Bags in a particular

impact event is appropriate, based on the

severity and type of collision. The side impact

sensors aid the ORC in determining the ap-

propriate response to impact events. The sys-

tem is calibrated to deploy the Side Air Bags

on the impact side of the vehicle during

impacts that require Side Air Bag occupant

protection. In side impacts, the Side Air Bags

deploy independently; a left side impact de-

ploys the left Side Air Bags only and a right-

side impact deploys the right Side Air Bags

only. Vehicle damage by itself is not a good

indicator of whether or not Side Air Bags

should have deployed.

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all side

collisions, including some collisions at cer-

tain angles, or some side collisions that do

not impact the area of the passenger com-

partment. The Side Air Bags may deploy

during angled or offset frontal collisions

where the front air bags deploy.

Side Air Bags are a supplement to the seat

belt restraint system. Side Air Bags deploy in

less time than it takes to blink your eyes.

WARNING!

• Occupants, including children, who are

up against or very close to Side Air Bags

can be seriously injured or killed. Occu-

pants, including children, should never

lean on or sleep against the door, side

windows, or area where the side air bags

inflate, even if they are in an infant or

child restraint.

• Seat belts (and child restraints where

appropriate) are necessary for your pro-

tection in all collisions. They also help

keep you in position, away from an in-

flating Side Air Bag. To get the best

protection from the Side Air Bags, occu-

pants must wear their seat belts properly

and sit upright with their backs against

WARNING!

the seats. Children must be properly

restrained in a child restraint or booster

seat that is appropriate for the size of the

child.

WARNING!

• Side Air Bags need room to inflate. Do

not lean against the door or window. Sit

upright in the center of the seat.

• Being too close to the Side Air Bags

during deployment could cause you to

be severely injured or killed.

• Relying on the Side Air Bags alone could

lead to more severe injuries in a colli-

sion. The Side Air Bags work with your

seat belt to restrain you properly. In

some collisions, Side Air Bags won’t

deploy at all. Always wear your seat belt

even though you have Side Air Bags.

NOTE:

Air bag covers may not be obvious in the

interior trim, but they will open during air bag

deployment.

103

Rollover Events

Side Air Bags are designed to activate in

certain rollover events. The ORC determines

whether the deployment of the Side Air Bags

in a particular rollover event is appropriate,

based on the severity and type of collision.

Vehicle damage by itself is not a good indi-

cator of whether or not Side Air Bags should

have deployed.

The Side Air Bags will not deploy in all

rollover events. The rollover sensing system

determines if a rollover event may be in

progress and whether deployment is appro-

priate. In the event the vehicle experiences a

rollover or near rollover event, and deploy-

ment of the Side Air Bags is appropriate, the

rollover sensing system will also deploy the

seat belt pretensioners on both sides of the

vehicle.

The SABICs may help reduce the risk of

partial or complete ejection of vehicle occu-

pants through side windows in certain roll-

over or side impact events.

Air Bag System Components

NOTE:

The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

monitors the internal circuits and intercon-

necting wiring associated with electrical Air

Bag System Components listed below:

• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)

• Air Bag Warning Light

• Steering Wheel and Column

• Instrument Panel

• Knee Impact Bolsters

• Driver and Front Passenger Air Bags

• Seat Belt Buckle Switch

• Supplemental Side Air Bags

• Supplemental Knee Air Bags

• Front and Side Impact Sensors

• Seat Belt Pretensioners

• Seat Track Position Sensors

If A Deployment Occurs

The front air bags are designed to deflate

immediately after deployment.

NOTE:

Front and/or side air bags will not deploy in

all collisions. This does not mean something

is wrong with the air bag system.

If you do have a collision which deploys the

air bags, any or all of the following may occur:

• The air bag material may sometimes cause

abrasions and/or skin reddening to the oc-

cupants as the air bags deploy and unfold.

The abrasions are similar to friction rope

burns or those you might get sliding along a

carpet or gymnasium floor. They are not

caused by contact with chemicals. They are

not permanent and normally heal quickly.

However, if you haven’t healed significantly

within a few days, or if you have any blis-

tering, see your doctor immediately.

• As the air bags deflate, you may see some

smoke-like particles. The particles are a

normal by-product of the process that gen-

erates the non-toxic gas used for air bag

inflation. These airborne particles may irri-

tate the skin, eyes, nose, or throat. If you

have skin or eye irritation, rinse the area

with cool water. For nose or throat irritation,

move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,

SAFETY

104

see your doctor. If these particles settle on

your clothing, follow the garment manufac-

turer’s instructions for cleaning.

Do not drive your vehicle after the air bags

have deployed. If you are involved in another

collision, the air bags will not be in place to

protect you.

WARNING!

Deployed air bags and seat belt preten-

sioners cannot protect you in another col-

lision. Have the air bags, seat belt preten-

sioners, and the seat belt retractor

assemblies replaced by an authorized

dealer immediately. Also, have the Occu-

pant Restraint Controller System serviced

as well.

NOTE:

• Air bag covers may not be obvious in the

interior trim, but they will open during air

bag deployment.

• After any collision, the vehicle should be

taken to an authorized dealer immediately.

Enhanced Accident Response System

In the event of an impact, if the communica-

tion network remains intact, and the power

remains intact, depending on the nature of

the event, the ORC will determine whether to

have the Enhanced Accident Response Sys-

tem perform the following functions:

• Cut off fuel to the engine (If Equipped)

• Cut off battery power to the electric motor

(If Equipped)

• Flash hazard lights as long as the battery

has power

• Turn on the interior lights, which remain on

as long as the battery has power or for 15

minutes from the intervention of the En-

hanced Accident Response System.

• Unlock the power door locks.

Your vehicle may also be designed to perform

any of these other functions in response to

the Enhanced Accident Response System:

• Turn off the Fuel Filter Heater, Turn off the

HVAC Blower Motor, Close the HVAC Circu-

lation Door

• Cut off battery power to the:

– Engine

– Electric Motor (if equipped)

– Electric power steering

– Brake booster

– Electric park brake

– Automatic transmission gear selector

– Horn

– Front wiper

– Headlamp washer pump

NOTE:

After an accident, remember to cycle the

ignition to the STOP (OFF/LOCK) position

and remove the key from the ignition switch

to avoid draining the battery. Carefully check

the vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine com-

partment and on the ground near the engine

compartment and fuel tank before resetting

the system and starting the engine. If there

are no fuel leaks or damage to the vehicle

electrical devices (e.g. headlights) after an

accident, reset the system by following the

procedure described below.

105

Enhanced Accident Response System Reset

Procedure

After the event occurs, when the system is

active, a message regarding fuel cutoff is

displayed. Turn the ignition switch from igni-

tion AVV/START or MAR/ACC/ON/RUN to ig-

nition STOP/OFF/LOCK. Carefully check the

vehicle for fuel leaks in the engine compart-

ment and on the ground near the engine

compartment and fuel tank before resetting

the system and starting the engine.

Depending on the nature of the event the left

and right turn signal lights, located in the

instrument panel, may both be blinking and

will continue to blink. In order to move your

vehicle to the side of the road, you must

follow the system reset procedure.

Customer Action Customer Will See

NOTE:

Each step MUST BE held for at least two

seconds

1. Turn ignition

STOP/OFF/LOCK.

(Turn Signal Switch

Must be placed in

Neutral State).

2. Turn ignition MAR/

ACC/ON/RUN.

Right turn light

BLINKS.

Left turn light is OFF.

3. Turn right turn

signal switch ON.

Right turn light is ON

SOLID.

Left turn light

BLINKS.

4. Place turn signal

in neutral state.

Right turn light is

OFF.

Left turn light

BLINKS.

5. Turn left turn sig-

nal switch ON.

Right turn light

BLINKS.

Left turn light is ON

SOLID.

6. Place turn signal

in neutral state.

Right turn light

BLINKS.

Left turn light is OFF.

Customer Action Customer Will See

NOTE:

Each step MUST BE held for at least two

seconds

7. Turn right turn

signal switch ON.

Right turn light is ON

SOLID.

Left turn light

BLINKS.

8. Place turn signal

in neutral state.

Right turn light is

OFF.

Left turn light

BLINKS.

9. Turn left turn sig-

nal switch ON.

Right turn light is ON

SOLID.

Left turn light is ON

SOLID.

10. Turn left turn

signal switch OFF.

(Turn Signal Switch

Must be placed in

Neutral State).

Right turn light is

OFF.

Left turn light is OFF.

11. Turn ignition

STOP/OFF/LOCK.

SAFETY

106

Customer Action Customer Will See

NOTE:

Each step MUST BE held for at least two

seconds

12. Turn ignition

MAR/ACC/ON/RUN.

(Entire sequence

needs to be com-

pleted within one

minute or sequence

will need to be re-

peated).

System is now reset

and the engine may

be started.

Turn hazard flashers

OFF (Manually).

If a reset procedure step is not completed

within 60 seconds, then the turn signal lights

will blink and the reset procedure must be

performed again in order to be successful.

Maintaining Your Air Bag System

WARNING!

• Modifications to any part of the air bag

system could cause it to fail when you

need it. You could be injured if the air

bag system is not there to protect you.

WARNING!

Do not modify the components or wiring,

including adding any kind of badges or

stickers to the steering wheel hub trim

cover or the upper right side of the in-

strument panel. Do not modify the front

bumper, vehicle body structure, or add

aftermarket side steps or running

boards.

• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of

the air bag system yourself. Be sure to

tell anyone who works on your vehicle

that it has an air bag system.

• Do not attempt to modify any part of your

air bag system. The air bag may inflate

accidentally or may not function prop-

erly if modifications are made. Take your

vehicle to an authorized dealer for any

air bag system service. If your seat, in-

cluding your trim cover and cushion,

needs to be serviced in any way (includ-

ing removal or loosening/tightening of

seat attachment bolts), take the vehicle

to your authorized dealer. Only manufac-

turer approved seat accessories may be

used. If it is necessary to modify the air

WARNING!

bag system for persons with disabilities,

contact an authorized dealer.

Event Data Recorder (EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an event data

recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR

is to record, in certain crash or near crash-like

situations, such as an air bag deployment or

hitting a road obstacle, data that will assist in

understanding how a vehicle’s systems per-

formed. The EDR is designed to record data

related to vehicle dynamics and safety sys-

tems for a short period of time, typically

30 seconds or less. The EDR in this vehicle is

designed to record such data as:

• How various systems in your vehicle were

operating;

• Whether or not the driver and passenger

safety belts were buckled/fastened;

• How far (if at all) the driver was depressing

the accelerator and/or brake pedal; and,

• How fast the vehicle was traveling.

107

These data can help provide a better under-

standing of the circumstances in which

crashes and injuries occur.

NOTE:

EDR data are recorded by your vehicle only if

a non-trivial crash situation occurs; no data

are recorded by the EDR under normal driving

conditions and no personal data (e.g., name,

gender, age, and crash location) are re-

corded. However, other parties, such as law

enforcement, could combine the EDR data

with the type of personally identifying data

routinely acquired during a crash investiga-

tion.

To read data recorded by an EDR, special

equipment is required, and access to the

vehicle or the EDR is needed. In addition to

the vehicle manufacturer, other parties, such

as law enforcement, that have the special

equipment, can read the information if they

have access to the vehicle or the EDR.

Child Restraints

Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled

up at all times, including babies and chil-

dren. Every state in the United States, and

every Canadian province, requires that small

children ride in proper restraint systems. This

is the law, and you can be prosecuted for

ignoring it.

Children 12 years or younger should ride

properly buckled up in a rear seat, if avail-

able. According to crash statistics, children

are safer when properly restrained in the rear

seats rather than in the front.

WARNING!

In a collision, an unrestrained child can

become a projectile inside the vehicle.

The force required to hold even an infant

on your lap could become so great that you

could not hold the child, no matter how

strong you are. The child and others could

be badly injured or killed. Any child riding

in your vehicle should be in a proper re-

straint for the child’s size.

There are different sizes and types of re-

straints for children from newborn size to the

child almost large enough for an adult safety

belt. Always check the child seat Owner’s

Manual to make sure you have the correct

seat for your child. Carefully read and follow

all the instructions and warnings in the child

restraint Owner’s Manual and on all the la-

bels attached to the child restraint.

Before buying any restraint system, make

sure that it has a label certifying that it meets

all applicable Safety Standards. You should

also make sure that you can install it in the

vehicle where you will use it.

NOTE:

• For additional information, refer to

www.safercar.gov/parents/index.htm or call

1-888-327-4236.

•

Canadian residents should refer to Transport

Canada’s website for additional information:

http://www.tc.gc.ca/eng/motorvehiclesafety/

safedrivers-childsafety-index-53.htm

SAFETY

108

Summary Of Recommendations For Restraining Children In Vehicles

Child Size, Height, Weight Or Age Recommended Type Of Child Restraint

Infants and Toddlers

Children who are two years old or younger and

who have not reached the height or weight lim-

its of their child restraint

Either an Infant Carrier or a Convertible Child

Restraint, facing rearward in the rear seat of

the vehicle

Small Children

Children who are at least two years old or who

have out-grown the height or weight limit of

their rear-facing child restraint

Forward-Facing Child Restraint with a five-

point Harness, facing forward in the rear seat

of the vehicle

Larger Children

Children who have out-grown their forward-

facing child restraint, but are too small to prop-

erly fit the vehicle’s seat belt

Belt Positioning Booster Seat and the vehicle

seat belt, seated in the rear seat of the vehicle

Children Too Large for Child Restraints

Children 12 years old or younger, who have

out-grown the height or weight limit of their

booster seat

Vehicle Seat Belt, seated in the rear seat of the

vehicle

Infant And Child Restraints

Safety experts recommend that children ride

rear-facing in the vehicle until they are two

years old or until they reach either the height

or weight limit of their rear-facing child re-

straint. Two types of child restraints can be

used rear-facing: infant carriers and convert-

ible child seats.

The infant carrier is only used rear-facing in

the vehicle. It is recommended for children

from birth until they reach the weight or

height limit of the infant carrier. Convertible

child seats can be used either rear-facing or

forward-facing in the vehicle. Convertible

child seats often have a higher weight limit in

the rear-facing direction than infant carriers

do, so they can be used rear-facing by chil-

dren who have outgrown their infant carrier

but are still less than at least two years old.

Children should remain rear-facing until they

reach the highest weight or height allowed by

their convertible child seat.

WARNING!

• Never place a rear-facing child restraint

in front of an air bag. A deploying pas-

senger front air bag can cause death or

serious injury to a child 12 years or

younger, including a child in a rear-

facing child restraint.

• Only use a rear-facing child restraint in

the rear seat of a vehicle with a rear seat.

109

Older Children And Child Restraints

Children who are two years old or who have

outgrown their rear-facing convertible child

seat can ride forward-facing in the vehicle.

Forward-facing child seats and convertible

child seats used in the forward-facing direc-

tion are for children who are over two years

old or who have outgrown the rear-facing

weight or height limit of their rear-facing

convertible child seat. Children should re-

main in a forward-facing child seat with a

harness for as long as possible, up to the

highest weight or height allowed by the child

seat.

All children whose weight or height is above

the forward-facing limit for the child seat

should use a belt-positioning booster seat

until the vehicle’s seat belts fit properly. If

the child cannot sit with knees bent over the

vehicle’s seat cushion while the child’s back

is against the seatback, they should use a

belt-positioning booster seat. The child and

belt-positioning booster seat are held in the

vehicle by the seat belt.

WARNING!

• Improper installation can lead to failure

of an infant or child restraint. It could

come loose in a collision. The child

could be badly injured or killed. Follow

the child restraint manufacturer’s direc-

tions exactly when installing an infant or

child restraint.

• After a child restraint is installed in the

vehicle, do not move the vehicle seat

forward or rearward because it can

loosen the child restraint attachments.

Remove the child restraint before ad-

justing the vehicle seat position. When

the vehicle seat has been adjusted, re-

install the child restraint.

• When your child restraint is not in use,

secure it in the vehicle with the seat belt

or LATCH anchorages, or remove it from

the vehicle. Do not leave it loose in the

vehicle. In a sudden stop or accident, it

could strike the occupants or seatbacks

and cause serious personal injury.

Children Too Large For Booster Seats

Children who are large enough to wear the

shoulder belt comfortably, and whose legs are

long enough to bend over the front of the seat

when their back is against the seatback,

should use the seat belt in a rear seat. Use

this simple 5-step test to decide whether the

child can use the vehicle’s seat belt alone:

1. Can the child sit all the way back against

the back of the vehicle seat?

2. Do the child’s knees bend comfortably

over the front of the vehicle seat – while

the child is still sitting all the way back?

3. Does the shoulder belt cross the child’s

shoulder between their neck and arm?

4. Is the lap part of the belt as low as

possible, touching the child’s thighs and

not the stomach?

5. Can the child stay seated like this for the

whole trip?

If the answer to any of these questions was

“no,” then the child still needs to use a

booster seat in this vehicle. If the child is

using the lap/shoulder belt, check seat belt

fit periodically and make sure the seat belt

SAFETY

110

buckle is latched. A child’s squirming or

slouching can move the belt out of position. If

the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck,

move the child closer to the center of the

vehicle, or use a booster seat to position the

seat belt on the child correctly.

WARNING!

Never allow a child to put the shoulder belt

under an arm or behind their back. In a

crash, the shoulder belt will not protect a

child properly, which may result in serious

WARNING!

injury or death. A child must always wear

both the lap and shoulder portions of the

seat belt correctly.

Recommendations For Attaching Child Restraints

Restraint Type Combined Weight of the

Child + Child Restraint

Use Any Attachment Method Shown With An “X” Below

LATCH – Lower Anchors

Only

Seat Belt Only LATCH – Lower Anchors

+ Top Tether Anchor

Seat Belt + Top Tether

Anchor

Rear-Facing Child Re-

straint

Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Rear-Facing Child Re-

straint

More than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

Forward-Facing Child

Restraint

Up to 65 lbs (29.5 kg) X X

Forward-Facing Child

Restraint

More than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg)

111

Lower Anchors And Tethers For CHildren

(LATCH) Restraint System

Your vehicle is equipped with the child re-

straint anchorage system called LATCH,

which stands for Lower Anchors and Tethers

for CHildren. The LATCH system has three

vehicle anchor points for installing LATCH-

equipped child seats. There are two lower

anchorages located at the back of the seat

cushion where it meets the seatback and one

top tether anchorage located behind the seat-

ing position. These anchorages are used to

install LATCH-equipped child seats without

using the vehicle’s seat belts. Some seating

positions may have a top tether anchorage

but no lower anchorages. In these seating

positions, the seat belt must be used with the

top tether anchorage to install the child re-

straint. Please see the following table for

more information.

LATCH Positions For Installing Child Re-

straints In This Vehicle

LATCH Label

LATCH Positions

Lower Anchorage Symbol (2 An-

chorages Per Seating Position)

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

SAFETY

112

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With LATCH

What is the weight limit (child’s weight +

weight of the child restraint) for using the

LATCH anchorage system to attach the child

restraint?

65 lbs (29.5 kg)

Use the LATCH anchorage system until the

combined weight of the child and the child

restraint is 65 lbs (29.5 kg). Use the seat belt

and tether anchor instead of the LATCH system

once the combined weight is more than 65 lbs

(29.5 kg).

Can the LATCH anchorages and the seat belt

be used together to attach a rear-facing or

forward-facing child restraint?

Do not use the seat belt when you use the

LATCH anchorage system to attach a rear-

facing or forward-facing child restraint.

Booster seats may be attached to the LATCH

anchorages if allowed by the booster seat

manufacturer. See your booster seat owner’s

manual for more information.

Can a child seat be installed in the center posi-

tion using the inner LATCH lower anchorages?

Use the seat belt and tether anchor to install a

child seat in the center seating position.

Can two child restraints be attached using a

common lower LATCH anchorage?

Never “share” a LATCH anchorage with two or

more child restraints. If the center position

does not have dedicated LATCH lower anchor-

ages, use the seat belt to install a child seat in

the center position next to a child seat using

the LATCH anchorages in an outboard position.

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the

back of the front passenger seat?

Yes

The child seat may touch the back of the front

passenger seat if the child restraint manufac-

turer also allows contact. See your child re-

straint owner’s manual for more information.

Can the head restraints be removed? No

113

Locating The LATCH Anchorages

The lower anchorages are round bars that are

found at the rear of the seat cushion where it

meets the seatback, below the anchorage

symbols on the seatback. They are just visible

when you lean into the rear seat to install the

child restraint. You will easily feel them if you

run your finger along the gap between the

seatback and seat cushion.

Locating The Upper Tether Anchorages

There are tether strap anchorages behind

each rear seating position located on the

back of the seat.

LATCH-compatible child restraint systems

will be equipped with a rigid bar or a flexible

strap on each side. Each will have a hook or

connector to attach to the lower anchorage

and a way to tighten the connection to the

anchorage. Forward-facing child restraints

and some rear-facing child restraints will also

be equipped with a tether strap. The tether

strap will have a hook at the end to attach to

the top tether anchorage and a way to tighten

the strap after it is attached to the anchorage.

Center Seat LATCH :

WARNING!

• Do not install a child restraint in the

center position using the LATCH system.

This position is not approved for install-

ing child seats using the LATCH attach-

ments. You must use the seat belt and

tether anchor to install a child seat in

the center seating position.

• Never use the same lower anchorage to

attach more than one child restraint.

Please refer to “To Install A LATCH-

Compatible Child Restraint” for typical

installation instructions.

Lower Anchors

Tether Anchors

SAFETY

114

Always follow the directions of the child re-

straint manufacturer when installing your child

restraint. Not all child restraint systems will be

installed as described here.

To Install A LATCH-Compatible Child Re-

straint

If the selected seating position has a Switch-

able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) seat

belt, stow the seat belt, following the instruc-

tions below. See the section “Installing Child

Restraints Using the Vehicle Seat Belt” to

check what type of seat belt each seating

position has.

1. Loosen the adjusters on the lower straps

and on the tether strap of the child seat so

that you can more easily attach the hooks

or connectors to the vehicle anchorages.

2. Place the child seat between the lower

anchorages for that seating position. For

some second row seats, you may need to

recline the seat and / or raise the head

restraint to get a better fit. If the rear seat

can be moved forward and rearward in the

vehicle, you may wish to move it to its

rear-most position to make room for the

child seat. You may also move the front

seat forward to allow more room for the

child seat.

3. Attach the lower hooks or connectors of

the child restraint to the lower anchorages

in the selected seating position.

4. If the child restraint has a tether strap,

connect it to the top tether anchorage.

See the section “Installing Child Re-

straints Using the Top Tether Anchorage”

for directions to attach a tether anchor.

5. Tighten all of the straps as you push the

child restraint rearward and downward

into the seat. Remove slack in the straps

according to the child restraint manufac-

turer’s instructions.

6. Test that the child restraint is installed

tightly by pulling back and forth on the

child seat at the belt path. It should not

move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any

direction.

How To Stow An Unused Switchable-ALR

(ALR) Seat Belt:

When using the LATCH attaching system to

install a child restraint, stow all ALR seat

belts that are not being used by other occu-

pants or being used to secure child restraints.

An unused belt could injure a child if they

play with it and accidentally lock the seat belt

retractor. Before installing a child restraint

using the LATCH system, buckle the seat belt

behind the child restraint and out of the

child’s reach. If the buckled seat belt inter-

feres with the child restraint installation, in-

stead of buckling it behind the child re-

straint, route the seat belt through the child

restraint belt path and then buckle it. Do not

lock the seat belt. Remind all children in the

vehicle that the seat belts are not toys and

that they should not play with them.

WARNING!

• Improper installation of a child restraint

to the LATCH anchorages can lead to

failure of the restraint. The child could

be badly injured or killed. Follow the

115

WARNING!

child restraint manufacturer’s directions

exactly when installing an infant or child

restraint.

• Child restraint anchorages are designed

to withstand only those loads imposed

by correctly-fitted child restraints. Un-

der no circumstances are they to be used

for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for

attaching other items or equipment to

the vehicle.

Installing Child Restraints Using The Ve-

hicle Seat Belt

Child restraint systems are designed to be

secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the

lap belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.

WARNING!

• Improper installation or failure to prop-

erly secure a child restraint can lead to

failure of the restraint. The child could

be badly injured or killed.

WARNING!

• Follow the child restraint manufactur-

er’s directions exactly when installing an

infant or child restraint.

The seat belts in the passenger seating posi-

tions are equipped with a Switchable Auto-

matic Locking Retractor (ALR) that is de-

signed to keep the lap portion of the seat belt

tight around the child restraint so that it is

not necessary to use a locking clip. The ALR

retractor can be “switched” into a locked

mode by pulling all of the webbing out of the

retractor and then letting the webbing retract

back into the retractor. If it is locked, the ALR

will make a clicking noise while the webbing

is pulled back into the retractor. Refer to the

“Automatic Locking Mode” description in

“Switchable Automatic Locking Retractors

(ALR)” under “Occupant Restraint Systems”

for additional information on ALR.

Please see the table below and the following

sections for more information.

Lap/Shoulder Belt Systems For Installing

Child Restraints In This Vehicle

Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)

Locations

ALR — Switchable Automatic Locking

Retractor

Top Tether Anchorage Symbol

SAFETY

116

Frequently Asked Questions About Installing Child Restraints With Seat Belts

What is the weight limit (child’s weight +

weight of the child restraint) for using the

Tether Anchor with the seat belt to attach a

forward facing child restraint?

Weight limit of the Child Restraint

Always use the tether anchor when using the

seat belt to install a forward facing child re-

straint, up to the recommended weight limit of

the child restraint..

Can the rear-facing child restraint touch the

back of the front passenger seat?

Yes

Contact between the front passenger seat and

the child restraint is allowed, if the child re-

straint manufacturer also allows contact.

Can the head restraints be removed? No

Can the buckle stalk be twisted to tighten the

seat belt against the belt path of the child re-

straint?

Do not twist the buckle stalk in a seating posi-

tion with an ALR retractor.

Installing A Child Restraint With A Switch-

able Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR):

Child restraint systems are designed to be

secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or the lap

belt portion of a lap/shoulder belt.

WARNING!

• Improper installation or failure to prop-

erly secure a child restraint can lead to

failure of the restraint. The child could

be badly injured or killed.

WARNING!

• Follow the child restraint manufacturer’s

directions exactly when installing an in-

fant or child restraint.

117

1. Place the child seat in the center of the

seating position. For some second row

seats, you may need to recline the seat

and/or raise the head restraint to get a

better fit. If the rear seat can be moved

forward and rearward in the vehicle, you

may wish to move it to its rear-most posi-

tion to make room for the child seat. You

may also move the front seat forward to

allow more room for the child seat.

2. Pull enough of the seat belt webbing from

the retractor to pass it through the belt

path of the child restraint. Do not twist the

belt webbing in the belt path.

3. Slide the latch plate into the buckle until

you hear a “click.”

4. Pull on the webbing to make the lap

portion tight against the child seat.

5. To lock the seat belt, pull down on the

shoulder part of the belt until you have

pulled all the seat belt webbing out of the

retractor. Then, allow the webbing to re-

tract back into the retractor. As the web-

bing retracts, you will hear a clicking

sound. This means the seat belt is now in

the Automatic Locking mode.

6. Try to pull the webbing out of the retractor.

If it is locked, you should not be able to

pull out any webbing. If the retractor is

not locked, repeat step 5.

7. Finally, pull up on any excess webbing to

tighten the lap portion around the child

restraint while you push the child restraint

rearward and downward into the vehicle

seat.

8. If the child restraint has a top tether strap

and the seating position has a top tether

anchorage, connect the tether strap to the

anchorage and tighten the tether strap.

See the section “Installing Child Re-

straints Using the Top Tether Anchorage”

for directions to attach a tether anchor.

9. Test that the child restraint is installed

tightly by pulling back and forth on the

child seat at the belt path. It should not

move more than 1 inch (25.4 mm) in any

direction.

Any seat belt system will loosen with time, so

check the belt occasionally, and pull it tight if

necessary.

Installing Child Restraints Using The Top

Tether Anchorage:

WARNING!

Do not attach a tether strap for a rear-

facing car seat to any location in front of

the car seat, including the seat frame or a

tether anchorage. Only attach the tether

strap of a rear-facing car seat to the tether

anchorage that is approved for that seating

position, located behind the top of the

vehicle seat. See the section “Lower An-

chors and Tethers for CHildren (LATCH)

Restraint System” for the location of ap-

proved tether anchorages in your vehicle.

SAFETY

118

1. Look behind the seating position where

you plan to install the child restraint to

find the tether anchorage. You may need

to move the seat forward to provide better

access to the tether anchorage. If there is

no top tether anchorage for that seating

position, move the child restraint to an-

other position in the vehicle if one is

available.

2. Route the tether strap to provide the most

direct path for the strap between the an-

chor and the child seat. If your vehicle is

equipped with adjustable rear head re-

straints, raise the head restraint, and

where possible, route the tether strap un-

der the head restraint and between the

two posts. If not possible, lower the head

restraint and pass the tether strap around

the outboard side of the head restraint.

3. Attach the tether strap hook of the child

restraint to the top tether anchorage as

shown in the diagram.

4. Remove slack in the tether strap accord-

ing to the child restraint manufacturer’s

instructions.

WARNING!

• An incorrectly anchored tether strap

could lead to increased head motion and

possible injury to the child. Use only the

anchorage position directly behind the

child seat to secure a child restraint top

tether strap.

• If your vehicle is equipped with a split

rear seat, make sure the tether strap

does not slip into the opening between

the seatbacks as you remove slack in the

strap.

Transporting Pets

Air Bags deploying in the front seat could

harm your pet. An unrestrained pet will be

thrown about and possibly injured, or injure a

passenger during panic braking or in a colli-

sion.

Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in

pet harnesses or pet carriers that are secured

by seat belts.

SAFETY TIPS

Transporting Passengers

NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE

CARGO AREA.

WARNING!

• Do not leave children or animals inside

parked vehicles in hot weather. Interior

heat build-up may cause serious injury

or death.

• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a

cargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.

Rear Seat Tether Anchors

119

WARNING!

In a collision, people riding in these

areas are more likely to be seriously

injured or killed.

• Do not allow people to ride in any area of

your vehicle that is not equipped with

seats and seat belts.

• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a

seat and using a seat belt properly.

Exhaust Gas

WARNING!

Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They con-

tain carbon monoxide (CO), which is col-

orless and odorless. Breathing it can make

you unconscious and can eventually poi-

son you. To avoid breathing (CO), follow

these safety tips:

• Do not run the engine in a closed garage

or in confined areas any longer than

needed to move your vehicle in or out of

the area.

WARNING!

• If you are required to drive with the

trunk/liftgate/rear doors open, make

sure that all windows are closed and the

climate control BLOWER switch is set at

high speed. DO NOT use the recircula-

tion mode.

• If it is necessary to sit in a parked

vehicle with the engine running, adjust

your heating or cooling controls to force

outside air into the vehicle. Set the

blower at high speed.

The best protection against carbon monoxide

entry into the vehicle body is a properly

maintained engine exhaust system.

Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of

the exhaust system, when exhaust fumes can

be detected inside the vehicle, or when the

underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,

have a competent mechanic inspect the com-

plete exhaust system and adjacent body ar-

eas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or

mispositioned parts. Open seams or loose

connections could permit exhaust fumes to

seep into the passenger compartment. In

addition, inspect the exhaust system each

time the vehicle is raised for lubrication or oil

change. Replace as required.

Safety Checks You Should Make Inside

The Vehicle

Seat Belts

Inspect the seat belt system periodically,

checking for cuts, frays, and loose parts.

Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-

ately. Do not disassemble or modify the sys-

tem.

Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced

after a collision. Rear seat belt assemblies

must be replaced after a collision if they have

been damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-

bing, etc.). If there is any question regarding

seat belt or retractor condition, replace the

seat belt.

Air Bag Warning Light

The Air Bag warning light will turn on for

four to eight seconds as a bulb check when

the ignition switch is first turned to ON/RUN.

If the light is either not on during starting,

SAFETY

120

stays on, or turns on while driving, have the

system inspected at your authorized dealer as

soon as possible. After the bulb check, this

light will illuminate with a single chime when

a fault with the Air Bag System has been

detected. It will stay on until the fault is

removed. If the light comes on intermittently

or remains on while driving, have your autho-

rized dealer service the vehicle immediately.

Refer to “Occupant Restraint Systems” in

“Safety” for further information.

Defroster

Check operation by selecting the defrost

mode and place the blower control on high

speed. You should be able to feel the air

directed against the windshield. See your

authorized dealer for service if your defroster

is inoperable.

Floor Mat Safety Information

Always use floor mats designed to fit your

vehicle. Only use a floor mat that does not

interfere with the operation of the accelera-

tor, brake or clutch pedals. Only use a floor

mat that is securely attached using the floor

mat fasteners so it cannot slip out of position

and interfere with the accelerator, brake or

clutch pedals or impair safe operation of your

vehicle in other ways.

WARNING!

An improperly attached, damaged, folded,

or stacked floor mat, or damaged floor mat

fasteners may cause your floor mat to in-

terfere with the accelerator, brake, or

clutch pedals and cause a loss of vehicle

control. To prevent SERIOUS INJURY or

DEATH:

• ALWAYS securely attach

your floor

mat using the floor mat fasteners. DO

NOT install your floor mat upside down

or turn your floor mat over. Lightly pull to

confirm mat is secured using the floor

mat fasteners on a regular basis.

• ALWAYS REMOVE THE EXISTING

FLOOR MAT FROM THE VEHICLE

before installing any other floor mat.

NEVER install or stack an additional

floor mat on top of an existing floor mat.

• ONLY install floor mats designed to fit

your vehicle. NEVER install a floor mat

WARNING!

that cannot be properly attached and

secured to your vehicle. If a floor mat

needs to be replaced, only use a FCA

approved floor mat for the specific

make, model, and year of your vehicle.

• ONLY use the driver’s side floor mat on

the driver’s side floor area. To check for

interference, with the vehicle properly

parked with the engine off, fully depress

the accelerator, the brake, and the

clutch pedal (if present) to check for

interference. If your floor mat interferes

with the operation of any pedal, or is not

secure to the floor, remove the floor mat

from the vehicle and place the floor mat

in your trunk.

• ONLY use the passenger’s side floor mat

on the passenger’s side floor area.

• ALWAYS make sure objects cannot fall or

slide into the driver’s side floor area

when the vehicle is moving. Objects can

become trapped under accelerator,

brake, or clutch pedals and could cause

a loss of vehicle control.

121

WARNING!

• NEVER place any objects under the floor

mat (e.g., towels, keys, etc.). These ob-

jects could change the position of the

floor mat and may cause interference

with the accelerator, brake, or clutch

pedals.

• If the vehicle carpet has been removed

and re-installed, always properly attach

carpet to the floor and check the floor

mat fasteners are secure to the vehicle

carpet. Fully depress each pedal to

check for interference with the accelera-

tor, brake, or clutch pedals then re-

install the floor mats.

• It is recommended to only use mild soap

and water to clean your floor mats. After

cleaning, always check your floor mat

WARNING!

has been properly installed and is se-

cured to your vehicle using the floor mat

fasteners by lightly pulling mat.

Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make

Outside The Vehicle

Tires

Examine tires for excessive tread wear and

uneven wear patterns. Check for stones,

nails, glass, or other objects lodged in the

tread or sidewall. Inspect the tread for cuts

and cracks. Inspect sidewalls for cuts,

cracks, and bulges. Check the wheel nuts for

tightness. Check the tires (including spare)

for proper cold inflation pressure.

Lights

Have someone observe the operation of brake

lights and exterior lights while you work the

controls. Check turn signal and high beam

indicator lights on the instrument panel.

Door Latches

Check for proper closing, latching, and lock-

ing.

Fluid Leaks

Check area under the vehicle after overnight

parking for fuel, coolant, oil, or other fluid

leaks. Also, if gasoline fumes are detected or

if fuel, or brake fluid leaks are suspected. The

cause should be located and corrected imme-

diately.

SAFETY

122

STARTING AND OPERATING

STARTING THE ENGINE .......124

Stopping The Engine ............124

ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDA-

TIONS....................125

ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE (EPB) . .125

Auto Park Brake ...............127

SafeHold ...................127

Brake Service Mode.............127

MANUAL TRANSMISSION......128

Shifting ....................129

Downshifting .................130

NINE-SPEED AUTOMATIC TRANS-

MISSION...................131

Gear Selector.................132

Gear Ranges .................133

Transmission Limp Home Mode .....136

Ignition Park Interlock ...........137

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock

System ....................137

SPEEDCONTROL............137

Activation ...................138

Setting A Desired Speed ..........138

Varying The Speed .............138

Accelerating For Passing ..........139

Resume Speed................139

Deactivation .................139

REARPARKSENSE...........140

Rear ParkSense Sensors ..........140

Enabling And Disabling Rear

ParkSense ..................141

Service The Rear ParkSense System. . .141

ParkSense System Usage Precautions. .141

LANESENSE ...............142

LaneSense Operation ............142

Turning LaneSense On Or Off .......143

LaneSense Warning Message .......143

Changing LaneSense Status........145

REARBACKUPCAMERA......145

FOURWHEELDRIVE.........147

Four Wheel Drive (4x4)...........147

SELEC-TERRAIN ............148

Mode Selection Guide ...........149

ADDING FUEL ..............150

TRAILER TOWING ...........151

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer

Weight Ratings) ...............151

RECREATIONAL TOWING......152

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another

Vehicle ....................152

Recreational Towing.............152

STARTING AND OPERATING

123

STARTING THE ENGINE

Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat,

adjust the inside and outside mirrors, fasten

your seat belt, and if present, instruct all

other occupants to buckle their seat belts.

WARNING!

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,

or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

• Allowing children to be in a vehicle un-

attended is dangerous for a number of

reasons. A child or others could be seri-

ously or fatally injured. Children should

be warned not to touch the parking

brake, brake pedal or the gear selector.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the

vehicle (or in a location accessible to

children), and do not leave the ignition

in the ON or RUN mode. A child could

operate power windows, other controls,

or move the vehicle.

Start the engine with the gear selector in the

NEUTRAL or PARK position. Apply the brake

before shifting to any driving range.

Manual Transmission

Proceed as follows:

1. Set the Electric Park Brake (EPB) and put

the gear selector in the NEUTRAL

position.

2. Press the clutch pedal to the floor, without

pressing the accelerator.

3. Cycle the ignition to the START mode and

release it as soon as the engine is started.

4. If the engine does not start, place the

ignition in the OFF mode and wait 10-

15 seconds before attempting to restart

the engine.

Automatic Transmission

Proceed as follows:

1. Set the Electric Park Brake (EPB) and put

the gear selector in the PARK or NEU-

TRAL position.

2. Press on the brake pedal, without press-

ing the accelerator.

3. Cycle the ignition to the START mode and

release it as soon as the engine is started.

4. If the engine does not start, place the

ignition in the OFF mode and wait 10-

15 seconds before attempting to restart

the engine.

Stopping The Engine

To shut off the engine with vehicle speed

greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), you must push

and hold the ignition or push the START/

STOP button three times consecutively

within a few seconds. The engine will shut

down, and the ignition will be placed in the

RUN position.

Turning OFF the car (cycle the ignition from

the RUN mode to the OFF mode), the power

supply to the accessories are maintained for a

period of three minutes.

Opening the driver side door with the ignition

in RUN will sound a short chime that reminds

the driver to place the ignition to OFF.

When the ignition is in the OFF mode, the

window switches remains active for three

minutes. Opening a front door will cancel this

function.

STARTING AND OPERATING

124

After severe driving, idle the engine to allow

the temperature inside the engine compart-

ment to cool before shutting off the engine.

ENGINE BREAK-IN

RECOMMENDATIONS

A long break-in period is not required for the

engine and drivetrain (transmission and axle)

in your vehicle.

Drive moderately during the first 300 miles

(500 km). After the initial 60 miles

(100 km), speeds up to 50 or 55 mph (80 or

90 km/h) are desirable.

While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration

within the limits of local traffic laws contrib-

utes to a good break-in. Wide-open throttle

acceleration in low gear can be detrimental

and should be avoided.

The engine oil installed in the engine at the

factory is a high-quality energy conserving

type lubricant. Oil changes should be consis-

tent with anticipated climate conditions un-

der which vehicle operations will occur. For

the recommended viscosity and quality

grades, refer to “Dealer Service” in “Servic-

ing And Maintenance”.

CAUTION!

Never use Non-Detergent Oil or Straight

Mineral Oil in the engine or damage may

result.

NOTE:

A new engine may consume some oil during

its first few thousand miles (kilometers) of

operation. This should be considered a nor-

mal part of the break-in and not interpreted

as a problem.

ELECTRIC PARK BRAKE

(EPB)

Your vehicle is equipped with a new Electric

Park Brake System (EPB) that offers greater

convenience. The EPB switch is located in

the center console.

To apply the park brake manually, pull up on

the switch momentarily. The BRAKE warning

lamp in the instrument cluster and an indi-

cator on the switch will illuminate.

To release the park brake manually, the igni-

tion switch must be in RUN. Then put your

foot on the brake pedal and push the park

brake switch down momentarily. Once the

park brake is fully disengaged, the BRAKE

warning lamp and the switch indicator will

extinguish.

Park Brake Switch

125

The park brake can also be automatically

released. With the engine running and the

transmission in gear, release the brake pedal

and depress the throttle pedal. For safety

reasons, your seat belt must also be fastened.

NOTE:

• You may hear a slight whirring sound from

the back of the vehicle while the parking

brake engages or disengages.

• If your foot is on the brake pedal while you

are engaging or disengaging the parking

brake, you may notice a small amount of

brake pedal movement.

• The new Auto Park Brake feature can be

used to apply the park brake automatically

every time you park the vehicle. Auto Park

Brake can be enabled and disabled in the

Settings menu in Uconnect or in “Safe

Hold” conditions.

• The parking brake can be engaged even

when the ignition is OFF, however, it can

only be disengaged when the ignition is in

the RUN mode.

• Safehold is a new feature that will auto-

matically apply the park brake under cer-

tain conditions. The EPB monitors the sta-

tus of the driver’s seat belt, driver’s door

and pedal positions to determine if the

driver may have exited while the vehicle is

still capable of moving and will then auto-

matically apply the park brake to prevent

the vehicle from rolling.

• The EPB fault lamp will illuminate if the

EPB switch is held for longer than 60 sec-

onds in either the released or applied posi-

tion. The light will extinguish upon releas-

ing the switch.

• Refer to “Electric Park Brake (EPB)” in

“Starting And Operating” located in the

vehicle’s Owner's Manual for further

details.

WARNING!

• When exiting the vehicle, always remove

the key fob from the vehicle and lock

your vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,

or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

Allowing children to be in a vehicle un-

WARNING!

attended is dangerous for a number of

reasons. A child or others could be seri-

ously or fatally injured. Children should

be warned not to touch the parking

brake, brake pedal or the transmission

gear selector.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the

vehicle (or in a location accessible to

children), and do not leave the ignition

in the ON or RUN mode. A child could

operate power windows, other controls,

or move the vehicle.

• Be sure the parking brake is fully disen-

gaged before driving; failure to do so can

lead to brake failure and a collision.

• Always fully apply the parking brake

when leaving your vehicle, or it may roll

and cause damage or injury. Also be

certain to leave the transmission in

PARK. Failure to do so may allow the

vehicle to roll and cause damage or

injury.

STARTING AND OPERATING

126

CAUTION!

If the Brake System Warning Light remains

on with the parking brake released, a brake

system malfunction is indicated. Have the

brake system serviced by an authorized

dealer immediately.

Auto Park Brake

The EPB can be programmed to be applied

automatically whenever the vehicle speed is

below 1.9 mph (3 km/h) and the automatic

transmission is placed in PARK, or with a

manual transmission, whenever the ignition

is in the OFF mode. Auto Park Brake is

enabled and disabled by customer selection

through the Customer Programmable Fea-

tures section of the Uconnect Settings.

Any single Auto Park Brake application can

be bypassed by pushing the EPB switch to

the release position while the transmission is

placed in PARK (automatic transmission)

and the ignition is in the RUN mode. In some

cases, with an automatic transmission, if at

the cycle of key from RUN to the OFF mode

the gear selector is not firmly locked in Park-

ing position, EPB applies automatically even

if Auto Park Brake has been previously dis-

abled.

SafeHold

SafeHold is a safety feature of the EPB sys-

tem that will engage the park brake automati-

cally if the vehicle is left unsecured while the

ignition is in the RUN mode.

For automatic transmissions, the EPB will

automatically engage if all of the following

conditions are met:

• Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h).

• There is no attempt to depress the brake

pedal or accelerator pedal.

• The seat belt is unbuckled.

• The driver door is open.

• The vehicle is not in the PARK position.

For manual transmissions, the EPB will auto-

matically engage if all of the following condi-

tions are met:

• Vehicle speed is below 1.9 mph (3 km/h).

• There is no attempt to depress the brake

pedal or accelerator pedal.

• The clutch pedal is not pressed.

• The seat belt is unbuckled.

• The driver door is open.

SafeHold can be temporarily bypassed by

pushing the EPB Switch while the driver door

is open and the brake pedal is pressed. Once

manually bypassed, SafeHold will be enabled

again once the vehicle reaches 12 mph

(20 km/h) or the ignition is cycled to the OFF

mode and back to RUN again.

Brake Service Mode

We recommend having your brakes serviced

by your authorized dealer. You should only

make repairs for which you have the knowl-

edge and the right equipment. You should

only enter Brake Service Mode during brake

service.

127

When servicing your rear brakes, it may be

necessary for you or your technician to push

the rear piston into the rear caliper bore. With

the electric park brake system, this can only

be done after retracting the EPB actuator.

The actuator retraction can be done easily by

entering the Brake Service Mode through the

Uconnect Settings in your vehicle. This menu

based system will guide you through the

steps necessary to retract the EPB actuator in

order to perform rear brake service.

Service Mode has requirements that must be

met in order to be activated:

• The vehicle must be at a standstill.

• The parking brake must be disabled.

• The transmission must be in park or neu-

tral.

• The EPB switch not activated.

• The vehicle in ignition RUN mode.

• The brake pedal not pressed.

While in service mode, the EPB fault lamp

will flash continuously while the ignition is in

the RUN mode.

NOTE:

A dedicated message will appear in the in-

strument cluster if Brake Service Mode can-

not be activated.

When brake service work is complete, the

following steps must be followed to reset the

parking brake system to normal operation:

• Ensure the vehicle is at a standstill.

• Press the brake pedal with moderate force.

• Apply the EPB Switch.

NOTE:

A dedicated message will appear in the in-

strument cluster if Brake Service Mode can-

not be deactivated.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or

around a motor vehicle. Do only that ser-

vice work for which you have the knowl-

edge and the right equipment. If you have

any doubt about your ability to perform a

service job, take your vehicle to a compe-

tent mechanic.

MANUAL TRANSMISSION

WARNING!

You or others could be injured if you leave

the vehicle unattended without having the

parking brake fully applied. The parking

brake should always be applied when the

driver is not in the vehicle, especially on

an incline.

CAUTION!

Never drive with your foot resting on the

clutch pedal, or attempt to hold the ve-

hicle on a hill with the clutch pedal par-

tially engaged, as this will cause abnormal

wear on the clutch.

NOTE:

During cold weather, you may experience

increased effort in shifting until the transmis-

sion fluid warms up. This is normal.

STARTING AND OPERATING

128

To shift the gears, press the clutch pedal to

the floor and put the gear selector to the

desired position (the diagram for the engage-

ment of the gears is displayed on the handle

of the lever).

To engage REVERSE gear from the NEUTRAL

position, lift the REVERSE ring, located be-

low the knob and simultaneously move the

lever to the left and then forward.

Shifting

Fully press the clutch pedal before shifting

gears. As you release the clutch pedal, lightly

press the accelerator pedal.

You should always use first gear when starting

from a standing position.

Recommended Vehicle Shift Speeds

To utilize your manual transmission effi-

ciently for fuel economy and performance, it

should be upshifted as listed in the recom-

mended shift speed chart. Shift at the vehicle

speeds listed for acceleration. When heavily

loaded or pulling a trailer, these recom-

mended up-shift speeds may not apply.

Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)

All Engines

Gear Selection 2 to 3 3 to 4 4 to 5 5 to 6

Accel. 24 (39) 34 (55) 47 (76) 56 (90)

Cruise 19 (31) 27 (43) 37 (60) 41 (66)

REVERSE Ring

129

NOTE:

A certain amount of noise from the transmis-

sion is normal. This noise can be most notice-

able when the vehicle is idling in NEUTRAL

with the clutch engaged (clutch pedal re-

leased), but it may also be heard when driv-

ing. The noise may also be more noticeable

when the transmission is warm. This noise is

normal and is not an indication of a problem

with your clutch or transmission.

Downshifting

Moving from a high gear down to a lower gear

is recommended to preserve brakes when

driving down steep hills. In addition, down-

shifting at the right time provides better ac-

celeration when you desire to resume speed.

Downshift progressively. Do not skip gears to

avoid overspeeding the engine and clutch.

WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine

braking on a slippery surface. The drive

wheels could lose their grip, and the ve-

hicle could skid.

CAUTION!

• Skipping gears and downshifting into

lower gears at higher vehicle speeds can

damage the engine and clutch systems,

Any attempt to shift into lower gear with

clutch pedal depressed may result dam-

age to the clutch system. Shifting into

lower gear and releasing the clutch may

result in engine damage.

• When descending a hill, be very careful

to downshift one gear at a time to pre-

vent overspeeding the engine which can

cause engine damage, and/or clutch

damage, even if the clutch pedal is

pressed. If transfer case is in low range

the vehicle speeds to cause engine and

clutch damage are significantly lower.

CAUTION!

• Failure to follow the maximum recom-

mended downshifting speeds may cause

the engine damage and/or damage the

clutch, even if the clutch pedal is

pressed.

• Descending a hill in low range with

clutch pedal depressed could result in

clutch damage.

Maximum Recommended Downshift Speeds

CAUTION!

Failure to follow the maximum recom-

mended downshifting speeds may cause

the engine to overspeed and/or damage

the clutch disc, even if the clutch pedal is

pressed.

STARTING AND OPERATING

130

Manual Transmission Shift Speeds in MPH (KM/H)

Gear Selection 6 to 5 5 to 4 4 to 3 3 to 2 2 to 1

Maximum Speed 80 (129) 70 (113) 50 (81) 30 (48) 15 (24)

CAUTION!

If you skip a gear while downshifting or

downshift at too high of a vehicle speed,

these conditions may cause the engine to

overspeed if too low of a gear is selected

and the clutch pedal is released. Damage

to the clutch and the transmission can

result from skipping a gear while down-

shifting or downshifting at too high of a

vehicle speed even if the clutch pedal is

held pressed (i.e., not released).

NINE-SPEED AUTOMATIC

TRANSMISSION

Your vehicle is equipped with a state of the

art, fuel efficient nine-speed transmission.

The transmission gear range (PRND) is dis-

played beside the gear selector and in the

instrument cluster display. To select a gear

range, push the lock button on the gear

selector and move the selector rearward or

forward. You must also press the brake pedal

to shift the transmission out of PARK, or to

shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE

when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low

speeds (refer to "Brake/Transmission Shift

Interlock System" in this section). Select the

DRIVE range for normal driving.

The electronically-controlled transmission

adapts its shift schedule based on driver

inputs, along with environmental and road

conditions. The transmission electronics are

self-calibrating; therefore, the first few shifts

on a new vehicle may be somewhat abrupt.

This is a normal condition, and precision

shifts will develop within a few hundred miles

(kilometers).

WARNING!

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or

NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher

than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly

pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle

could accelerate quickly forward or in

reverse. You could lose control of the

vehicle and hit someone or something.

Only shift into gear when the engine is

idling normally and your foot is firmly

pressing the brake pedal.

• Unintended movement of a vehicle

could injure those in or near the vehicle.

As with all vehicles, you should never

exit a vehicle while the engine is run-

ning. Before exiting a vehicle, always

apply the parking brake, shift the trans-

mission into PARK, and turn the ignition

OFF. When the ignition is in the OFF

mode, the transmission is locked in

131

WARNING!

PARK, securing the vehicle against un-

wanted movement.

• When leaving the vehicle, always make

sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,

remove the key fob from the vehicle, and

lock the vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,

or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

Allowing children to be in a vehicle un-

attended is dangerous for a number of

reasons. A child or others could be seri-

ously or fatally injured. Children should

be warned not to touch the parking

brake, brake pedal or the transmission

gear selector.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the

vehicle (or in a location accessible to

children), and do not leave the ignition

in the ON or RUN mode. A child could

operate power windows, other controls,

or move the vehicle.

CAUTION!

Damage to the transmission may occur if

the following precautions are not ob-

served:

• Shift into or out of PARK or REVERSE

only after the vehicle has come to a

complete stop.

• Do not shift between PARK, REVERSE,

NEUTRAL, or DRIVE when the engine is

above idle speed.

• Before shifting into any gear, make sure

your foot is firmly pressing the brake

pedal.

NOTE:

You must press and hold the brake pedal

while shifting out of PARK.

Gear Selector

The transmission gear selector has PARK,

REVERSE, NEUTRAL, DRIVE, and AutoStick

(+/-) shift positions. Manual shifts can be

made using the AutoStick shift control (refer

to “AutoStick” in this section for further

information). Toggling the gear selector for-

ward (-) or rearward (+) while in the AutoStick

position (beside the DRIVE position) will

manually select the transmission gear, and

will display the current gear in the instrument

cluster as 1, 2, 3, etc.

NOTE:

If the gear selector cannot be moved to the

PARK, REVERSE, or NEUTRAL position

(when pushed forward) it is probably in the

AutoStick (+/-) position (beside the DRIVE

position). In AutoStick mode, the transmis-

sion gear (1, 2, 3, etc.) is displayed in the

instrument cluster. Move the gear selector to

the right (into the DRIVE [D] position) for

access to PARK, REVERSE, and NEUTRAL.

STARTING AND OPERATING

132

The nine-speed transmission has been devel-

oped to meet the needs of FCA current and

future lineup of FWD/AWD vehicles. Software

and calibration is refined to optimize the

customer’s driving experience and fuel

economy. By design, some vehicle and drive-

line combinations utilize 9th gear only in very

specific driving situations and conditions.

Only shift from DRIVE to PARK or REVERSE

when the accelerator pedal is released and

the vehicle is stopped. Be sure to keep your

foot on the brake pedal when shifting be-

tween these gears.

DO NOT race the engine when shifting from

PARK or NEUTRAL into another gear range.

CAUTION!

After selecting any gear range, wait a mo-

ment to allow the selected gear to engage

before accelerating. This is especially im-

portant when the engine is cold.

Gear Ranges

PARK (P)

This range supplements the Electric Park

Brake (EPB) by locking the transmission. The

engine can be started in this range. Never

attempt to use PARK while the vehicle is in

motion. Apply the EPB when leaving the

vehicle in this range.

When parking on a level surface, you may

shift the transmission into PARK first, and

then apply the EPB.

When parking on a hill, apply the EPB before

shifting the transmission to PARK, otherwise

the load on the transmission locking mecha-

nism may make it difficult to move the gear

selector out of PARK. As an added precau-

tion, turn the front wheels toward the curb on

a downhill grade and away from the curb on

an uphill grade.

When exiting the vehicle, always:

• Apply the parking brake.

• Shift the transmission into PARK.

• Turn the ignition OFF.

• Remove the key fob from the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Never use the PARK position as a sub-

stitute for the park brake. Always apply

the park brake fully when exiting the

vehicle to guard against vehicle move-

ment and possible injury or damage.

• Your vehicle could move and injure you

and others if it is not in PARK. Check by

trying to move the transmission gear

selector out of PARK with the brake

Gear Selector Lock Button

133

WARNING!

pedal released. Make sure the transmis-

sion is in PARK before exiting the ve-

hicle.

• The transmission may not engage PARK

if the vehicle is moving. Always bring the

vehicle to a complete stop before shift-

ing to PARK, and verify that the trans-

mission gear position indicator solidly

indicates PARK (P) without blinking. En-

sure that the vehicle is completely

stopped, and the PARK position is prop-

erly indicated, before exiting the ve-

hicle.

• It is dangerous to shift out of PARK or

NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher

than idle speed. If your foot is not firmly

pressing the brake pedal, the vehicle

could accelerate quickly forward or in

reverse. You could lose control of the

vehicle and hit someone or something.

Only shift into gear when the engine is

idling normally (or stopped) and your

foot is firmly pressing the brake pedal.

• Unintended movement of a vehicle

could injure those in or near the vehicle.

WARNING!

As with all vehicles, you should never

exit a vehicle while the engine is running

or the propulsion system is active. Be-

fore exiting a vehicle, always come to a

complete stop, then apply the park

brake, shift the transmission into PARK,

and turn the ignition OFF. When the

ignition is in the OFF mode, the trans-

mission is locked in PARK, securing the

vehicle against unwanted movement.

• When leaving the vehicle, always make

sure the ignition is in the OFF mode,

remove the key fob from the vehicle, and

lock the vehicle.

• Never leave children alone in a vehicle,

or with access to an unlocked vehicle.

Allowing children to be in a vehicle un-

attended is dangerous for a number of

reasons. A child or others could be seri-

ously or fatally injured. Children should

be warned not to touch the park brake,

brake pedal or the transmission gear

selector.

• Do not leave the key fob in or near the

vehicle (or in a location accessible to

WARNING!

children), and do not leave the ignition

in the ACC or ON/RUN mode. A child

could operate power windows, other con-

trols, or move the vehicle.

CAUTION!

• Before moving the transmission gear se-

lector out of PARK, you must turn the

ignition to the ON/RUN mode, and also

press the brake pedal. Otherwise, dam-

age to the gear selector could result.

• DO NOT race the engine when shifting

from PARK or NEUTRAL into another

gear range, as this can damage the

drivetrain.

The following indicators should be used to

ensure that you have properly engaged the

transmission into the PARK position:

• When shifting into PARK, press the lock

button on the gear selector, and firmly

move the gear selector all the way forward

until it stops and is fully seated.

STARTING AND OPERATING

134

• Look at the transmission gear position dis-

play and verify that it indicates the PARK

position (P), and is not blinking.

• With the brake pedal released, verify that

the gear selector will not move out of PARK.

REVERSE (R)

This range is for moving the vehicle back-

ward. Shift into REVERSE only after the ve-

hicle has come to a complete stop.

NEUTRAL (N)

Use this range when the vehicle is standing

for prolonged periods with the engine run-

ning. The engine may be started in this range.

Apply the electric park brake and shift the

transmission into PARK if you must exit the

vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not coast in NEUTRAL and never turn

off the ignition to coast down a hill. These

are unsafe practices that limit your re-

sponse to changing traffic or road condi-

tions. You might lose control of the vehicle

and have a collision.

CAUTION!

Towing the vehicle, coasting, or driving for

any other reason with the transmission in

NEUTRAL can cause severe transmission

damage. Refer to “Recreational Towing” in

“Starting And Operating” and “Towing A

Disabled Vehicle” in “In Case Of Emer-

gency” for further information.

DRIVE (D)

This range should be used for most city and

highway driving. It provides the smoothest

upshifts and downshifts, and the best fuel

economy. The transmission automatically up-

shifts through all forward gears. The DRIVE

position provides optimum driving character-

istics under all normal operating conditions.

When frequent transmission shifting occurs

(such as when operating the vehicle under

heavy loading conditions, in hilly terrain,

traveling into strong head winds or while

towing a heavy trailer), use the AutoStick

shift control (refer to “AutoStick” in this

section for further information) to select a

lower gear. Under these conditions, using a

lower gear will improve performance and ex-

tend transmission life by reducing excessive

shifting and heat buildup.

If the transmission temperature exceeds nor-

mal operating limits, the transmission con-

troller may modify the transmission shift

schedule, reduce engine torque, and/or ex-

pand the range of torque converter clutch

engagement. This is done to prevent trans-

mission damage due to overheating.

If the transmission becomes extremely hot,

the “Transmission Temperature Warning

Light” may illuminate and the transmission

may operate differently until the transmis-

sion cools down.

During cold temperatures, transmission op-

eration may be modified depending on en-

gine and transmission temperature as well as

vehicle speed. This feature improves warm

up time of the engine and transmission to

achieve maximum efficiency. Engagement of

the torque converter clutch, and shifts into

8th or 9th gear, are inhibited until the trans-

mission fluid is warm. Normal operation will

resume once the transmission temperature

has risen to a suitable level.

135

AutoStick

AutoStick is a driver-interactive transmission

feature providing manual shift control, giving

you more control of the vehicle. AutoStick

allows you to maximize engine braking, elimi-

nate undesirable upshifts and downshifts,

and improve overall vehicle performance.

This system can also provide you with more

control during passing, city driving, cold slip-

pery conditions, mountain driving, trailer

towing and many other situations.

Operation

When the gear selector is in the AutoStick

position (beside the DRIVE position), it can

be moved forward and rearward. This allows

the driver to manually select the transmission

gear being used. Moving the gear selector

forward (-) triggers a downshift, and rearward

(+) an upshift. The current gear is displayed

in the instrument cluster.

NOTE:

In AutoStick mode, the transmission will only

shift up or down when the driver moves the

gear selector rearward (+) or forward (-), ex-

cept as described below.

• The transmission will automatically upshift

when necessary to prevent engine over-

speed.

• The transmission will automatically down-

shift as the vehicle slows (to prevent engine

lugging) and will display the current gear.

• The transmission will automatically down-

shift to first or second gear (depending on

model) when coming to a stop. After a stop,

the driver should manually upshift (+) the

transmission as the vehicle is accelerated.

• You can start out (from a stop) in first or

second gear. Starting out in second gear

can be helpful in snow or icy conditions.

Tap the gear selector forward or rearward to

select the desired gear after the vehicle is

brought to a stop.

• If a requested downshift would cause the

engine to overspeed, that shift will not

occur.

• The system will ignore attempts to upshift

at too low of a vehicle speed.

• Avoid using speed control when AutoStick

is engaged because the transmission will

not shift automatically.

• Transmission shifting will be more notice-

able when AutoStick is enabled.

• The system may revert to automatic shift

mode if a fault or overheat condition is

detected.

To disengage AutoStick mode, return the gear

selector to the DRIVE position. You can shift

in or out of the AutoStick position at any time

without taking your foot off the accelerator

pedal.

WARNING!

Do not downshift for additional engine

braking on a slippery surface. The drive

wheels could lose their grip and the ve-

hicle could skid, causing a collision or

personal injury.

Transmission Limp Home Mode

Transmission function is electronically moni-

tored for abnormal conditions. If a condition

is detected that could result in transmission

damage, Transmission Limp Home Mode is

activated. In this mode, the transmission

remains in fourth gear regardless of which

STARTING AND OPERATING

136

forward gear is selected. PARK, REVERSE,

and NEUTRAL will continue to operate. The

Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) may be

illuminated. Limp Home Mode allows the

vehicle to be driven to an authorized dealer

for service without damaging the transmis-

sion.

In the event of a momentary problem, the

transmission can be reset to regain all for-

ward gears by performing the following steps:

1. Stop the vehicle.

2. Shift the transmission into PARK, if pos-

sible. If not, shift the transmission to

NEUTRAL.

3. Push and hold the ignition switch until the

engine turns OFF.

4. Wait approximately 30 seconds.

5. Restart the engine.

6. Shift into the desired gear range. If the

problem is no longer detected, the trans-

mission will return to normal operation.

NOTE:

Even if the transmission can be reset, we

recommend that you visit your authorized

dealer at your earliest possible convenience.

Your authorized dealer has diagnostic equip-

ment to determine if the problem could recur.

If the transmission cannot be reset, autho-

rized dealer service is required.

Ignition Park Interlock

Vehicles Equipped With Keyless Enter-N-Go:

This vehicle is equipped with an Ignition Park

Interlock, which requires the transmission to

be in PARK before the ignition can be turned

to the OFF mode. Also, the transmission is

locked in PARK whenever the ignition is in

the OFF mode.

Brake/Transmission Shift Interlock

System

This vehicle is equipped with a Brake Trans-

mission Shift Interlock system (BTSI) that

holds the transmission gear selector in PARK

unless the brakes are applied. To shift the

transmission out of PARK, the ignition must

be in the RUN mode (engine running or not)

and the brake pedal must be pressed.

The brake pedal must also be pressed before

pushing the button on the gear selector to

shift from NEUTRAL into DRIVE or REVERSE

when the vehicle is stopped or moving at low

speeds.

SPEED CONTROL

When engaged, the Speed Control takes over

accelerator operations at speeds greater than

25 mph (40 km/h).

137

The Speed Control buttons are located on the

right side of the steering wheel.

NOTE:

• In order to ensure proper operation, the

Speed Control System has been designed

to shut down if multiple Speed Control

functions are operated at the same time. If

this occurs, the Speed Control System can

be reactivated by pushing the Speed Con-

trol on/off button and resetting the desired

vehicle set speed.

• The Speed Control function will not work in

4WD Low Range.

Activation

Push the on/off button to activate the Speed

Control. The Cruise Indicator Light in the

instrument cluster display will illuminate. To

turn the system off, push the on/off button a

second time. The Cruise Indicator Light will

turn off. The system should be turned off

when not in use.

WARNING!

Leaving the Speed Control system on when

not in use is dangerous. You could acci-

dentally set the system or cause it to go

WARNING!

faster than you want. You could lose con-

trol and have an accident. Always leave the

system off when you are not using it.

Setting A Desired Speed

Turn the Speed Control on.

NOTE:

The vehicle should be traveling at a steady

speed and on level ground before pushing the

SET (+) or SET (-) button.

When the vehicle has reached the desired

speed, push the SET (+) or SET (-) button and

release. Release the accelerator and the ve-

hicle will operate at the selected speed.

Varying The Speed

To Increase Speed

When the Speed Control is set, you can in-

crease speed by pushing the SET (+) button.

Speed Control Buttons

1 — SET (+)/

Accel

2 — RES/

Resume

3 — On/Off

4 — SET (-)/

Decel

5 — CANC/

Cancel

STARTING AND OPERATING

138

The driver’s preferred units can be selected

through the Uconnect system if equipped.

The speed increment shown is dependant on

the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric

(km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result

in a 1 mph increase in set speed. Each

subsequent tap of the button results in an

increase of 1 mph.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set

speed will continue to increase until the

button is released, then the new set speed

will be established.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pushing the SET (+) button once will result

in a 1 km/h increase in set speed. Each

subsequent tap of the button results in an

increase of 1 km/h.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set

speed will continue to increase until the

button is released, then the new set speed

will be established.

To Decrease Speed

When the Speed Control is set, you can de-

crease speed by pushing the SET (-) button.

The driver’s preferred units can be selected

through the Uconnect system if equipped.

The speed increment shown is dependant on

the chosen speed unit of U.S. (mph) or Metric

(km/h):

U.S. Speed (mph)

• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result

in a 1 mph decrease in set speed. Each

subsequent tap of the button results in a

decrease of 1 mph.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set

speed will continue to decrease until the

button is released, then the new set speed

will be established.

Metric Speed (km/h)

• Pushing the SET (-) button once will result

in a 1 km/h decrease in set speed. Each

subsequent tap of the button results in a

decrease of 1 km/h.

• If the button is continually pushed, the set

speed will continue to decrease until the

button is released, then the new set speed

will be established.

Accelerating For Passing

Press the accelerator as you would normally.

When the pedal is released, the vehicle will

return to the set speed.

Resume Speed

To resume a previously set speed, push the

RES button and release. Resume can be used

at any speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).

Deactivation

A soft tap on the brake pedal, pushing the

CANC button, or normal brake pressure while

slowing the vehicle will deactivate the Speed

Control without erasing the set speed from

memory.

Pushing the on/off button or placing the igni-

tion to OFF erases the set speed from

memory.

139

REAR PARKSENSE

The Rear ParkSense system provides visual

and audible indications of the distance be-

tween the rear fascia and a detected obstacle

when backing up, e.g. during a parking ma-

neuver.

Rear ParkSense will retain the last system

state (enabled or disabled) from the last

ignition cycle when the ignition is changed to

the RUN position.

Rear ParkSense can be active only when the

gear selector is in REVERSE.

Rear ParkSense Sensors

The four Rear ParkSense sensors, located in

the rear fascia/bumper, monitor the area be-

hind the vehicle that is within the sensors’

field of view. The sensors can detect ob-

stacles from approximately 12 inches

(30 cm) up to 59 inches (150 cm) from the

rear fascia/bumper in the horizontal direc-

tion, depending on the location, type and

orientation of the obstacle.

Chime

By shifting the vehicle in REVERSE and in

the case of the presence of a rear obstacle, an

acoustic signal that varies with the distance

of the obstacle from the bumper is activated.

The frequency of the acoustic signal:

• Increases with the distance between ve-

hicle and object decreases.

• Becomes continuous when the distance

that separates the vehicle from the obstacle

is less than approximately 12 inches

(30 cm), while terminates immediately if

the distance to the obstacle increases.

• Remains constant if the distance between

vehicle and obstacle remains unchanged. If

this situation occurs for the side sensors,

the signal is stopped after approximately

three seconds to avoid, for example, it ac-

tivates in case of maneuver along a wall.

When the system emits a beeping sound, the

volume of the Uconnect system, if turned on,

is automatically lowered by Rear ParkSense.

Detection Distances

If the sensors detect more obstacles, it is

taken into account only what is the shorter

distance.

Instrument Cluster Display

Rear ParkSense is displayed on the instru-

ment cluster only if you have selected "Sound

and Display" within the "Safety And Driving

Assistance" menu of the Uconnect system.

If an obstacle is detected in the center rear

region, the display will show a single solid arc

in the center rear region and will produce a

one-half second tone. As the vehicle moves

closer to the obstacle, the display will show

the single arc moving closer to the vehicle

and the sound tone will change from slow, to

fast, to continuous.

If an obstacle is detected in the left and/or

right rear region, the display will show a

single flashing arc in the left and/or right rear

region and will produce a fast sound tone. As

the vehicle moves closer to the obstacle, the

display will show the single arc moving closer

to the vehicle and the tone will change from

fast to continuous.

STARTING AND OPERATING

140

In general, the vehicle is closest to the ob-

stacle when the display shows only a flashing

arc and the chime becomes continuous.

The color on the display depends on the

distance and location of the obstacle.

Enabling And Disabling Rear ParkSense

ParkSense can be enabled and disabled with

the ParkSense switch.

When the Rear ParkSense switch

is pushed to disable the system,

the instrument cluster display will

show a message such as

“PARKSENSE DISABLED” for approximately

five seconds. Refer to “Instrument Cluster

Display” in “Getting To Know Your Instru-

ment Panel” in your Owner’s Manual for fur-

ther information.

The Rear ParkSense switch LED will be on

when Rear ParkSense is disabled or requires

service. The Rear ParkSense switch LED will

be off when the system is enabled. If the Rear

ParkSense switch is pushed, and requires

service, the Rear ParkSense switch LED will

blink momentarily, and then the LED will be

on.

Rear ParkSense will remember the previous

state when the vehicle is switch off.

CAUTION!

After turning OFF the ignition, the Rear

ParkSense remains in this setting until the

next ignition cycle, even in the case of

changing the setting of starting RUN to

OFF and then again in RUN.

Service The Rear ParkSense System

During vehicle start up, when the Rear

ParkSense System has detected a faulted

condition, the instrument cluster display will

actuate a single chime, once per ignition

cycle, and it will show a message such as

“PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR

SENSORS” or the “PARKSENSE UNAVAIL-

ABLE SERVICE REQUIRED”. Refer to “In-

strument Cluster Display” in your Owner’s

Manual for further information. When the

gear selector is moved to REVERSE and the

system has detected a faulted condition, the

instrument cluster display will show a mes-

sage such as "PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE

WIPE REAR SENSORS" or "PARKSENSE

UNAVAILABLE SERVICE REQUIRED" mes-

sage for for approximately five seconds. Un-

der this condition, Rear ParkSense will not

operate.

If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE WIPE REAR

SENSORS” appears in the instrument cluster

display, make sure the outer surface and the

underside of the rear fascia/bumper is clean

and clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other

obstructions and then cycle the ignition. if

the message continues to appear, see an

authorized dealer.

If “PARKSENSE UNAVAILABLE SERVICE

REQUIRED” appears in the instrument clus-

ter display, see an authorized dealer.

ParkSense System Usage Precautions

NOTE:

• Ensure that the outer surface and the un-

derside of the rear bumper is clean and

clear of snow, ice, mud, dirt or other ob-

struction to keep the Rear ParkSense sys-

tem operating properly.

• Jackhammers, large trucks, and other vi-

brations could affect the performance of

Rear ParkSense.

141

• Clean the Rear ParkSense sensors regu-

larly, taking care not to scratch or damage

them. The sensors must not be covered

with ice, snow, slush, mud, dirt or debris.

Failure to do so can result in the system not

working properly. The Rear ParkSense sys-

tem might not detect an obstacle behind

the fascia/bumper, or it could provide a

false indication that an obstacle is behind

the fascia/bumper.

• Objects such as bicycle carriers, etc., must

not be placed within 12 inches (30 cm)

from the rear fascia/bumper while driving

the vehicle. Failure to do so can result in

the system misinterpreting a close object

as a sensor problem, causing a failure indi-

cation to be displayed in the instrument

cluster.

WARNING!

• Drivers must be careful when backing up

even when using ParkSense. Always

check carefully behind your vehicle,

look behind you, and be sure to check

for pedestrians, animals, other vehicles,

obstructions, and blind spots before

WARNING!

backing up. You are responsible for

safety and must continue to pay atten-

tion to your surroundings. Failure to do

so can result in serious injury or death.

• Before using ParkSense, it is strongly

recommended that the ball mount and

hitch ball assembly is disconnected

from the vehicle when the vehicle is not

used for towing. Failure to do so can

result in injury or damage to vehicles or

obstacles because the hitch ball will be

much closer to the obstacle than the

rear fascia when the loudspeaker sounds

the continuous tone. Also, the sensors

could detect the ball mount and hitch

ball assembly, depending on its size and

shape, giving a false indication that an

obstacle is behind the vehicle.

CAUTION!

• ParkSense is only a parking aid and it is

unable to recognize every obstacle, in-

cluding small obstacles. Parking curbs

might be temporarily detected or not

CAUTION!

detected at all. Obstacles located above

or below the sensors will not be detected

when they are in close proximity.

• The vehicle must be driven slowly when

using ParkSense in order to be able to

stop in time when an obstacle is de-

tected. It is recommended that the

driver looks over his/her shoulder when

using ParkSense.

If it’s necessary to keep the trailer hitch and

hitch ball assembly mounted for a long pe-

riod, it is possible to filter out the trailer hitch

and hitch ball assembly presence in sensor

field of view. The filtering operation must be

performed only by an authorized dealer.

LANESENSE

LaneSense Operation

The LaneSense system is operational at

speeds above 37 mph (60 km/h) and below

112 mph (180 km/h). The LaneSense system

STARTING AND OPERATING

142

uses a forward looking camera to detect lane

markings and measure vehicle position

within the lane boundaries.

When both lane markings are detected and

the driver unintentionally drifts out of the

lane (no turn signal applied), the LaneSense

system provides a haptic warning in the form

of torque applied to the steering wheel to

prompt the driver to remain within the lane

boundaries. If the driver continues to unin-

tentionally drift out of the lane, the Lane-

Sense system provides a visual warning

through the instrument cluster display to

prompt the driver to remain within the lane

boundaries.

The driver may manually override the haptic

warning by applying torque into the steering

wheel at any time.

When only a single lane marking is detected

and the driver unintentionally drifts across

the lane marking (no turn signal applied), the

LaneSense system provides a visual warning

through the instrument cluster display to

prompt the driver to remain within the lane.

When only a single lane marking is detected,

a haptic (torque) warning will not be pro-

vided.

NOTE:

When operating conditions have been met,

the LaneSense system will monitor if the

driver’s hands are on the steering wheel and

provides an audible warning to the driver

when the driver’s hands are not detected on

the steering wheel. The system will cancel if

the driver does not return their hands to the

wheel.

Turning LaneSense On Or Off

The default status of LaneSense is off.

The LaneSense button is located on the cen-

ter stack.

To turn the LaneSense

system on, push the

LaneSense button

(LED turns off). A

“Lane Sense On” mes-

sage is shown in the

instrument cluster dis-

play.

To turn the LaneSense system off, push the

LaneSense button once (LED turns on).

NOTE:

The LaneSense system will retain the last

system state on or off from the last ignition

cycle when the ignition is changed to the

RUN position.

LaneSense Warning Message

The LaneSense system will indicate the cur-

rent lane drift condition through the instru-

ment cluster display.

Base Instrument Cluster Display — If Equipped

When the LaneSense system is on, the lane

lines are gray when both of the lane bound-

aries have not been detected and the Lane-

Sense telltale is solid white.

Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected

• When the LaneSense system is on, the

LaneSense telltale is solid white when only

the left lane marking has been detected

and the system is ready to provide visual

warnings in the instrument cluster display

if an unintentional lane departure occurs.

143

• When the LaneSense system senses the

lane has been approached and is in a lane

departure situation, the left thick lane line

flashes from white to gray, the left thin line

remains solid white and the LaneSense

telltale changes from solid white to flashing

yellow.

NOTE:

The LaneSense system operates with the

similar behavior for a right lane departure

when only the right lane marking has been

detected.

Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected

• When the LaneSense system is on, the lane

lines turn from gray to white to indicate that

both of the lane markings have been de-

tected. The LaneSense telltale is solid

green when both lane markings have been

detected and the system is “armed” to

provide visual warnings in the instrument

cluster display and a torque warning in the

steering wheel if an unintentional lane de-

parture occurs.

• When the LaneSense system senses a lane

drift situation, the left thick lane line and

the left thin line turn solid white. The

LaneSense telltale changes from solid

green to solid yellow. At this time torque is

applied to the steering wheel in the oppo-

site direction of the lane boundary.

For example: If approaching the left side of

the lane, the steering wheel will turn to the

right.

• When the LaneSense system senses the

lane has been approached and is in a lane

departure situation, the left thick lane line

flashes from white to gray, the left thin line

remains solid white and the LaneSense

telltale changes from solid yellow to flash-

ing yellow. At this time, torque is applied to

the steering wheel in the opposite direction

of the lane boundary.

For example: If approaching the left side of

the lane, the steering wheel will turn to the

right.

NOTE:

The LaneSense system operates with the

similar behavior for a right lane departure.

Premium Instrument Cluster Display — If

Equipped

When the LaneSense system is on, the lane

lines are gray when both of the lane bound-

aries have not been detected and the Lane-

Sense telltale is solid white.

Left Lane Departure — Only Left Lane Detected

• When the LaneSense system is on, the

LaneSense telltale is solid white when only

the left lane marking has been detected

and the system is ready to provide visual

warnings in the instrument cluster display

if an unintentional lane departure occurs.

• When the LaneSense system senses the

lane has been approached and is in a lane

departure situation, the left thick lane line

flashes yellow (on/off), the left thin line

remains solid yellow and the LaneSense

telltale changes from solid white to flashing

yellow.

NOTE:

The LaneSense system operates with the

similar behavior for a right lane departure

when only the right lane marking has been

detected.

STARTING AND OPERATING

144

Left Lane Departure — Both Lanes Detected

• When the LaneSense system is on, the lane

lines turn from gray to white to indicate that

both of the lane markings have been de-

tected. The LaneSense telltale is solid

green when both lane markings have been

detected and the system is “armed” to

provide visual warnings in the instrument

cluster display and a torque warning in the

steering wheel if an unintentional lane de-

parture occurs.

• When the LaneSense system senses a lane

drift situation, the left thick lane line and

left thin line turn solid yellow. The Lane-

Sense telltale changes from solid green to

solid yellow. At this time torque is applied

to the steering wheel in the opposite direc-

tion of the lane boundary.

For example: If approaching the left side of

the lane the steering wheel will turn to the

right.

• When the LaneSense system senses the

lane has been approached and is in a lane

departure situation, the left thick lane line

flashes yellow (on/off) and the left thin line

remains solid yellow. The LaneSense tell-

tale changes from solid yellow to flashing

yellow. At this time torque is applied to the

steering wheel in the opposite direction of

the lane boundary.

For example: If approaching the left side of

the lane the steering wheel will turn to the

right.

NOTE:

The LaneSense system operates with the

similar behavior for a right lane departure.

Changing LaneSense Status

The LaneSense system has settings to adjust

the intensity of the torque warning and the

warning zone sensitivity (early/late) that you

can configure through the Uconnect system

screen.

NOTE:

• When enabled the system operates above

37 mph (60 km/h) and below 112 mph

(180 km/h).

• Use of the turn signal suppresses the warn-

ings.

• The system will not apply torque to the

steering wheel whenever a safety system

engages. (anti-lock brakes, traction control

system, electronic stability control, forward

collision warning, etc.).

REAR BACK UP CAMERA

The Rear Back Up Camera allows you to see

an on-screen image of your vehicle's rear

surroundings when the gear selector is put

into REVERSE. The image will be displayed

on the touchscreen display along with a note

to “Check Entire Surroundings” across the

top of the screen. After five seconds, this note

will disappear. The camera is located above

the rear license plate.

145

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE

(with camera delay turned off), the rear cam-

era mode is exited and the navigation or

audio screen appears again.

When the vehicle is shifted out of REVERSE

(with camera delay turned on), the camera

image will continue to be displayed for up to

10 seconds after shifting out of REVERSE

unless the vehicle speed exceeds 8 mph

(13 km/h), the vehicle is shifted into PARK or

the ignition is switched to the OFF position.

A touchscreen button to disable the camera

is available when the vehicle is not in RE-

VERSE or if touchscreen button “X” at the

top of the camera screen is pressed. Display

of the camera image after shifting out of

REVERSE can be disabled via Uconnect Set-

tings.

When enabled, active guide lines are overlaid

on the image to illustrate the width of the

vehicle and its projected backup path based

on the steering wheel position.

Different colored zones indicate the distance

to the rear of the vehicle.

The following table shows the approximate

distances for each zone:

Zone Distance To The Rear Of The Vehicle

Red 0-1ft(0-30cm)

Yellow 1 ft - 3 ft (30 cm - 1 m)

Green 3 ft or greater (1 m or greater)

NOTE:

If snow, ice, mud, or any foreign substance

builds up on the camera lens, clean the lens,

rinse with water, and dry with a soft cloth. Do

not cover the lens.

WARNING!

Drivers must be careful when backing up

even when using the Rear Back Up Cam-

era. Always check carefully behind your

WARNING!

vehicle, and be sure to check for pedestri-

ans, animals, other vehicles, obstructions,

or blind spots before backing up. You are

Parking Camera

STARTING AND OPERATING

146

WARNING!

responsible for the safety of your surround-

ings and must continue to pay attention

while backing up. Failure to do so can

result in serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

• To avoid vehicle damage, Rear Back Up

Camera should only be used as a parking

aid. The Rear Back Up Camera is unable

to view every obstacle or object in your

drive path.

• To avoid vehicle damage, the vehicle

must be driven slowly when using the

Rear Back Up Camera to be able to stop

in time when an obstacle is seen. It is

recommended that the driver look fre-

quently over his/her shoulder when us-

ing the Rear Back Up Camera.

FOUR WHEEL DRIVE

Jeep Active Drive (4WD) And Jeep Active Drive

Low (4WD Low)

Your vehicle may be equipped with a Power

Transfer Unit (PTU). This system is automatic

with no driver inputs or additional driving

skills required. Under normal driving condi-

tions, the front wheels provide most of the

traction. If the front wheels begin to lose

traction, power is shifted automatically to the

rear wheels. The greater the front wheel trac-

tion loss, the greater the power transfer to the

rear wheels.

Additionally, on dry pavement under heavy

throttle input (where one may have no wheel

spin), torque will be sent to the rear in a

preemptive effort to improve vehicle launch

and performance characteristics.

CAUTION!

All wheels must have the same size and

type tires. Unequal tire sizes must not be

used. Unequal tire size may cause failure

of the power transfer unit.

Four Wheel Drive (4x4)

The four wheel drive (4WD) is fully automatic

in normal driving mode.

NOTE:

It is not possible to carry out the change of

mode when the vehicle exceeds the speed of

75 mph (120 km/h).

Enabling Four Wheel Drive (4x4)

The buttons for the activation of four wheel

drive are located on the device Selec-Terrain

and allow you to select the following:

• 4WD LOCK

• 4WD LOW — (Trailhawk models only)

147

Active Drive Control — If Equipped

The Power Transfer Unit (PTU) is locked to

ensure immediate availability of torque to the

rear drive axles. This feature is selectable in

AUTO mode and automatic in the other driv-

ing mode. 4WD LOCK can be enabled by the

following ways:

• When the 4WD LOCK button is pushed.

• When the Selec-Terrain switch is rotated

from AUTO to any other off-road modes.

Active Drive With Low Control — (Trailhawk

Models Only)

The 4WD LOW mode helps to improve the

off-road performance in all modes. To enable

4WD Low, please follow the steps below:

Enabling 4WD LOW

With the vehicle stationary, the ignition in

RUN mode or with the engine running, shift

the transmission into NEUTRAL and push

the button once 4WD LOW. The instrument

cluster will display the message "4WD LOW"

once the shift is complete.

NOTE:

• Both LOCK and LOW LEDs will blink and

then become active on the Selec-Terrain

switch until the shift is complete.

• The instrument cluster display will illumi-

nate the "4WD Low" icon.

Disabling 4WD LOW

To disable the 4WD LOW mode, the vehicle

must be stationary and the transmission

shifted into NEUTRAL. Push the 4WD LOW

button once.

SELEC-TERRAIN

Selec-Terrain combines the capabilities of

the vehicle control systems, along with driver

input, to provide the best performance for all

terrains.

Selec-Terrain Switch

Selec-Terrain Switch (Trailhawk)

STARTING AND OPERATING

148

Mode Selection Guide

Rotate the Selec-Terrain knob to select the

desired mode.

• AUTO: This four-wheel drive operation is a

continuous operation, is fully automatic

and can be used on and off road. This mode

balances traction to ensure maneuverabil-

ity and acceleration improvement com-

pared to a vehicle with two wheel drive. This

mode also reduces fuel consumption, since

it allows the disconnect of the drive shaft

where conditions permit.

• SNOW: This mode allows you to have greater

stability under conditions of bad weather.

It's used on and off road and on surfaces

with poor traction, such as roads covered

with snow. When in SNOW mode (depend-

ing on certain operating conditions), the

transmission will use second gear (rather

than first gear) during launches, to mini-

mize wheel slippage, except for in 4–Low

(Trailhawk models only).

• SAND: For off-road driving or use on sur-

faces with poor traction, such as sandy

bottoms. The transmission is set to provide

maximum traction. This mode allows more

wheel spin and higher shift points to help

motor through loose areas.

• MUD: For off-road driving or use on surfaces

with poor traction, such as roads covered by

mud or wet grass.

Selec-Terrain Switch

Selec-Terrain Switch (Trailhawk)

149

• ROCK (Trailhawk only): This mode is only

available in 4WD LOW range. The device

sets the vehicle to maximize traction and

allow the highest steering capacity for off-

road surfaces. This mode gives you the

maximum performance off-road. Use for

low speed obstacles such as large rocks,

deep ruts, etc.

NOTE:

• Rock mode is only available on the vehicles

equipped with the Trailhawk package.

• Activate the Hill Descent Control or Selec

Speed Control for steep downhill control.

Refer to “Electronic Brake Control System”

in “Safety” located in the Owner’s Manual

for further information.

ADDING FUEL

The Capless Fuel System uses a flapper

placed at the filler pipe of the fuel tank; it

opens and closes automatically upon

insertion/extraction of the fuel nozzle.

The Capless Fuel System is designed so that

it prevents the filling of an incorrect type of

fuel.

Opening The Door

For filling proceed as follows:

• Open the door, by pushing and releasing on

the indentation point indicated by the ar-

row.

• Insert the fuel nozzle in the filler pipe and

proceed with filling the fuel tank.

• Before removing the nozzle, wait at least

10 seconds to allow the fuel to flow inside

of the tank.

• Pull the nozzle from the filler pipe and then

close the door.

Emergency Refueling Procedure

If the vehicle is out of fuel proceed as follows:

• Open the liftgate and remove the emer-

gency fuel fill funnel located in the cargo

area.

• Open the fuel door.

• Insert the emergency fuel fill funnel in the

filler pipe and proceed to fill the fuel tank.

Fuel Filler Door

Fueling With Emergency Fuel Fill Funnel

STARTING AND OPERATING

150

• Remove the emergency fuel fill funnel, and

close the door.

• Store the emergency fuel fill funnel in the

cargo area.

WARNING!

• Do not to affix objects/plugs to the end of

the filler neck other than is provided on

the car.

• The use of objects/plugs do not comply

with the vehicle and may cause pressure

WARNING!

increases inside the tank, creating dan-

gerous conditions.

• Do not approach the neck of the tank

with open flames or lit cigarettes its an

extreme fire hazard. Also, avoid close

contact with the filler pipe with your

face, do not inhale harmful vapors.

• Do not use your mobile phone in the

vicinity of the pump fuel nozzle, it can

be a possible risk of fire.

TRAILER TOWING

Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer

Weight Ratings)

The following chart provides the maximum

trailer weight ratings towable for your given

drivetrain.

1.4L Turbo Engine

Trailer towing is not recommended.

Engine Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.) Max. Tongue Wt. (See Note)

2.4L 2,000 lbs (900 kg) 200 lbs (90 kg)

Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.

NOTE: The trailer tongue weight must be considered as part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and should never exceed the weight refer-

enced on the Tire and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire Safety Information” in “Servicing And Maintenance” for further information.

151

RECREATIONAL TOWING

Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle

TOWING CONDITION WHEELS OFF THE GROUND FRONT WHEEL DRIVE (FWD) FOUR-WHEEL DRIVE (4WD)

Flat Tow NONE NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED

Dolly Tow

REAR NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED

FRONT OK NOT ALLOWED

On Trailer ALL BEST METHOD OK

NOTE:

• When towing your vehicle, always follow

applicable state and provincial laws. Con-

tact state and provincial Highway Safety

offices for additional details.

• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake

feature is disabled before towing this ve-

hicle, to avoid inadvertent Electric Park

Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake

feature is enabled or disabled via the cus-

tomer programmable features in the

Uconnect Settings.

Recreational Towing

Models With Front-Wheel Drive (FWD)

Recreational towing is allowed ONLY if the

front wheels are OFF the ground. This may be

accomplished using a tow dolly (front wheels

off the ground) or vehicle trailer (all four

wheels off the ground). If using a tow dolly,

follow this procedure:

• Properly secure the dolly to the tow vehicle,

following the dolly manufacturer's instruc-

tions.

• Drive the front wheels onto the tow dolly.

• Apply the Electric Park Brake (EPB). Place

the transmission in PARK. Turn the engine

OFF.

• Properly secure the front wheels to the

dolly, following the dolly manufacturer's

instructions.

• Turn the ignition to the RUN mode, but do

not start the engine.

• Press and hold the brake pedal.

STARTING AND OPERATING

152

• Release the Electric Park Brake (EPB).

• Turn the ignition OFF, and release the brake

pedal.

CAUTION!

• DO NOT flat tow this vehicle. Damage to

the drivetrain will result. If this vehicle

requires towing, make sure the drive

wheels are OFF the ground.

• Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is

released, and remains released, while

being towed.

CAUTION!

• Towing this vehicle in violation of the

above requirements can cause severe

transmission damage. Damage from im-

proper towing is not covered under the

New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Models With Four-Wheel Drive (4WD)

Recreational towing (with all four wheels on

the ground, or using a towing dolly) is NOT

ALLOWED. This vehicle may be towed on a

flatbed or vehicle trailer provided all four

wheels are OFF the ground.

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle with ANY of its wheels

on the ground can cause severe transmis-

sion and/or power transfer unit damage.

Damage from improper towing is not cov-

ered under the New Vehicle Limited War-

ranty.

153

154

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

HAZARD WARNING FLASHERS

. . .156

BULB REPLACEMENT.........156

Replacement Bulbs .............156

FUSES....................157

Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution

Unit ......................158

Body Computer Fuse Center........161

Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution

Unit ......................162

JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING

. .163

Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage . . . .164

Preparations For Jacking .........165

Jacking Instructions ............165

Road Tire Installation ............168

TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF

EQUIPPED.................169

Tire Service Kit Storage ..........169

Tire Service Kit Components And

Operation ...................169

Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions. . . .170

Replacing The Sealant ...........171

JUMPSTARTING.............171

Preparations For Jump Start........172

Jump Starting Procedure..........173

REFUELING IN EMERGENCY. . . .174

IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS . .174

GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE . . .174

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE. . . .175

TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE

. .176

Front Wheel Drive (FWD)..........177

Four Wheel Drive (4WD) ..........177

Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped. .178

ENHANCED ACCIDENT RESPONSE

SYSTEM(EARS).............178

EVENT DATA RECORDER (EDR)

. .178

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

155

HAZARD WARNING

FLASHERS

The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located

on the switch bank below the radio.

Push the switch to turn on the Hazard

Warning Flasher. When the switch is

activated, all directional turn signals

will flash on and off to warn oncoming traffic

of an emergency. Push the switch a second

time to turn off the Hazard Warning flashers.

This is an emergency warning system and it

should not be used when the vehicle is in

motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled

and it is creating a safety hazard for other

motorists.

When you must leave the vehicle to seek

assistance, the Hazard Warning flashers will

continue to operate even though the ignition

is placed in OFF mode.

NOTE:

With extended use the Hazard Warning flash-

ers may wear down your battery.

BULB REPLACEMENT

Replacement Bulbs

Interior Bulbs

Lamps Bulb Number

Front Courtesy Light C5W

Front Courtesy Lights (Sun Visors) C5W

Rear Dome Light (Models Without Retractable roof) C5W

Rear Interior Lights (Models With Retractable roof) C5W

Interior Lights W5W

Dome Light (Glove Compartment) W5W

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

156

Exterior Bulbs

Lamps Bulb Number

Bi-Xenon HID Headlamps (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)

Low Beam/High Beam Headlamps H13

Front Position/Daytime Running Lights (DRL ) P21/5W

Front Direction Indicator Lamps PY21W

Front Fog Lamps H11

Side Indicators (Front And Side View Mirror) WY5W

Tail/Brake Lights/Turn Indicators P21W

Center High Mounted Stop Lamp (CHMSL) LED (Serviced At An Authorized Dealer)

Reverse W16W

License Plate Lamp W5W

FUSES

WARNING!

• When replacing a blown fuse, always use

an appropriate replacement fuse with

the same amp rating as the original fuse.

Never replace a fuse with another fuse of

higher amp rating. Never replace a

blown fuse with metal wires or any other

material. Failure to use proper fuses may

WARNING!

result in serious personal injury, fire

and/or property damage.

• Before replacing a fuse, make sure that

the ignition is off and that all the other

services are switched off and/or disen-

gaged.

• If the replaced fuse blows again, contact

an authorized dealer.

WARNING!

• If a general protection fuse for safety

systems (air bag system, braking sys-

tem), power unit systems (engine sys-

tem, gearbox system) or steering system

blows, contact an authorized dealer.

157

Engine Compartment Fuses/Distribution

Unit

The engine compartment fuse panel is lo-

cated on the left side of the engine compart-

ment.

Refer to your Owner's Manual for further fuse

information

Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

F01 70 Amp Tan – – Module Body Computer

F02 70 Amp Tan – – Module Body Computer,

Rear Distribution Units

F03 – 20 Amp Blue – Controller Power Supply

Body Computer

F04 – 30 Amp Pink – Brake Control Electronics

Module

F05 70 Amp Tan – – Electric Power-Assisted

Steering

Engine Compartment Fuse Location

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

158

Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

F06 20 Amp Yellow – – Engine Cooling fan

F07 40 Amp Orange – 1.4 With-

out A/C

50 Amp Red – 1.4 With

A/C And All 2.4 Models

– – Engine Cooling fan

F08 – 30 Amp Pink – Automatic Transmission,

GSM

F09 – – 5 Amp Tan Control Module Engine

F10 – – 15 Amp Blue Horn

F11 – – 10 Amp Red – 1.4 Engines

25 Amp Clear – 2.4 En-

gines

Supply Secondary Loads

F14 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Heater "Blow By"

F14 – – 5 Amp Tan Pump Power "After Run"

F15 40 Amp Orange – – Brake Control Module

Pump

F16 – – 5 Amp Tan Engine Control Module

Power, Automatic Transmis-

sion

F17 – – 10 Amp Red – 1.4 Engines

15 Amp Blue – 2.4 En-

gines

Supply Primary Loads

F18 – – 20 Amp Yellow 12V Rear Cargo Outlet Igni-

tion Powered

F19 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Air Conditioner Compressor

159

Cavity Maxi Fuse Cartridge Fuse Micro Fuse Description

F20 – – 5 Amp Tan Electronic Power Four-

Wheel Drive

F21 – – 15 Amp Blue Fuel Pump

F22 – – 20 Amp Yellow Power Control Module En-

gine

F23 – – 30 Amp Green Heated Windshield – If

Equipped

F24 – – 15 Amp Blue Electronic Unit Supply Au-

tomatic Transmission

F30 – – 20 Amp Yellow (Customer

Installed)

12V Rear Cargo Outlet Con-

stant Battery Powered

F83 – 40 Amp Green – Air Conditioning Fan

F84 – – 30 Amp Green Power Supply All Wheel

Drive

F87 – – 5 Amp Tan Gear Selector Automatic

Transmission

F88 – – 7.5 Amp Brown Heated Outside Mirrors

F89 – – 30 Amp Green Heated Rear Window

F90 – – 5 Amp Tan IBS Sensor (Battery State

Of Charge)

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

160

Body Computer Fuse Center

The controller is located at the left side of the

steering column at the bottom of the instru-

ment panel.

For the fuse replacement see an authorized

dealer.

Cavity Mini Fuse Description

F31 7.5 Amp Brown Flashes/Electrical Movement Front Seats/Fan

Air Conditioning

F33 20 Amp Yellow Power Window Front (Driver Side)

F34 20 Amp Yellow Power Window Front (Passenger Side)

F36 15 Amp Blue Supply Uconnect System, Air Conditioning,

Alarm, Power Folding Outside Mirrors, USB

Port

F37 10 Amp Red System Power Forward Collision Warning Plus,

All Wheel Drive (AWD), IPC

F38 20 Amp Yellow Central Locking

F42 7.5 Amp Brown Power Under Lock and Key

F43 20 Amp Yellow Bi-directional Pump Washer

F47 20 Amp Yellow Power Rear Window (Driver Side)

F48 20 Amp Yellow Power Rear Window (Passenger Side)

F49 7.5 Amp Brown Supply ParkSense, Spot Lights Front Dome,

Mirror, Electric Motor Retractable Roof, Heated

Front Seats, Stabilizer Battery, ESC System,

ESL

F50 7.5 Amp Brown Supply Air Bag

161

Cavity Mini Fuse Description

F51 7.5 Amp Brown Alarm Power, Front Courtesy Light, Air Condi-

tioning Compressor, Brake Pedal Switch (NC),

Plaque Automatic Transmission, Compass,

Rear Camera, Leveling Headlights, Air Condi-

tioning

F53 7.5 Amp Brown Supply IPC/Starter Device/System Keyless

Enter-N-Go

F94 15 Amp Blue Power Socket

Rear Cargo Fuse/Relay Distribution Unit

To access the fuses, remove the access door

from the left rear panel of the rear cargo area.

The fuses may be contained in two units. fuse

holder No. 1 is located closest to the rear of

the vehicle and fuse holder No. 2 (if

equipped with trailer towing) is located clos-

est to the front of the vehicle.

Fuse Holder No. 1

Cavity Mini Fuse Description

F1 30 Amp Blue Power Inverter

F2 20 Amp Yellow HIFI Audio System

F3 20 Amp Yellow MY SKY

F4 7.5 Amp Brown Lumbar Adjustment Front Seat (Driver Side)

F5 30 Amp Green Power Seat (Driver Side)

F6 7.5 Amp Brown Power Seat (Driver Side And Passenger Side)

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

162

Cavity Mini Fuse Description

F7 30 Amp Green Lumbar Adjustment Front Seats (Driver Side

And Passenger Side)

F8 20 Amp Yellow Heating Front Seats

On the controller there is also a 20 amp fuse

for the sun visor of the retractable roof.

Fuse Holder No. 2

Cavity Mini Fuse Description

F1 10 Amp Red Controller Exterior Lighting On Trailer

F5 15 Amp Blue Controller Exterior Lighting Lights (Drivers

Side)

F6 15 Amp Blue Controller Exterior Lighting Lights (Passenger

Side)

JACKING AND TIRE

CHANGING

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to change a tire on the

side of the vehicle close to moving traf-

fic. Pull far enough off the road to avoid

the danger of being hit when operating

the jack or changing the wheel.

WARNING!

• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dan-

gerous. The vehicle could slip off the

jack and fall on you. You could be

crushed. Never put any part of your body

under a vehicle that is on a jack. If you

need to get under a raised vehicle, take

it to a service center where it can be

raised on a lift.

WARNING!

• Never start or run the engine while the

vehicle is on a jack.

• The jack is designed to be used as a tool

for changing tires only. The jack should

not be used to lift the vehicle for service

purposes. The vehicle should be jacked

on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or

slippery areas.

163

Jack Location/Spare Tire Stowage

The jack and tools are located in the rear

storage compartment if equipped, inside a

special container.

1. Open the liftgate.

2. Lift the access cover using the load floor

pull strap.

3. Remove the fastener securing the spare

tire.

4. Remove the chocks.

5. Remove the jack and wheel bolt wrench.

6. Remove the spare tire.

WARNING!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a

collision or hard stop could endanger the

occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the

jack parts and the spare tire in the places

provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire re-

paired or replaced immediately.

Jack And Tools Location

Jack And Tools

1 — Wheel Bolt Wrench

2 — Jack

3 — Emergency Funnel

4 — Wheel Chocks

5 — Screwdriver

6 — Emergency Allen Key

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

164

Preparations For Jacking

1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface as

far from the edge of the roadway as pos-

sible. Avoid icy or slippery areas.

WARNING!

Do not attempt to change a tire on the side

of the vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull

far enough off the road to avoid being hit

when operating the jack or changing the

wheel.

2. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

3. Apply the Electric Park Brake.

4. Place the gear selector into PARK (auto-

matic transmission) or REVERSE (manual

transmission).

5. Turn the ignition off to the OFF position.

6. Chock both the front and rear of the wheel

diagonally opposite of the jacking posi-

tion. For example, if changing the right

front tire, chock the left rear wheel.

NOTE:

Passengers should not remain in the vehicle

when the vehicle is being jacked.

Jacking Instructions

WARNING!

Carefully follow these tire changing warn-

ings to help prevent personal injury or

damage to your vehicle:

• Always park on a firm, level surface as

far from the edge of the roadway as

possible before raising the vehicle.

• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.

• Chock the wheel diagonally opposite the

wheel to be raised.

• Apply the parking brake and place an

automatic transmission in PARK.

• Never start or run the engine with the

vehicle on a jack.

• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when

it is on a jack.

• Do not get under the vehicle when it is

on a jack. If you need to get under a

raised vehicle, take it to a service center

where it can be raised on a lift.

• Only use the jack in the positions indi-

cated and for lifting this vehicle during a

tire change.

165

WARNING!

• If working on or near a roadway, be

extremely careful of motor traffic.

• To assure that spare tires, flat or in-

flated, are securely stowed, spares must

be stowed with the valve stem facing the

ground.

CAUTION!

Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by

jacking on locations other than those indi-

cated in the Jacking Instructions for this

vehicle.

1. Remove the spare tire, jack, and wheel

bolt wrench.

2. If equipped with wheels where the center

cap covers the wheel bolts, use the wheel

bolt wrench to pry the center cap off

carefully before raising the vehicle.

3. Before raising the vehicle, use the wheel

bolt wrench to loosen, but not remove, the

wheel bolts on the wheel with the flat tire.

Turn the wheel bolts counterclockwise

one turn while the wheel is still on the

ground.

4. Place the jack underneath the jacking

location that is closest to the flat tire.

Jacking location is indicated by a

stamped arrow on the body. Turn the jack

screw clockwise to firmly engage the jack

saddle with the lift area of the sill flange,

centering the jack saddle inside the cut-

out in the sill cladding.

Jacking Locations

Jack Warning Label

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

166

5. Raise the vehicle just enough to remove

the flat tire.

WARNING!

Raising the vehicle higher than necessary

can make the vehicle less stable. It could

slip off the jack and hurt someone near it.

Raise the vehicle only enough to remove

the tire.

6. Remove the wheel bolts and tire.

7. Mount the spare tire.

CAUTION!

Be sure to mount the spare tire with the

valve stem facing outward. The vehicle

could be damaged if the spare tire is

mounted incorrectly.

NOTE:

• Your vehicle may be equipped with a

compact spare tire or a limited — use

spare tire. Refer to “Tires — General

Information” in “Servicing And Mainte-

nance” in your Owner’s Manual for fur-

ther information.

• For vehicles so equipped, do not at-

tempt to install a center cap or wheel

cover on the compact spare.

8. Install the wheel bolts with the threaded

end of the wheel bolt toward the wheel.

Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.

Front Jacking Location

Rear Jacking Location

Mounting Spare Tire

167

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off

the jack, do not fully tighten the wheel

bolts until the vehicle has been lowered.

Failure to follow this warning may result in

serious injury.

9. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning

the jack handle counterclockwise.

10. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push

down on the wrench while at the end of

the handle for increased leverage.

Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern

until each wheel bolt has been tightened

twice. Refer to “Torque Specifications”

in “Technical Specifications” for the

proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt about

the correct tightness, have them

checked with a torque wrench by an

authorized dealer or at a service station.

11. Securely stow the jack, tools, chocks,

and flat tire.

WARNING!

A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a

collision or hard stop could endanger the

occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the

jack parts and the spare tire in the places

provided. Have the deflated (flat) tire re-

paired or replaced immediately.

Road Tire Installation

1. Mount the road tire on the axle.

2. Install the remaining wheel bolts with the

threaded end of the wheel bolt toward the

wheel. Lightly tighten the wheel bolts.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off

the jack, do not fully tighten the wheel

bolts until the vehicle has been lowered.

Failure to follow this warning may result in

serious injury.

3. Lower the vehicle to the ground by turning

the jack handle counterclockwise.

4. Finish tightening the wheel bolts. Push

down on the wrench while at the end of

the handle for increased leverage. Tighten

the wheel bolts in a star pattern until each

wheel bolt has been tightened twice. Re-

fer to “Torque Specifications” in the

“Technical Specifications” section for the

proper lug bolt torque. If in doubt about

the correct tightness, have them checked

with a torque wrench by an authorized

dealer or service station.

5. Lower the jack until it is free. Remove the

wheel chocks. Stow the jack and tools

back in the proper storage location. Re-

lease the Electric Park Brake before driv-

ing the vehicle.

6. After 25 miles (40 km) check the wheel

bolt torque with a torque wrench to ensure

that all wheel bolts are properly seated

against the wheel.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

168

TIRE SERVICE KIT — IF

EQUIPPED

Tire Service Kit Storage

The Tire Service Kit is located in the rear

storage compartment inside a storage con-

tainer. Located inside the container are a

screwdriver and the emergency fuel funnel.

To access the Tire Service Kit open the lift-

gate and remove the load floor.

Tire Service Kit Components And

Operation

If a tire is punctured, you can make a first

emergency repair using the Tire Service Kit

located in the rear storage compartment in-

side the storage container.

Tire punctures of up to 1/4 inch (6 mm) can

be repaired; the kit can be used in all weather

conditions. Do not remove the foreign object

from the punctured tire, i.e., screw or nail.

1. Remove the Tire Service Kit from the ve-

hicle, take it out from the bag and place it

near the punctured tire. Screw the clear

flexible filling tube to the tire valve.

2. Insert the power plug into the vehicle

power outlet socket. Start the vehicle

engine.

3. Push the Tire Service Kit power button to

the “I” position. The electric compressor

will be turned on, sealant and air will

inflate the tire.

Tire Service Kit Components

1 — Power Plug (located on bottom

side of Tire Service Kit)

2 — Sealant Hose (Clear)

3 — Power Button

4 — Pressure Gauge

5 — Warning Label

169

Minimum 26 psi (1.8 bar) of pressure

should be reached within 20 minutes. If

the pressure has not been reached turn

off and remove the Tire Service Kit, drive

the vehicle 30 feet (10 meters) back and

forth, to better distribute the sealant in-

side the tire.

4. Attach the clear flexible filling tube of the

compressor directly to the tire valve and

repeat the inflation process.

When the correct pressure has been

reached, start driving the vehicle to uni-

formly distribute the sealant inside the

tire. After 10 minutes, stop and check

the tire pressure. If the pressure is below

19 psi (1.3 bar), do not drive the vehicle,

as the tire is too damaged, and contact

the nearest authorized dealer.

WARNING!

Tire Service Kit is not a permanent flat tire

repair. Have the tire inspected and re-

paired or replaced after using Tire Service

Kit. Do not exceed 65 mph (110 km/h)

until the tire is repaired or replaced. Fail-

WARNING!

ure to follow this warning can result in

injuries that are serious or fatal to you,

your passengers, and others around you.

Have the tire checked as soon as possible

at an authorized dealer.

If the pressure is at 19 psi (1.3 bar) or

above repeat the inflation process to

reach the correct tire pressure and con-

tinue driving.

5. Peel off the warning label from the bottle

and place it on the dashboard as a re-

minder to the driver that the tire has been

treated with Tire Service Kit.

WARNING!

The metal end fitting from Power Plug may

get hot after use, so it should be handled

carefully.

Tire Service Kit Usage Precautions

WARNING!

• Do not attempt to seal a tire on the side

of the vehicle closest to traffic. Pull far

enough off the road to avoid the danger

of being hit when using the Tire Service

Kit.

• Do not use Tire Service Kit or drive the

vehicle under the following circum-

stances:

– If the puncture in the tire tread is

approximately 1/4 inch (6 mm) or

larger.

– If the tire has any sidewall damage.

– If the tire has any damage from

driving with extremely low tire pres-

sure.

– If the tire has any damage from

driving on a flat tire.

– If the wheel has any damage.

– If you are unsure of the condition of

the tire or the wheel.

• Keep Tire Service Kit away from open

flames or heat source.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

170

WARNING!

• A loose Tire Service Kit thrown forward

in a collision or hard stop could endan-

ger the occupants of the vehicle. Always

stow the Tire Service Kit in the place

provided. Failure to follow these warn-

ings can result in injuries that are seri-

ous or fatal to you, your passengers, and

others around you.

• Take care not to allow the contents of

Tire Service Kit to come in contact with

hair, eyes, or clothing. Tire Service Kit

sealant is harmful if inhaled, swallowed,

or absorbed through the skin. It causes

skin, eye, and respiratory irritation.

Flush immediately with plenty of water if

there is any contact with eyes or skin.

Change clothing as soon as possible, if

there is any contact with clothing.

• Tire Service Kit Sealant solution con-

tains latex. In case of an allergic reac-

tion or rash, consult a physician imme-

diately. Keep Tire Service Kit out of

reach of children. If swallowed, rinse

mouth immediately with plenty of water

and drink plenty of water. Do not induce

WARNING!

vomiting! Consult a physician immedi-

ately.

Replacing The Sealant

NOTE:

Replace the sealant canister prior to the ex-

piration date at an authorized dealer.

WARNING!

Store the sealant canister in its special

compartment, away from sources of heat.

Failure to follow this WARNING may result

in sealant canister rupture and serious

injury or death.

JUMP STARTING

If your vehicle has a discharged battery it can

be jump-started using a set of jumper cables

and a battery in another vehicle or by using a

portable battery booster pack. Jump starting

can be dangerous if done improperly so

please follow the procedures in this section

carefully.

NOTE:

When using a portable battery booster pack

follow the manufacturer’s operating instruc-

tions and precautions.

Tire Service Kit Expiration Date Location

171

WARNING!

Do not attempt jump starting if the battery

is frozen. It could rupture or explode and

cause personal injury.

CAUTION!

Do not use a portable battery booster pack

or any other booster source with a system

voltage greater than 12 Volts or damage to

the battery, starter motor, alternator or

electrical system may occur.

Preparations For Jump Start

The battery in your vehicle is located in the

front of the engine compartment, behind the

left headlight assembly.

NOTE:

The positive battery post is covered with a

protective cap. Lift up on the cap to gain

access to the positive battery post.

WARNING!

• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling

fan whenever the hood is raised. It can

start anytime the ignition switch is ON.

WARNING!

You can be injured by moving fan

blades.

• Remove any metal jewelry such as rings,

watch bands and bracelets that could

make an inadvertent electrical contact.

You could be seriously injured.

• Batteries contain sulfuric acid that can

burn your skin or eyes and generate

hydrogen gas which is flammable and

explosive. Keep open flames or sparks

away from the battery.

Proceed as follows:

1. Apply the Electric Park Brake, shift the

automatic transmission into PARK

(manual transmission in NEUTRAL) and

place the ignition OFF.

2. Turn off the heater, radio, and all unnec-

essary electrical accessories.

3. If using another vehicle to jump start the

battery, park the vehicle within the

jumper cables reach, set the parking

brake and make sure the ignition is OFF.

Positive Battery Post

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

172

WARNING!

Do not allow vehicles to touch each other

as this could establish a ground connec-

tion and personal injury could result.

Jump Starting Procedure

WARNING!

Failure to follow this jump starting proce-

dure could result in personal injury or

property damage due to battery explosion.

CAUTION!

Failure to follow these procedures could

result in damage to the charging system of

the booster vehicle or the discharged ve-

hicle.

Connecting The Jumper Cables

1. Connect the positive (+) end of the jumper

cable to the positive (+) post of the dis-

charged vehicle.

2. Connect the opposite end of the positive

(+) jumper cable to the positive (+) post of

the booster battery.

3. Connect the negative (-) end of the jumper

cable to the negative (-) post of the

booster battery.

4. Connect the opposite end of the negative

(-) jumper cable to a good engine ground

(exposed metal part of the discharged

vehicle’s engine) away from the battery

and the fuel injection system.

WARNING!

Do not connect the jumper cable to the

negative (-) post of the discharged battery.

The resulting electrical spark could cause

the battery to explode and could result in

personal injury. Only use the specific

ground point, do not use any other exposed

metal parts.

5. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the

booster battery, let the engine idle a few

minutes, and then start the engine in the

vehicle with the discharged battery.

6. Once the engine is started, remove the

jumper cables in the reverse sequence:

Disconnecting The Jumper Cables

1. Disconnect the negative (-) end of the

jumper cable from the engine ground of

the vehicle with the discharged battery.

2. Disconnect the opposite end of the nega-

tive (-) jumper cable from the negative (-)

post of the booster battery.

3. Disconnect the positive (+) end of the

jumper cable from the positive (+) post of

the booster battery.

4. Disconnect the opposite end of the posi-

tive (+) jumper cable from the positive (+)

post of the vehicle with the discharged

battery.

If frequent jump starting is required to start

your vehicle you should have the battery and

charging system inspected at an authorized

dealer.

173

CAUTION!

Accessories plugged into the vehicle

power outlets draw power from the vehi-

cle’s battery, even when not in use (i.e.,

cellular devices, etc.). Eventually, if

plugged in long enough without engine

operation, the vehicle’s battery will dis-

charge sufficiently to degrade battery life

and/or prevent the engine from starting.

REFUELING IN EMERGENCY

The fuel filling procedure in case of emer-

gency is described in the “Emergency Refu-

eling Procedure”. Refer to “Adding Fuel” in

“Starting And Operating” for further informa-

tion.

IF YOUR ENGINE

OVERHEATS

In any of the following situations, you can

reduce the potential for overheating your en-

gine by taking the appropriate action.

• On the highways — slow down.

• In city traffic — while stopped, put trans-

mission in NEUTRAL, but do not increase

engine idle speed.

CAUTION!

Driving with a hot cooling system could

damage your vehicle. If the temperature

gauge reads “H,” pull over and stop the

vehicle. Idle the vehicle with the air con-

ditioner turned off until the pointer drops

back into the normal range. If the pointer

remains on the “H” and you hear continu-

ous chimes, turn the engine off immedi-

ately and call for service.

NOTE:

There are steps that you can take to slow

down an impending overheat condition:

• If your air conditioner (A/C) is on, turn it off.

The A/C system adds heat to the engine

cooling system and turning the A/C off can

help remove this heat.

• You can also turn the temperature control

to maximum heat, the mode control to floor

and the blower control to high. This allows

the heater core to act as a supplement to

the radiator and aids in removing heat from

the engine cooling system.

WARNING!

You or others can be badly burned by hot

engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam from

your radiator. If you see or hear steam

coming from under the hood, do not open

the hood until the radiator has had time to

cool. Never try to open a cooling system

pressure cap when the radiator or coolant

bottle is hot.

GEAR SELECTOR OVERRIDE

If a malfunction occurs and the gear selector

cannot be moved out of the PARK position,

you can use the following procedure to tem-

porarily move the gear selector:

1. Turn the engine OFF.

2. Apply the Electric Park Brake.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

174

3. Carefully separate the gear selector boot

assembly from the bezel.

4. Press and maintain firm pressure on the

brake pedal.

5. Insert a small screwdriver or similar tool

down into the gear selector override ac-

cess hole (at the right front corner of the

gear selector assembly), and push and

hold the override release lever down.

6. Move the gear selector to the NEUTRAL

position.

7. The vehicle may then be started in

NEUTRAL.

8. Reinstall the gear selector boot on the

bezel.

FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE

If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or

snow, it can often be moved using a rocking

motion. Turn the steering wheel right and left

to clear the area around the front wheels. For

vehicles with automatic transmission, push

and hold the lock button on the gear selector.

Then shift back and forth between DRIVE and

REVERSE (with automatic transmission) or

SECOND GEAR and REVERSE (with manual

transmission), while gently pressing the ac-

celerator.

Use the least amount of accelerator pedal

pressure that will maintain the rocking mo-

tion without spinning the wheels or racing the

engine.

For Vehicles With Automatic Transmission:

Shifts between DRIVE and REVERSE can

only be achieved at wheel speeds of 5 mph

(8 km/h) or less. Whenever the transmission

remains in NEUTRAL for more than two sec-

onds, you must press the brake pedal to

engage DRIVE or REVERSE.

NOTE:

Push the "ESC Off" switch (if necessary), to

place the Electronic Stability Control (ESC)

system in "Partial Off" mode, before rocking

the vehicle. Refer to “Electronic Brake Con-

trol” in “Safety” in your Owner’s Manual for

further information. Once the vehicle has

been freed, push the "ESC Off" switch again

to restore "ESC On" mode.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.

Forces generated by excessive wheel

speeds may cause damage, or even failure,

of the axle and tires. A tire could explode

and injure someone. Do not spin your ve-

hicle's wheels faster than 30 mph

(48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds

continuously without stopping when you

are stuck and do not let anyone near a

spinning wheel, no matter what the speed.

Gear Selector Bezel Location

175

CAUTION!

• Racing the engine or spinning the

wheels may lead to transmission over-

heating and failure. Allow the engine to

idle with the transmission in NEUTRAL

for at least one minute after every five

rocking-motion cycles. This will mini-

mize overheating and reduce the risk of

clutch or transmission failure during

prolonged efforts to free a stuck vehicle.

CAUTION!

• When “rocking” a stuck vehicle by shift-

ing between DRIVE/SECOND gear and

REVERSE, do not spin the wheels faster

than 15 mph (24 km/h), or drivetrain

damage may result.

• Revving the engine or spinning the

wheels too fast may lead to transmission

overheating and failure. It can also dam-

age the tires. Do not spin the wheels

CAUTION!

above 30 mph (48 km/h) while in gear

(no transmission shifting occurring).

TOWING A DISABLED

VEHICLE

This section describes procedures for towing

a disabled vehicle using a commercial towing

service.

Towing Condition

Wheels OFF The

Ground

FWD MODELS FOUR WHEEL DRIVE

Flat Tow NONE

NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED

Wheel Lift Or Dolly Tow

Rear

NOT ALLOWED NOT ALLOWED

Front OK

NOT ALLOWED

Flatbed

ALL BEST METHOD OK

Proper towing or lifting equipment is required

to prevent damage to your vehicle. Use only

tow bars and other equipment designed for

this purpose, following equipment manufac-

turer’s instructions. Use of safety chains is

mandatory. Attach a tow bar or other towing

device to main structural members of the

vehicle, not to bumpers or associated brack-

ets. State and local laws regarding vehicles

under tow must be observed.

NOTE:

• Vehicles with a discharged battery or total

electrical failure when the Electric Park

Brake (EPB) is engaged, will need a wheel

dolly or jack to raise the rear wheels off the

ground when moving the vehicle onto a

flatbed.

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

176

• You must ensure that the Auto Park Brake

feature is disabled before towing this ve-

hicle, to avoid inadvertent Electric Park

Brake engagement. The Auto Park Brake

feature is enabled or disabled via the cus-

tomer programmable features in the

Uconnect Settings.

If you must use the accessories (wipers, de-

frosters, etc.) while being towed, the ignition

must be in the RUN mode. If the key fob is

unavailable, or the vehicle’s battery is dis-

charged, refer to “Gear Selector Override” in

this section for instructions on shifting the

transmission out of PARK so that the vehicle

can be moved.

CAUTION!

• Do not use sling type equipment when

towing. Vehicle damage may occur.

• When securing the vehicle to a flat bed

truck, do not attach to front or rear

suspension components. Damage to

your vehicle may result from improper

towing.

Front Wheel Drive (FWD)

The manufacturer recommends towing your

vehicle with all four wheels OFF the ground

on a flatbed.

If flatbed equipment is not available, this

vehicle must towed with the front wheels OFF

the ground (using a towing dolly, or wheel lift

equipment with the front wheels raised).

NOTE:

Ensure that the Electric Park Brake is re-

leased, and remains released, while being

towed.

CAUTION!

Towing this vehicle in violation of the

above requirements can cause severe

transmission damage. Damage from im-

proper towing is not covered under the

New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Four Wheel Drive (4WD)

The manufacturer requires towing with all

four wheels OFF the ground. Acceptable

methods are to tow the vehicle on a flatbed,

or with one end of the vehicle raised and the

opposite end on a towing dolly.

CAUTION!

• DO NOT tow this vehicle with ANY of its

wheels on the ground. Damage to the

drivetrain will result.

• Front or rear wheel lifts must not be

used. Internal damage to the transmis-

sion or power transfer unit will occur if a

front or rear wheel lift is used when

towing.

• Towing this vehicle in violation of the

above requirements can cause severe

transmission and/or power transfer unit

damage. Damage from improper towing

is not covered under the New Vehicle

Limited Warranty.

177

Emergency Tow Hooks — If Equipped

If your vehicle is equipped with tow hooks,

there will be one in the rear and two mounted

on the front of the vehicle. The rear hook will

be located on the driver's side of the vehicle.

NOTE:

For off-road recovery, it is recommended to

use both of the front tow hooks to minimize

the risk of damage to the vehicle.

Place the ignition in the ON/RUN position,

without opening the door. During towing re-

member that not having the aid of the power

brakes and the electromechanical power

steering, greater force is needed in applying

the brakes and steering of the vehicle.

WARNING!

• Do not use a chain for freeing a stuck

vehicle. Chains may break, causing seri-

ous injury or death.

• Stand clear of vehicles when pulling

with tow hooks. Tow straps may become

disengaged, causing serious injury.

CAUTION!

Tow hooks are for emergency use only, to

rescue a vehicle stranded off road. Do not

use tow hooks for tow truck hookup or

highway towing. You could damage your

vehicle.

ENHANCED ACCIDENT

RESPONSE SYSTEM (EARS)

This vehicle is equipped with an Enhanced

Accident Response System.

Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Sys-

tems” in “Safety” for further information on

the Enhanced Accident Response System

(EARS) function.

EVENT DATA RECORDER

(EDR)

This vehicle is equipped with an Event Data

Recorder (EDR). The main purpose of an EDR

is to record data that will assist in under-

standing how a vehicle’s systems performed

under certain crash or near crash-like situa-

tions, such as an air bag deployment or hit-

ting a road obstacle.

Please refer to “Occupant Restraint Sys-

tems” in “Safety” for further information on

the Event Data Recorder (EDR).

IN CASE OF EMERGENCY

178

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED SERVICING ......180

Maintenance Plan ..............180

ENGINE COMPARTMENT ......185

1.4L Turbo Engine .............185

2.4L Engine .................186

Checking Oil Level .............187

Cooling System ...............187

Adding Washer Fluid ............188

Brake System ................188

Manual Transmission — If Equipped . .189

Automatic Transmission — If Equipped.189

Maintenance-Free Battery ........189

DEALER SERVICE ...........190

Windshield Wiper Blades .........190

RAISINGTHEVEHICLE........192

TIRES ....................192

Tire Safety Information ..........192

Tires — General Information .......200

Tire Types ...................204

Spare Tires — If Equipped ........205

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care .......206

Tire Chains (Traction Devices).......207

Tire Rotation Recommendations .....208

DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTA-

TION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY

GRADES..................209

Treadwear ...................210

Traction Grades ...............210

Temperature Grades.............210

STORINGTHEVEHICLE .......211

BODYWORK................211

Preserving The Bodywork .........211

INTERIORS ................212

Seats And Fabric Parts ...........212

Plastic And Coated Parts..........213

Leather Parts.................213

Glass Surfaces ...............214

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

179

SCHEDULED SERVICING

Your vehicle is equipped with an automatic

oil change indicator system. The oil change

indicator system will remind you that it is

time to take your vehicle in for scheduled

maintenance.

Based on engine operation conditions, the oil

change indicator message will illuminate in

the instrument cluster. This means that ser-

vice is required for your vehicle. Operating

conditions such as frequent short-trips,

trailer tow and extremely hot or cold ambient

temperatures will influence when the

“Change Oil” or “Oil Change Required” mes-

sage is displayed. Severe Operating Condi-

tions can cause the change oil message to

illuminate as early as 3,500 miles

(5,600 km) since last reset. Have your ve-

hicle serviced as soon as possible, within the

next 500 miles (805 km).

An authorized dealer will reset the oil change

indicator message after completing the

scheduled oil change.

NOTE:

Under no circumstances should oil change

intervals exceed 10,000 miles (16,000 km),

one year or 350 hours of engine run time,

whichever comes first. The 350 hours of

engine run or idle time is generally only a

concern for fleet customers.

Severe Duty All Models

Change Engine Oil at 4,000 miles

(6,500 km) or 350 hours of engine run time

if the vehicle is operated in a dusty and off

road environment or is operated predomi-

nately at idle or only very low engine RPM’s.

This type of vehicle use is considered Severe

Duty.

NOTE:

The Oil Change Indicator will not illuminate

under these conditions.

Once A Month Or Before A Long Trip:

• Check engine oil level.

• Check windshield washer fluid level.

• Check the tire inflation pressures and look

for unusual wear or damage.

• Check the fluid levels of the coolant reser-

voir, and brake master cylinder reservoir,

and fill as needed.

• Check function of all interior and exterior

lights.

Maintenance Plan

Required Maintenance Intervals.

At Every Oil Change Interval As Indicated By Oil

Change Indicator System:

Change oil and filter.

Inspect battery and clean and tighten termi-

nals as required.

Inspect brake pads, shoes, rotors, drums,

and hoses.

Inspect engine cooling system protection

and hoses.

Inspect exhaust system.

Inspect engine air filter if using in dusty or

off-road conditions.

Refer to the “Maintenance Chart” on the

following page for the required maintenance

intervals.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

180

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes

first)

10,000

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

16,000

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Check tire condition/wear and adjust

pressure, if necessary, check Tire Service

Kit expiration date (if equipped).

••• •••••• • • • • • •

Check operation of lighting system

(headlamps, direction indicators, hazard

warning lights, luggage compartment,

passenger compartment, glove compart-

ment, instrument panel warning lights,

etc.).

••• •••••• • • • • • •

Check and, if necessary, top up fluid

levels (brakes/hydraulic clutch, wind-

shield washer, battery, engine coolant,

etc.).

••• •••••• • • • • • •

Check engine control system operation

(via diagnostic tool).

••• •••••• • • • • • •

Visually inspect condition of: exterior

bodywork, underbody protection, pipes

and hoses (exhaust - fuel system -

brakes), rubber elements (boots, sleeves,

bushings, etc.).

•••• • • •

Check windshield/rear window wiper

blade position/wear.

•• ••• • • •

Check operation of windshield washer

system and adjust jets if necessary.

•• ••• • • •

181

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes

first)

10,000

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

16,000

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Check cleanliness of hood and tailgate

locks and cleanliness and lubrication of

linkages.

•• ••• • • •

Visually check the condition and wear of

the front and rear brakes.

••• •••••• • • • • • •

Check the front suspension, tie rods, CV

joints and replace if necessary.

•••• • • •

Visual inspect the condition of the ac-

cessory drive belt.

•• •

Check the tension of the accessory drive

belt.

•••• • • •

Inspect and replace, if required, front

end accessory drive belt, tensioner, and,

idler pulley.

•

Inspect and replace PCV valve if neces-

sary.

•

Change engine oil and replace oil filter.*

Inspect the PTU fluid level. • • •

Inspect the rear differential fluid level. • • •

Replace spark plugs (1.4L Turbo en-

gine). **

••• • •

Replace spark plugs (2.4L engine). ** •

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

182

Mileage or time passed (whichever comes

first)

10,000

20,000

30,000

40,000

50,000

60,000

70,000

80,000

90,000

100,000

110,000

120,000

130,000

140,000

150,000

Or Years: 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15

Or Kilometers:

16,000

32,000

48,000

64,000

80,000

96,000

112,000

128,000

144,000

160,000

176,000

192,000

208,000

224,000

240,000

Replace engine air filter. # • • • • •

Replace brake fluid every two years. *** • • • • • • •

Replace cabin filter. ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ • ○ • ○

Change the manual transmission fluid if

using your vehicle for any of the follow-

ing: trailer towing, heavy loading, taxi,

police, delivery service (commercial ser-

vice), off-road, desert operation or more

than 50% of your driving is at sustained

speeds during hot weather, above 90°F

(32°C).

• •

Flush and replace the engine coolant at

10 years or 150,000 miles

(240,000 km) whichever comes first.

••

Replace the timing belt (1.4L Turbo En-

gine).

•

○ Recommend replacement

• Mandatory service

# The engine air cleaner should be in-

spected at every oil change if used in dusty

areas.

* The oil and oil filter replacement must be

carried out when indicated by a warning

light or message on the instrument panel, or

in any case should not exceed 1 year or

10,000 miles (16,000 km).

183

** The spark plug change is distance based

only, yearly intervals do not apply. The fol-

lowing are essential to ensure correct opera-

tion and prevent serious damage to the en-

gine:

• Only use spark plugs of the same make and

type which are specially certified for such

engines (refer to “Fluids and Lubricants” in

“Technical Specifications” for further in-

formation).

• Strictly comply with the spark plug replace-

ment interval given in the “Maintenance

Schedule” for spark plug replacement.

• Contact an authorized dealer if you have

any questions.

*** The brake fluid change interval is time

based only, mileage intervals do not apply.

WARNING!

• You can be badly injured working on or

around a motor vehicle. Do only service

work for which you have the knowledge

and the right equipment. If you have any

doubt about your ability to perform a

service job, take your vehicle to a com-

petent mechanic.

• Failure to properly inspect and maintain

your vehicle could result in a component

malfunction and effect vehicle handling

and performance. This could cause an

accident.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

184

ENGINE COMPARTMENT

1.4L Turbo Engine

1 — Air Cleaner Filter 4 — Battery 7 — Coolant Pressure Bottle Cap

2 — Engine Oil Dipstick 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Coolant Pressure Bottle

3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 9 — Oil Fill Cap

185

2.4L Engine

1 — Engine Air Cleaner Filter 4 — Battery 7 — Coolant Pressure Bottle Cap

2 — Engine Oil Fill Cap 5 — Power Distribution Center (Fuses) 8 — Coolant Pressure Bottle

3 — Brake Fluid Reservoir 6 — Washer Fluid Reservoir 9 — Engine Oil Dipstick

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

186

Checking Oil Level

To assure proper engine lubrication, the en-

gine oil must be maintained at the correct

level. Check the oil level at regular intervals,

such as every fuel stop. The best time to

check the engine oil level is approximately

five minutes after a fully warmed engine is

shut off. Do not check oil level before starting

the engine after it has sat overnight. Check-

ing engine oil level when the engine is cold

will give you an incorrect reading.

Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level

ground, and approximately five minutes after

a fully warmed engine is shut off, will improve

the accuracy of the oil level readings. Main-

tain the oil level between the range markings

on the dipstick. The safe range is indicated

by a crosshatch zone. Adding 1 quart (0.9 Li-

ters) of oil when the reading is at the low end

of the indicated range will result in the oil

level at the full end of the indicator range.

CAUTION!

Do not overfill the engine with oil. Overfill-

ing the engine with oil will cause oil aera-

tion, which can lead to loss of oil pressure

and an increase in oil temperature. This

loss of oil pressure and increased oil tem-

perature could damage your engine.

Cooling System

WARNING!

• You or others can be badly burned by hot

engine coolant (antifreeze) or steam

from your radiator. If you see or hear

steam coming from under the hood, do

not open the hood until the radiator has

had time to cool. Never open a cooling

system pressure cap when the radiator or

coolant bottle is hot.

• Keep hands, tools, clothing, and jewelry

away from the radiator cooling fan when

the hood is raised. The fan starts auto-

matically and may start at any time,

whether the engine is running or not.

WARNING!

• When working near the radiator cooling

fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or

turn the ignition to the OFF mode. The

fan is temperature controlled and can

start at any time the ignition is in the ON

mode.

Coolant Checks

Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection

every 12 months (before the onset of freezing

weather, where applicable). If the engine

coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or rusty in appear-

ance, the system should be drained, flushed

and refilled with fresh engine coolant (anti-

freeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser

for any accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If

dirty, clean by gently spraying water from a

garden hose vertically down the face of the

condenser.

187

Adding Washer Fluid

The windshield washer fluid reservoir is lo-

cated in the engine compartment, and the

fluid level should be checked at regular inter-

vals. Fill the reservoir with windshield washer

solvent (not engine coolant/ antifreeze). Re-

fer to “Engine Compartment” in this section

for further information.

WARNING!

Commercially available windshield washer

solvents are flammable. They could ignite

and burn you. Care must be exercised

when filling or working around the washer

solution.

Brake System

In order to assure brake system performance,

all brake system components should be in-

spected periodically. Refer to the “Mainte-

nance Plan” in this section for the proper

maintenance intervals.

WARNING!

Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure

and possibly a collision. Driving with your

foot resting or riding on the brake pedal

can result in abnormally high brake tem-

peratures, excessive lining wear, and pos-

sible brake damage. Riding the brakes

may also reduce braking capacity in an

emergency.

Brake Master Cylinder

The fluid level in the master cylinder should

be checked when performing under hood

services, or immediately if the “Brake Warn-

ing Light” is on.

Be sure to clean the top of the master cylin-

der area before removing the cap. If neces-

sary, add fluid to bring the fluid level up to

the requirements described on the brake

fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to

fall as the brake pads wear. The brake fluid

level should be checked when the pads are

replaced. However, low fluid level may be

caused by a leak and a checkup may be

needed.

NOTE:

If your vehicle is equipped with a manual

transmission, the brake fluid reservoir sup-

plies fluid to both the brake system and the

clutch release system. The two systems are

separated in the reservoir, and a leak in one

system will not affect the other system. The

manual transmission clutch release system

should not require fluid replacement during

the life of the vehicle. If the brake fluid

reservoir is low and the brake system does not

indicate any leaks or other problems, it may

be a result of a leak in the hydraulic clutch

release system. See an authorized dealer for

service.

Use only manufacturer's recommended

brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubricants”

in the “Technical Specifications” section for

further information.

WARNING!

• Use only manufacturer’s recommended

brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids And Lubri-

cants” in the “Technical Specifications”

section for further information. Using

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

188

WARNING!

the wrong type of brake fluid can se-

verely damage your brake system and/or

impair its performance. The proper type

of brake fluid for your vehicle is also

identified on the original factory in-

stalled hydraulic master cylinder reser-

voir.

• To avoid contamination from foreign

matter or moisture, use only new brake

fluid or fluid that has been in a tightly

closed container. Keep the master cylin-

der reservoir cap secured at all times.

Brake fluid in a open container absorbs

moisture from the air resulting in a lower

boiling point. This may cause it to boil

unexpectedly during hard or prolonged

braking, resulting in sudden brake fail-

ure. This could result in a collision.

• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can

result in spilling brake fluid on hot en-

gine parts, causing the brake fluid to

catch fire. Brake fluid can also damage

painted and vinyl surfaces, care should

be taken to avoid its contact with these

surfaces.

CAUTION!

Use of improper brake fluids will affect

overall clutch system performance. Im-

proper brake fluids may damage the clutch

system resulting in loss of clutch function

and the ability to shift the transmission.

Manual Transmission — If Equipped

Fluid Level Check

Check the fluid level by removing the fill

plug. The fluid level should be between the

bottom of the fill hole and a point not more

than 3/16 inch (4.7 mm) below the bottom of

the hole.

Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper

level.

Please see an authorized dealer for service.

Automatic Transmission — If Equipped

Fluid Level Check

The fluid level is preset at the factory and

does not require adjustment under normal

operating conditions. Routine fluid level

checks are not required; therefore the trans-

mission has no dipstick. An authorized dealer

can check your transmission fluid level using

special service tools. If you notice fluid leak-

age or transmission malfunction, visit an au-

thorized dealer immediately to have the

transmission fluid level checked. Operating

the vehicle with an improper fluid level can

cause severe transmission damage.

CAUTION!

If a transmission fluid leak occurs, visit an

authorized dealer immediately. Severe

transmission damage may occur. An au-

thorized dealer has the proper tools to

adjust the fluid level accurately.

Maintenance-Free Battery

Your vehicle is equipped with a maintenance-

free battery. You will never have to add water,

nor is periodic maintenance required.

WARNING!

• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution

and can burn or even blind you. Do not

189

WARNING!

allow battery fluid to contact your eyes,

skin, or clothing. Do not lean over a

battery when attaching clamps. If acid

splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the

area immediately with large amounts of

water. Refer to “Jump Starting Proce-

dure” in “In Case Of Emergency” for

further information.

• Battery gas is flammable and explosive.

Keep flame or sparks away from the

battery. Do not use a booster battery or

any other booster source with an output

greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable

clamps to touch each other.

• Battery posts, terminals, and related ac-

cessories contain lead and lead com-

pounds. Wash hands after handling.

CAUTION!

• It is essential when replacing the cables

on the battery that the positive cable is

attached to the positive post and the

negative cable is attached to the nega-

tive post. Battery posts are marked posi-

CAUTION!

tive (+) and negative (-) and are identi-

fied on the battery case. Cable clamps

should be tight on the terminal posts

and free of corrosion.

• If a “fast charger” is used while the

battery is in the vehicle, disconnect both

vehicle battery cables before connecting

the charger to the battery. Do not use a

“fast charger” to provide starting volt-

age.

DEALER SERVICE

An authorized dealer has the qualified ser-

vice personnel, special tools, and equipment

to perform all service operations in an expert

manner. Service Manuals are available which

include detailed service information for your

vehicle. Refer to these Service Manuals be-

fore attempting any procedure yourself.

NOTE:

Intentional tampering with emissions control

systems may void your warranty and could

result in civil penalties being assessed

against you.

WARNING!

You can be badly injured working on or

around a motor vehicle. Only do service

work for which you have the knowledge

and the proper equipment. If you have any

doubt about your ability to perform a ser-

vice job, take your vehicle to a competent

mechanic.

Windshield Wiper Blades

Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades

and the windshield periodically with a sponge

or soft cloth and a mild nonabrasive cleaner.

This will remove accumulations of salt or road

film.

Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long

periods may cause deterioration of the wiper

blades. Always use washer fluid when using

the wipers to remove salt or dirt from a dry

windshield.

Avoid using the wiper blades to remove frost

or ice from the windshield. Keep the blade

rubber out of contact with petroleum prod-

ucts such as engine oil, gasoline, etc.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

190

NOTE:

Life expectancy of wiper blades varies de-

pending on geographical area and frequency

of use. Poor performance of blades may be

present with chattering, marks, water lines or

wet spots. If any of these conditions are

present, clean the wiper blades or replace as

necessary.

Service Position Strategy

The service position allows the wiper blades

to be placed in a position that allows the

wiper blades to be easily changed.

To enable the Service Position Strategy, the

wipers must be in the Park position before

placing the ignition in the STOP/OFF posi-

tion.

Service mode must be activated within two

minutes after the ignition is placed in the

STOP/OFF position.

To have a correct activation of strategy, the

Service Position command (antipanic) must

be active for at least half a second.

At every valid activation of Service Position

command, the wiper blades are activated for

250 ms.

The Service Position command can be re-

peated several times to bring the blades into

the desired position, up to a maximum of

three times.

After three subsequent activations the strat-

egy is disabled.

Function Deactivation:

The functionality is reset if:

• The ignition is turned to the MAR/RUN

position.

• Number of subsequent activations is three.

• Two minutes timer has expired after turning

the ignition OFF.

NOTE:

When turning the ignition ON, the blades will

go into the parking position.

Front Wiper Blade Removal/Installation

1. Lift the front wiper arm upward to raise

the wiper blade off of the windshield.

2. Push the release button on the arm of the

wiper blade.

3. Push the wiper blade up and remove it.

4. Install the wiper blade and firmly push the

wiper blade until it snaps into place.

1 — Wiper Blade

2 — Release Button

3 — Wiper Arm

191

Rear Wiper Blade Removal/Installation

1. Carefully lift the rear wiper arm upward to

raise the wiper blade off of the liftgate

glass.

2. Grab and hold the wiper arm closest to the

wiper blade end while pushing the wiper

blade towards the liftgate glass to unsnap

the blade pivot pin from the wiper blade

holder on the wiper arm.

3. Install the wiper blade pivot pin into the

wiper blade holder at the end of the wiper

arm, and firmly push the wiper blade until

it snaps into place.

RAISING THE VEHICLE

In the case where it is necessary to raise the

vehicle, go to an authorized dealer or service

station.

TIRES

Tire Safety Information

Tire safety information will cover aspects of

the following information: Tire Markings, Tire

Identification Numbers, Tire Terminology and

Definitions, Tire Pressures, and Tire Loading.

Tire Markings

1 — U.S. DOT

Safety Stan-

dards Code

(TIN)

4 — Maximum

Load

2 — Size Desig-

nation

5 — Maximum

Pressure

3 — Service

Description

6 — Treadwear,

Traction and

Temperature

Grades

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

192

NOTE:

• P (Passenger) — Metric tire sizing is based

on U.S. design standards. P-Metric tires

have the letter “P” molded into the sidewall

preceding the size designation. Example:

P215/65R15 95H.

• European — Metric tire sizing is based on

European design standards. Tires designed

to this standard have the tire size molded

into the sidewall beginning with the section

width. The letter "P" is absent from this tire

size designation. Example: 215/

65R15 96H.

• LT (Light Truck) — Metric tire sizing is

based on U.S. design standards. The size

designation for LT-Metric tires is the same

as for P-Metric tires except for the letters

“LT” that are molded into the sidewall pre-

ceding the size designation. Example:

LT235/85R16.

• Temporary spare tires are designed for tem-

porary emergency use only. Temporary high

pressure compact spare tires have the letter

“T” or “S” molded into the sidewall preced-

ing the size designation. Example: T145/

80D18 103M.

• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S.

design standards and it begins with the tire

diameter molded into the sidewall. Ex-

ample: 31x10.5 R15 LT.

Tire Sizing Chart

EXAMPLE:

Example Size Designation: P215/65R15XL 95H, 215/65R15 96H, LT235/85R16C, T145/80D18 103M, 31x10.5 R15 LT

P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards, or

"....blank...." = Passenger car tire based on European design standards, or

LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards, or

TorS= Temporary spare tire or

31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)

215, 235, 145 = Section width in millimeters (mm)

65, 85, 80 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)

•

Ratio of section height to section width of tire, or

10.5 = Section width in inches (in)

193

EXAMPLE:

R = Construction code

•

"R" means radial construction, or

• "D" means diagonal or bias construction

15, 16, 18 = Rim diameter in inches (in)

Service Description:

95 = Load Index

•

A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry

H = Speed Symbol

•

A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to its load index under certain operating conditions

• The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle

loading, road conditions, and posted speed limits)

Load Identification:

Absence of the following load identification symbols on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire:

•

XL = Extra load (or reinforced) tire, or

• LL = Light load tire or

• C, D, E, F, G = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure

Maximum Load – Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry

Maximum Pressure – Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this tire

Tire Identification Number (TIN)

The TIN may be found on one or both sides of

the tire; however, the date code may only be

on one side. Tires with white sidewalls will

have the full TIN, including the date code,

located on the white sidewall side of the tire.

Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black

sidewall tires as mounted on the vehicle. If

the TIN is not found on the outboard side,

then you will find it on the inboard side of the

tire.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

194

EXAMPLE:

DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301

DOT = Department of Transportation

• This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire safety standards and is approved for highway

use

MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)

L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)

ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)

03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

•

03 means the 3rd week

01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)

•

01 means the year 2001

• Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year in which the tire was manufactured. Example:

031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991

Tire Terminology And Definitions

Term Definition

B-Pillar

The vehicle B-Pillar is the structural member of the body located behind the front

door.

Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Cold tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not

been driven for at least three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting

for a minimum of three hours. Inflation pressure is measured in units of PSI (pounds

per square inch) or kPa (kilopascals).

Maximum Inflation Pressure

The maximum inflation pressure is the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pres-

sure for this tire. The maximum inflation pressure is molded into the sidewall.

195

Term Definition

Recommended Cold Tire Inflation Pressure

Vehicle manufacturer's recommended cold tire inflation pressure as shown on the tire

placard.

Tire Placard

A label permanently attached to the vehicle describing the vehicle’s loading capacity,

the original equipment tire sizes and the recommended cold tire inflation pressures.

Tire Loading And Tire Pressure

NOTE:

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is

listed on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the rear

edge of the driver's side door.

Check the inflation pressure of each tire,

including the spare tire (if equipped), at least

monthly and inflate to the recommended

pressure for your vehicle.

Example Tire Placard Location (Door) Example Tire Placard Location (B-Pillar)

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

196

Tire And Loading Information Placard

This placard tells you important information

about the:

1. Number of people that can be carried in

the vehicle.

2. Total weight your vehicle can carry.

3. Tire size designed for your vehicle.

4. Cold tire inflation pressures for the front,

rear, and spare tires.

The vehicle maximum load on the tire must

not exceed the load carrying capacity of the

tire on your vehicle. You will not exceed the

tire's load carrying capacity if you adhere to

the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire

inflation pressures specified on the Tire and

Loading Information placard in “Vehicle

Loading” in the “Starting And Operating”

section of your Owner’s Manual.

NOTE:

Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,

gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the

front and rear axles must not be exceeded.

To determine the maximum loading condi-

tions of your vehicle, locate the statement

“The combined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs”

on the Tire and Loading Information placard.

The combined weight of occupants, cargo/

luggage and trailer tongue weight (if appli-

cable) should never exceed the weight refer-

enced here.

Steps For Determining Correct Load

Limit—

(1) Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants and cargo

should never exceed XXX kg or

XXX lbs.” on your vehicle's placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight of

the driver and passengers that will be

riding in your vehicle.

Tire And Loading Information Placard

197

(3) Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from XXX kg

or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and luggage

load capacity. For example, if “XXX”

amount equals 1400 lbs. and there

will be five 150 lb passengers in your

vehicle, the amount of available cargo

and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs.

(1400-750 (5x150) = 650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on the

vehicle. That weight may not safely

exceed the available cargo and lug-

gage load capacity calculated in Step

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a

trailer, load from your trailer will be

transferred to your vehicle. Consult

this manual to determine how this

reduces the available cargo and lug-

gage load capacity of your vehicle.

Metric Example For Load Limit

For example, if “XXX” amount equals 635 kg

and there will be five 68 kg passengers in

your vehicle, the amount of available cargo

and luggage load capacity is 295 kg (635-

340 (5x68) = 295 kg) as shown in step 4.

NOTE:

• If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load

from your trailer will be transferred to your

vehicle. The following table shows ex-

amples on how to calculate total load,

cargo/luggage, and towing capacities of

your vehicle with varying seating configura-

tions and number and size of occupants.

This table is for illustration purposes only

and may not be accurate for the seating and

load carry capacity of your vehicle.

•

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

198

For the following example, the combined

weight of occupants and cargo should never

exceed 865 lbs (392 kg).

199

WARNING!

Overloading of your tires is dangerous.

Overloading can cause tire failure, affect

vehicle handling, and increase your stop-

ping distance. Use tires of the recom-

mended load capacity for your vehicle.

Never overload them.

Tires — General Information

Tire Pressure

Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to

the safe and satisfactory operation of your

vehicle. Four primary areas are affected by

improper tire pressure:

• Safety and Vehicle Stability

• Economy

• Tread Wear

• Ride Comfort

Safety

WARNING!

• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous

and can cause collisions.

• Underinflation increases tire flexing and

can result in overheating and tire failure.

• Overinflation reduces a tire's ability to

cushion shock. Objects on the road and

chuckholes can cause damage that re-

sult in tire failure.

• Overinflated or underinflated tires can

affect vehicle handling and can fail sud-

denly, resulting in loss of vehicle con-

trol.

• Unequal tire pressures can cause steer-

ing problems. You could lose control of

your vehicle.

• Unequal tire pressures from one side of

the vehicle to the other can cause the

vehicle to drift to the right or left.

• Always drive with each tire inflated to

the recommended cold tire inflation

pressure.

Both under-inflation and over-inflation affect

the stability of the vehicle and can produce a

feeling of sluggish response or over respon-

siveness in the steering.

NOTE:

• Unequal tire pressures from side to side

may cause erratic and unpredictable steer-

ing response.

• Unequal tire pressure from side to side may

cause the vehicle to drift left or right.

Fuel Economy

Underinflated tires will increase tire rolling

resistance resulting in higher fuel consump-

tion.

Tread Wear

Improper cold tire inflation pressures can

cause abnormal wear patterns and reduced

tread life, resulting in the need for earlier tire

replacement.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

200

Ride Comfort And Vehicle Stability

Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfort-

able ride. Over-inflation produces a jarring

and uncomfortable ride.

Tire Inflation Pressures

The proper cold tire inflation pressure is

listed on the driver's side B-Pillar or rear edge

of the driver's side door.

At least once a month:

• Check and adjust tire pressure with a good

quality pocket-type pressure gauge. Do not

make a visual judgement when determining

proper inflation. Tires may look properly

inflated even when they are under-inflated.

• Inspect tires for signs of tire wear or visible

damage.

CAUTION!

After inspecting or adjusting the tire pres-

sure, always reinstall the valve stem cap.

This will prevent moisture and dirt from

entering the valve stem, which could dam-

age the valve stem.

Inflation pressures specified on the placard

are always “cold tire inflation pressure”. Cold

tire inflation pressure is defined as the tire

pressure after the vehicle has not been driven

for at least three hours, or driven less than

1 mile (1.6 km) after sitting for a minimum of

three hours. The cold tire inflation pressure

must not exceed the maximum inflation pres-

sure molded into the tire sidewall.

Check tire pressures more often if subject to

a wide range of outdoor temperatures, as tire

pressures vary with temperature changes.

Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi

(7 kPa) per 12°F (7°C) of air temperature

change. Keep this in mind when checking tire

pressure inside a garage, especially in the

Winter.

Example: If garage temperature = 68°F

(20°C) and the outside temperature = 32°F

(0°C) then the cold tire inflation pressure

should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa), which

equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for

this outside temperature condition.

Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi

(13 to 40 kPa) during operation. DO NOT

reduce this normal pressure build up or your

tire pressure will be too low.

Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation

The manufacturer advocates driving at safe

speeds and within posted speed limits. Where

speed limits or conditions are such that the

vehicle can be driven at high speeds, maintain-

ing correct tire inflation pressure is very impor-

tant. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle

loading may be required for high-speed vehicle

operation. Refer to an authorized tire dealer or

original equipment vehicle dealer for recom-

mended safe operating speeds, loading and cold

tire inflation pressures.

WARNING!

High speed driving with your vehicle under

maximum load is dangerous. The added

strain on your tires could cause them to

fail. You could have a serious collision. Do

not drive a vehicle loaded to the maximum

capacity at continuous speeds above

75 mph (120 km/h).

201

Radial Ply Tires

WARNING!

Combining radial ply tires with other types

of tires on your vehicle will cause your

vehicle to handle poorly. The instability

could cause a collision. Always use radial

ply tires in sets of four. Never combine

them with other types of tires.

Tire Repair

If your tire becomes damaged, it may be

repaired if it meets the following criteria:

• The tire has not been driven on when flat.

• The damage is only on the tread section of

your tire (sidewall damage is not repair-

able).

• The puncture is no greater thana¼ofan

inch (6 mm).

Consult an authorized tire dealer for tire re-

pairs and additional information.

Damaged Run Flat tires, or Run Flat tires that

have experienced a loss of pressure should be

replaced immediately with another Run Flat

tire of identical size and service description

(Load Index and Speed Symbol).

Run Flat Tires — If Equipped

Run Flat tires allow you the capability to drive

50 miles (80 km) at 50 mph (80 km/h) after

a rapid loss of inflation pressure. This rapid

loss of inflation is referred to as the Run Flat

mode. A Run Flat mode occurs when the tire

inflation pressure is of/or below 14 psi

(96 kPa). Once a Run Flat tire reaches the

run flat mode it has limited driving capabili-

ties and needs to be replaced immediately. A

Run Flat tire is not repairable.

It is not recommended driving a vehicle

loaded at full capacity or to tow a trailer while

a tire is in the run flat mode.

See the tire pressure monitoring section for

more information.

Tire Spinning

When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice con-

ditions, do not spin your vehicle's wheels

above 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than

30 seconds continuously without stopping.

Refer to “Freeing A Stuck Vehicle” in “In

Case Of Emergency” for further information.

WARNING!

Fast spinning tires can be dangerous.

Forces generated by excessive wheel

speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A

tire could explode and injure someone. Do

not spin your vehicle's wheels faster than

30 mph (48 km/h) for more than 30 sec-

onds continuously when you are stuck,

and do not let anyone near a spinning

wheel, no matter what the speed.

Tread Wear Indicators

Tread wear indicators are in the original

equipment tires to help you in determining

when your tires should be replaced.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

202

These indicators are molded into the bottom

of the tread grooves. They will appear as

bands when the tread depth becomes a

1/16 of an inch (1.6 mm). When the tread is

worn to the tread wear indicators, the tire

should be replaced. Refer to “Replacement

Tires” in this section for further information.

Life Of Tire

The service life of a tire is dependent upon

varying factors including, but not limited to:

• Driving style.

• Tire pressure - Improper cold tire inflation

pressures can cause uneven wear patterns

to develop across the tire tread. These ab-

normal wear patterns will reduce tread life,

resulting in the need for earlier tire replace-

ment.

• Distance driven.

• Performance tires, tires with a speed rating

of V or higher, and Summer tires typically

have a reduced tread life. Rotation of these

tires per the vehicle scheduled mainte-

nance is highly recommended.

WARNING!

Tires and the spare tire should be replaced

after six years, regardless of the remaining

tread. Failure to follow this warning can

result in sudden tire failure. You could lose

control and have a collision resulting in

serious injury or death.

Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place

with as little exposure to light as possible.

Protect tires from contact with oil, grease,

and gasoline.

Replacement Tires

The tires on your new vehicle provide a bal-

ance of many characteristics. They should be

inspected regularly for wear and correct cold

tire inflation pressures. The manufacturer

strongly recommends that you use tires

equivalent to the originals in size, quality and

performance when replacement is needed.

Refer to the paragraph on “Tread Wear Indi-

cators” in this section. Refer to the Tire and

Loading Information placard or the Vehicle

Certification Label for the size designation of

your tire. The Load Index and Speed Symbol

for your tire will be found on the original

equipment tire sidewall.

See the Tire Sizing Chart example found in

the “Tire Safety Information” section of this

manual for more information relating to the

Load Index and Speed Symbol of a tire.

It is recommended to replace the two front

tires or two rear tires as a pair. Replacing just

one tire can seriously affect your vehicle’s

handling. If you ever replace a wheel, make

sure that the wheel’s specifications match

those of the original wheels.

Tire Tread

1 — Worn Tire

2 — New Tire

203

It is recommended you contact an authorized

tire dealer or original equipment dealer with

any questions you may have on tire specifi-

cations or capability. Failure to use equiva-

lent replacement tires may adversely affect

the safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle.

WARNING!

• Do not use a tire, wheel size, load rating,

or speed rating other than that specified

for your vehicle. Some combinations of

unapproved tires and wheels may

change suspension dimensions and per-

formance characteristics, resulting in

changes to steering, handling, and brak-

ing of your vehicle. This can cause un-

predictable handling and stress to steer-

ing and suspension components. You

could lose control and have a collision

resulting in serious injury or death. Use

only the tire and wheel sizes with load

ratings approved for your vehicle.

• Never use a tire with a smaller load index

or capacity, other than what was origi-

nally equipped on your vehicle. Using a

tire with a smaller load index could re-

WARNING!

sult in tire overloading and failure. You

could lose control and have a collision.

• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires

having adequate speed capability can

result in sudden tire failure and loss of

vehicle control.

CAUTION!

Replacing original tires with tires of a

different size may result in false speedom-

eter and odometer readings.

Tire Types

All Season Tires — If Equipped

All Season tires provide traction for all sea-

sons (Spring, Summer, Fall, and Winter).

Traction levels may vary between different all

season tires. All season tires can be identi-

fied by the M+S, M&S, M/S or MS designa-

tion on the tire sidewall. Use all season tires

only in sets of four; failure to do so may

adversely affect the safety and handling of

your vehicle.

Summer Or Three Season Tires — If

Equipped

Summer tires provide traction in both wet

and dry conditions, and are not intended to

be driven in snow or on ice. If your vehicle is

equipped with Summer tires, be aware these

tires are not designed for Winter or cold

driving conditions. Install Winter tires on your

vehicle when ambient temperatures are less

than 40°F (5°C) or if roads are covered with

ice or snow. For more information, contact an

authorized dealer.

Summer tires do not contain the all season

designation or mountain/snowflake symbol

on the tire sidewall. Use Summer tires only in

sets of four; failure to do so may adversely

affect the safety and handling of your vehicle.

WARNING!

Do not use Summer tires in snow/ice con-

ditions. You could lose vehicle control,

resulting in severe injury or death. Driving

too fast for conditions also creates the

possibility of loss of vehicle control.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

204

Snow Tires

Some areas of the country require the use of

snow tires during the Winter. Snow tires can

be identified by a “mountain/snowflake”

symbol on the tire sidewall.

If you need snow tires,

select tires equivalent

in size and type to the

original equipment

tires. Use snow tires

only in sets of four;

failure to do so may

adversely affect the

safety and handling of your vehicle.

Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings

than what was originally equipped with your

vehicle and should not be operated at sus-

tained speeds over 75 mph (120 km/h). For

speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h) refer to

original equipment or an authorized tire

dealer for recommended safe operating

speeds, loading and cold tire inflation pres-

sures.

While studded tires improve performance on

ice, skid and traction capability on wet or dry

surfaces may be poorer than that of non-

studded tires. Some states prohibit studded

tires; therefore, local laws should be checked

before using these tire types.

Spare Tires — If Equipped

For vehicles equipped with Tire Service Kit

instead of a spare tire, please refer to “Tire

Service Kit” in “In Case Of Emergency” in the

Owner’s Manual for further information.

CAUTION!

Because of the reduced ground clearance,

do not take your vehicle through an auto-

matic car wash with a compact or limited

use temporary spare installed. Damage to

the vehicle may result.

Spare Tire Matching Original Equipped Tire

And Wheel — If Equipped

Your vehicle may be equipped with a spare

tire and wheel equivalent in look and function

to the original equipment tire and wheel

found on the front or rear axle of your vehicle.

This spare tire may be used in the tire rotation

for your vehicle. If your vehicle has this op-

tion, refer to an authorized tire dealer for the

recommended tire rotation pattern.

Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped

The compact spare is for temporary emer-

gency use only. You can identify if your ve-

hicle is equipped with a compact spare by

looking at the spare tire description on the

Tire and Loading Information Placard located

on the driver’s side door opening or on the

sidewall of the tire. Compact spare tire de-

scriptions begin with the letter “T” or “S”

preceding the size designation. Example:

T145/80D18 103M.

T,S=Temporary Spare Tire

Since this tire has limited tread life, the

original equipment tire should be repaired (or

replaced) and reinstalled on your vehicle at

the first opportunity.

205

Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to

mount a conventional tire on the compact

spare wheel, since the wheel is designed

specifically for the compact spare tire. Do not

install more than one compact spare tire and

wheel on the vehicle at any given time.

WARNING!

Compact and collapsible spares are for

temporary emergency use only. With these

spares, do not drive more than 50 mph

(80 km/h). Temporary use spares have

limited tread life. When the tread is worn

to the tread wear indicators, the temporary

use spare tire needs to be replaced. Be

sure to follow the warnings, which apply to

your spare. Failure to do so could result in

spare tire failure and loss of vehicle con-

trol.

Full Size Spare — If Equipped

The full size spare is for temporary emer-

gency use only. This tire may look like the

originally equipped tire on the front or rear

axle of your vehicle, but it is not. This spare

tire may have limited tread life. When the

tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the

temporary use full size spare tire needs to be

replaced. Since it is not the same as your

original equipment tire, replace (or repair)

the original equipment tire and reinstall on

the vehicle at the first opportunity.

Limited Use Spare — If Equipped

The limited use spare tire is for temporary emer-

gency use only. This tire is identified by a label

located on the limited use spare wheel. This label

contains the driving limitations for this spare.

This tire may look like the original equipped tire

on the front or rear axle of your vehicle, but it is

not. Installation of this limited use spare tire

affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same

as your original equipment tire, replace (or repair)

the original equipment tire and reinstall on the

vehicle at the first opportunity.

WARNING!

Limited use spares are for emergency use

only. Installation of this limited use spare

tire affects vehicle handling. With this tire,

WARNING!

do not drive more than the speed listed on

the limited use spare wheel. Keep inflated

to the cold tire inflation pressures listed on

your Tire and Loading Information Placard

located on the driver’s side B-Pillar or the

rear edge of the driver’s side door. Replace

(or repair) the original equipment tire at

the first opportunity and reinstall it on your

vehicle. Failure to do so could result in

loss of vehicle control.

Wheel And Wheel Trim Care

All wheels and wheel trim, especially alumi-

num and chrome plated wheels, should be

cleaned regularly using mild (neutral Ph)

soap and water to maintain their luster and to

prevent corrosion. Wash wheels with the

same soap solution recommended for the

body of the vehicle and remember to always

wash when the surfaces are not hot to the

touch.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

206

Your wheels are susceptible to deterioration

caused by salt, sodium chloride, magnesium

chloride, calcium chloride, etc., and other

road chemicals used to melt ice or control

dust on dirt roads. Use a soft cloth or sponge

and mild soap to wipe away promptly. Do not

use harsh chemicals or a stiff brush. They can

damage the wheel’s protective coating that

helps keep them from corroding and

tarnishing.

CAUTION!

Avoid products or automatic car washes

that use acidic solutions or strong alkaline

additives or harsh brushes. Many aftermar-

ket wheel cleaners and automatic car

washes may damage the wheel's protective

finish. Such damage is not covered by the

New Vehicle Limited Warranty. Only car

wash soap, Mopar Wheel Cleaner or

equivalent is recommended.

When cleaning extremely dirty wheels includ-

ing excessive brake dust, care must be taken

in the selection of tire and wheel cleaning

chemicals and equipment to prevent damage

to the wheels. Mopar Wheel Treatment or

Mopar Chrome Cleaner or their equivalent is

recommended or select a non-abrasive, non-

acidic cleaner for aluminum or chrome

wheels.

CAUTION!

Do not use scouring pads, steel wool, a

bristle brush, metal polishes or oven

cleaner. These products may damage the

wheel's protective finish. Such damage is

not covered by the New Vehicle Limited

Warranty. Only car wash soap, Mopar

Wheel Cleaner or equivalent is recom-

mended.

NOTE:

If you intend parking or storing your vehicle

for an extended period after cleaning the

wheels with wheel cleaner, drive your vehicle

and apply the brakes to remove the water

droplets from the brake components. This

activity will remove the red rust on the brake

rotors and prevent vehicle vibration when

braking.

Dark Vapor Chrome, Black Satin Chrome, or Low

Gloss Clear Coat Wheels

CAUTION!

If your vehicle is equipped with these

specialty wheels, DO NOT USE wheel

cleaners, abrasives, or polishing com-

pounds. They will permanently damage

this finish and such damage is not covered

by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.

HAND WASH ONLY USING MILD SOAP

AND WATER WITH A SOFT CLOTH. Used

on a regular basis; this is all that is re-

quired to maintain this finish.

Tire Chains (Traction Devices)

Use of traction devices require sufficient tire-

to-body clearance. Follow these recommen-

dations to guard against damage.

• Traction device must be of proper size for

the tire, as recommended by the traction

device manufacturer.

• Install on front tires only.

207

• Due to limited clearance, the following

traction devices are recommended:

All Models:

• The use of 7mm tire chains is permitted

with the use of 215/65R16 tires only.

Chain front tires ONLY. All other size tires

are NOT chainable.

• Original equipment 215/65R17 (trailhawk

tires), 225/55R18 tire sizes are NOT

chainable.

CAUTION!

• Use on front tires ONLY.

• Damage may result if tire chains or trac-

tion devices are used with original

equipment size tires.

WARNING!

Using tires of different size and type

(M+S, Snow) between front and rear axles

can cause unpredictable handling. You

could lose control and have a collision.

CAUTION!

To avoid damage to your vehicle or tires,

observe the following precautions:

• Because of restricted traction device

clearance between tires and other sus-

pension components, it is important

that only traction devices in good condi-

tion are used. Broken devices can cause

serious damage. Stop the vehicle imme-

diately if noise occurs that could indi-

cate device breakage. Remove the dam-

aged parts of the device before further

use.

• Install device as tightly as possible and

then retighten after driving about ½ mile

(0.8 km).

• Do not exceed 30 mph (48 km/h).

• Drive cautiously and avoid severe turns

and large bumps, especially with a

loaded vehicle.

• Do not drive for a prolonged period on

dry pavement.

• Observe the traction device manufactur-

er’s instructions on the method of instal-

lation, operating speed, and conditions

for use. Always use the suggested oper-

CAUTION!

ating speed of the device manufacturer’s

if it is less than 30 mph (48 km/h).

• Do not use traction devices on a com-

pact spare tire.

Tire Rotation Recommendations

The tires on the front and rear of your vehicle

operate at different loads and perform differ-

ent steering, handling, and braking func-

tions. For these reasons, they wear at unequal

rates.

These effects can be reduced by timely rota-

tion of tires. The benefits of rotation are

especially worthwhile with aggressive tread

designs such as those on On/Off Road type

tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to

maintain mud, snow, and wet traction levels,

and contribute to a smooth, quiet ride.

Refer to the “Maintenance Plan” in this sec-

tion for the proper maintenance intervals.

The reasons for any rapid or unusual wear

should be corrected prior to rotation being

performed.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

208

The suggested Front Wheel Drive (FWD) rota-

tion method is the “forward cross” shown in

the following diagram. This rotation pattern

does not apply to some directional tires that

must not be reversed.

The suggested Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire

rotation method is the “rearward cross”

shown in the following diagram.

CAUTION!

Proper operation of four-wheel drive ve-

hicles depends on tires of equal size, type

and circumference on each wheel. Any

difference in tire size can cause damage to

the power transfer unit. Tire rotation

schedule should be followed to balance

tire wear.

DEPARTMENT OF

TRANSPORTATION

UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY

GRADES

The following tire grading categories

were established by the National High-

way Traffic Safety Administration. The

specific grade rating assigned by the

tire's manufacturer in each category is

shown on the sidewall of the tires on

your vehicle.

All passenger vehicle tires must con-

form to Federal safety requirements in

addition to these grades.

Front Wheel Drive (FWD) Tire Rotation

Four Wheel Drive (4WD) Tire Rotation

209

Treadwear

The Treadwear grade is a comparative

rating, based on the wear rate of the

tire when tested under controlled con-

ditions on a specified government test

course. For example, a tire graded

150 would wear one and one-half

times as well on the government

course as a tire graded 100. The rela-

tive performance of tires depends

upon the actual conditions of their

use, however, and may depart signifi-

cantly from the norm due to variations

in driving habits, service practices,

and differences in road characteristics

and climate.

Traction Grades

The Traction grades, from highest to

lowest, are AA, A, B, and C. These

grades represent the tire's ability to

stop on wet pavement, as measured

under controlled conditions on speci-

fied government test surfaces of as-

phalt and concrete. A tire marked C

may have poor traction performance.

WARNING!

The traction grade assigned to this

tire is based on straight-ahead brak-

ing traction tests, and does not in-

clude acceleration, cornering, hy-

droplaning, or peak traction

characteristics.

Temperature Grades

The Temperature grades are A (the

highest), B, and C, representing the

tire's resistance to the generation of

heat and its ability to dissipate heat,

when tested under controlled condi-

tions on a specified indoor laboratory

test wheel.

Sustained high temperature can cause

the material of the tire to degenerate

and reduce tire life, and excessive

temperature can lead to sudden tire

failure. The grade C corresponds to a

level of performance, which all pas-

senger vehicle tires must meet under

the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Stan-

dard No. 109. Grades B and A repre-

sent higher levels of performance on

the laboratory test wheel, than the

minimum required by law.

WARNING!

The temperature grade for this tire

is established for a tire that is prop-

erly inflated and not overloaded. Ex-

cessive speed, under-inflation, or

excessive loading, either separately

or in combination, can cause heat

buildup and possible tire failure.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

210

STORING THE VEHICLE

If the vehicle should remain stationary for

more than a month, observe the following

precautions:

• Park your vehicle in a covered, dry and

possibly airy location the windows open

slightly.

• Check that the Electric Park Brake is not

engaged.

• Disconnect the negative (-) terminal from

the battery post and be sure that the battery

is fully charged. During storage check bat-

tery charge quarterly.

• If you do not disconnect the battery from

the electrical system, check the battery

charge every thirty days.

• Clean and protect the painted parts by

applying protective waxes.

• Clean and protect polished metal parts by

applying protective waxes.

• Apply talcum powder to the front and rear

wiper blades and leave raised from the

glass.

• Cover the vehicle with an appropriate cover

taking care not to damage the painted sur-

face by dragging across dirty surfaces. Do

not use plastic sheeting which will not allow

the evaporation of moisture present on the

surface of the vehicle.

• Inflate the tires at a pressure of +7.25 psi

(+50 kPa) higher than recommended on

the tire placard and check it periodically.

• Do not drain the engine cooling system.

• Whenever you leave the vehicle is station-

ary for two weeks or more, idle the engine

for approximately five minutes with the air

conditioning system on and high fan speed.

This will ensure a proper lubrication of the

system, thus minimizing the possibility of

damage to the compressor when the vehicle

is put back into operation.

NOTE:

When the vehicle has not been started or

driven for at least 30 days, an Extended Park

Start Procedure is required to start the ve-

hicle. Refer to “Starting The Engine” in

“Starting And Operating” for further

information.

CAUTION!

Before removal of the positive and nega-

tive terminals to the battery, wait at least a

minute with ignition switch in the OFF

position and close the drivers door. When

reconnecting the positive and negative ter-

minals to the battery be sure the ignition

switch is in the OFF position and the

drivers door is closed.

BODYWORK

Preserving The Bodywork

Washing

• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash

your vehicle in the shade using Mopar Car

Wash, or a mild car wash soap, and rinse

the panels completely with clear water.

• If insects, tar, or other similar deposits have

accumulated on your vehicle, use Mopar

Super Kleen Bug and Tar Remover to re-

move.

211

• Use a high quality cleaner wax, such as

Mopar Cleaner Wax to remove road film,

stains and to protect your paint finish. Take

care never to scratch the paint.

• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power

buffing that may diminish the gloss or thin

out the paint finish.

CAUTION!

• Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning

materials such as steel wool or scouring

powder that will scratch metal and

painted surfaces.

• Use of power washers exceeding

1,200 psi (8,274 kPa) can result in

damage or removal of paint and decals.

Special Care

• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you

drive near the ocean, hose off the undercar-

riage at least once a month.

• It is important that the drain holes in the

lower edges of the doors, rocker panels, and

trunk be kept clear and open.

• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in

the paint, touch them up immediately. The

cost of such repairs is considered the re-

sponsibility of the owner.

• If your vehicle is damaged due to a collision

or similar cause that destroys the paint and

protective coating, have your vehicle re-

paired as soon as possible. The cost of such

repairs is considered the responsibility of

the owner.

• If you carry special cargo such as chemi-

cals, fertilizers, de-icer salt, etc., be sure

that such materials are well packaged and

sealed.

• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads,

consider mud or stone shields behind each

wheel.

• Use Mopar Touch Up Paint on scratches as

soon as possible. An authorized dealer has

touch up paint to match the color of your

vehicle.

INTERIORS

Seats And Fabric Parts

Use Mopar Total Clean to clean fabric uphol-

stery and carpeting.

WARNING!

Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning

purposes. Many are potentially flam-

mable, and if used in closed areas they

may cause respiratory harm.

Seat Belt Maintenance

Do not bleach, dye or clean the belts with

chemical solvents or abrasive cleaners. This

will weaken the fabric. Sun damage can also

weaken the fabric.

If the belts need cleaning, use a mild soap

solution or lukewarm water. Do not remove

the belts from the vehicle to wash them. Dry

with a soft cloth.

Replace the belts if they appear frayed or

worn or if the buckles do not work properly.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

212

WARNING!

A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a

collision and leave you with no protection.

Inspect the belt system periodically,

checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.

Damaged parts must be replaced immedi-

ately. Do not disassemble or modify the

system. Seat belt assemblies must be re-

placed after a collision if they have been

damaged (i.e., bent retractor, torn web-

bing, etc.).

Plastic And Coated Parts

Use Mopar Total Clean to clean vinyl

upholstery.

CAUTION!

• Direct contact of air fresheners, insect

repellents, suntan lotions, or hand sani-

tizers to the plastic, painted, or deco-

rated surfaces of the interior may cause

permanent damage. Wipe away immedi-

ately.

CAUTION!

• Damage caused by these type of prod-

ucts may not be covered by your New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses

The lenses in front of the instruments in this

vehicle are molded in clear plastic. When

cleaning the lenses, care must be taken to

avoid scratching the plastic.

1. Clean with a wet soft cloth. A mild soap

solution may be used, but do not use high

alcohol content or abrasive cleaners. If

soap is used, wipe clean with a clean

damp cloth.

2. Dry with a soft cloth.

Leather Parts

Mopar Total Clean is specifically recom-

mended for leather upholstery.

Your leather upholstery can be best preserved

by regular cleaning with a damp soft cloth.

Small particles of dirt can act as an abrasive

and damage the leather upholstery and

should be removed promptly with a damp

cloth. Stubborn soils can be removed easily

with a soft cloth and Mopar Total Clean. Care

should be taken to avoid soaking your leather

upholstery with any liquid. Please do not use

polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, de-

tergents, or ammonia-based cleaners to clean

your leather upholstery. Application of a

leather conditioner is not required to main-

tain the original condition.

NOTE:

If equipped with light colored leather, it tends

to show any foreign material, dirt, and fabric

dye transfer more so than darker colors. The

leather is designed for easy cleaning, and

FCA recommends Mopar total care leather

cleaner applied on a cloth to clean the leather

seats as needed.

CAUTION!

Do not use Alcohol and Alcohol-based

and/or Ketone based cleaning products to

clean leather seats, as damage to the seat

may result.

213

Glass Surfaces

All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a

regular basis with Mopar Glass Cleaner, or

any commercial household-type glass

cleaner. Never use an abrasive type cleaner.

Use caution when cleaning the inside rear

window equipped with electric defrosters or

windows equipped with radio antennas. Do

not use scrapers or other sharp instruments

that may scratch the elements.

When cleaning the rear view mirror, spray

cleaner on the towel or cloth that you are

using. Do not spray cleaner directly on the

mirror.

SERVICING AND MAINTENANCE

214

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION .....216

Chassis Number ...............216

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE SPECI-

FICATIONS ................216

Torque Specifications............216

FUEL REQUIREMENTS ........217

1.4L Turbo Engine .............217

2.4L Engine .................217

Materials Added To Fuel .........218

FLEXIBLE FUEL (2.4L ENGINE

ONLY) — IF EQUIPPED ........218

E-85 General Information .........218

FLUIDCAPACITIES ..........219

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS .....219

Engine.....................219

Chassis ....................220

MOPARACCESSORIES........221

Authentic Accessories By Mopar .....221

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

215

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION

Chassis Number

The chassis number (VIN) is stamped on a

plate located on the left front corner of the

instrument panel cover, which is visible from

outside the car through the windshield.

This number is also stamped on the floor of

the passenger compartment, near the right

front seat.

NOTE:

It is illegal to remove or alter the VIN.

WHEEL AND TIRE TORQUE

SPECIFICATIONS

Proper lug nut/bolt torque is very important to

ensure that the wheel is properly mounted to

the vehicle. Any time a wheel has been re-

moved and reinstalled on the vehicle, the lug

nuts/bolts should be torqued using a properly

calibrated torque wrench using a high quality

six sided (hex) deep wall socket.

Torque Specifications

Wheel Bolt Torque **Wheel

Bolt Size

Wheel

Bolt

Socket

Size

89 Ft-Lbs

(120 N·m)

M12x1.25 17mm

**Use only an authorized dealer recom-

mended lug nuts/bolts and clean or remove

any dirt or oil before tightening.

Inspect the wheel mounting surface prior to

mounting the tire and remove any corrosion

or loose particles.

Tighten the wheel bolts in a star pattern until

each bolt has been tightened twice. Ensure

that the socket is fully engaged on the lug

nut/bolt.

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

216

After 25 miles (40 km), check the wheel bolt

torque to be sure that all the lug nuts/bolts

are properly seated against the wheel.

WARNING!

To avoid the risk of forcing the vehicle off the

jack, do not fully tighten the wheel bolts until

the vehicle has been lowered. Failure to follow

this warning may result in serious injury.

FUEL REQUIREMENTS

1.4L Turbo Engine

This engine is de-

signed to meet all

emission regulations

and provide satisfac-

tory fuel economy and

performance when us-

ing high-quality un-

leaded "regular" gaso-

line having an octane rating of 87 using the

(R+M)/2 method. For optimum performance

and fuel economy the use of 91 octane or

higher is recommended.

While operating on gasoline with an octane

number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound

from the engine is not a cause for concern.

However, if the engine is heard making a

heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-

diately. Use of gasoline with an octane num-

ber lower than 87 can cause engine failure

and may void or not be covered by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems

such as hard starting, stalling, and hesita-

tions. If you experience these symptoms, try

another brand of gasoline before considering

service for the vehicle.

2.4L Engine

All available gasoline

engines are designed

to meet all emissions

regulations and pro-

vide excellent fuel

economy and perfor-

mance when using

high quality unleaded

“regular” gasoline having a octane rating of

87 using the (R+M)/2 method. The use of

premium gasoline is not recommended, as it

will not provide any benefit over regular gaso-

line in these engines.

Torque Pattern

217

While operating on gasoline with an octane

number of 87, hearing a light knocking sound

from the engine is not a cause for concern.

However, if the engine is heard making a

heavy knocking sound, see your dealer imme-

diately. Use of gasoline with an octane num-

ber lower than 87 can cause engine failure

and may void or not be covered by the New

Vehicle Limited Warranty.

Poor quality gasoline can cause problems

such as hard starting, stalling, and hesita-

tions. If you experience these symptoms, try

another brand of gasoline before considering

service for the vehicle.

Materials Added To Fuel

Designated TOP TIER

Detergent Gasoline

contains a higher level

of detergents to fur-

ther aide in minimiz-

ing engine and fuel

system deposits. When

available, the usage of

Top Tier Detergent gasoline is recommended.

Visit www.toptiergas.com for a list of TOP

TIER Detergent Gasoline Retailers.

Indiscriminate use of fuel system cleaning

agents should be avoided. Many of these

materials intended for gum and varnish re-

moval may contain active solvents or similar

ingredients. These can harm fuel system gas-

ket and diaphragm materials.

FLEXIBLE FUEL (2.4L

ENGINE ONLY) — IF

EQUIPPED

E-85 General Information

The information in this section is unique for

Flexible Fuel vehicles only. These vehicles

can be identified by a unique fuel filler door

label that states Ethanol (E-85) or Unleaded

Gasoline Only and/or a yellow fuel cap. Refer

to the Owner’s Manual for further

information.

CAUTION!

Only vehicles with the E-85 fuel filler door

label or a yellow gas cap can operate on

E-85.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

218

FLUID CAPACITIES

U.S Metric

Fuel (Approximate)

1.4L Turbo/2.4L Engine 12.7 Gallons 48 Liters

Engine Oil With Filter

1.4L Turbo Engine (SAE 5W-40 Synthetic, API Certified) 4.0 Quarts 3.8 Liters

2.4L Engine (SAE 0W-20, API Certified) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters

Cooling System *

1.4L Turbo Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile

Formula) 5.5 Quarts 5.2 Liters

2.4L Engine (Mopar Antifreeze/Engine Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile For-

mula) 6.8 Quarts 6.5 Liters

* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.

FLUIDS AND LUBRICANTS

Engine

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Coolant We recommend you use Mopar Antifreeze/Coolant 10 Year/150,000 Mile

Formula OAT (Organic Additive Technology) or equivalent meeting the

requirements of FCA Material Standard MS.90032.

Engine Oil – 1.4L Turbo Engine We recommend you use SAE 5W-40 API Certified Synthetic Engine Oil,

meeting the requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-12991 such as

Mopar, Pennzoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for

correct SAE grade.

219

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Engine Oil – 2.4L Engine We recommend you use SAE 0W-20 API Certified Engine Oil, meeting the

requirements of FCA Material Standard MS-6395 such as Mopar, Penn-

zoil, and Shell Helix. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for correct SAE

grade.

Engine Oil Filter We recommend you use a Mopar Engine Oil Filter.

Spark Plugs We recommend you use Mopar Spark Plugs.

Fuel Selection – 1.4L Turbo Engine 91 Octane Recommended, 87 Octane Acceptable, 0-15% Ethanol

Fuel Selection – 2.4L Engine 87 Octane, 0-15% Ethanol

Fuel Selection – 2.4L Flex Fuel (E-85) Engines 87 Octane, Up To 85% Ethanol.

Chassis

Component Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part

Manual Transmission – If Equipped We recommend you use Mopar C Series Manual & Dual Dry Clutch

Transmission Fluid.

Automatic Transmission – If Equipped Use only Mopar ZF 8&9 Speed ATF Automatic Transmission Fluid, or

equivalent. Failure to use the correct fluid may affect the function or

performance of your transmission.

Power Transfer Unit (PTU) – If Equipped We recommended you use Mopar Front Axle/PTU Synthetic Axle Lubricant

SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5).

Rear Differential (RDM) – If Equipped We recommended you use Mopar Rear Axle/RDM Synthetic Axle Lubricant

SAE 75W-90 (API GL-5).

Brake Master Cylinder We recommend you use Mopar DOT 4. If DOT 4 brake fluid is not

available, then DOT 3 is acceptable.

DOT 4 brake fluid must be changed every 2 years regardless of mileage.

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

220

MOPAR ACCESSORIES

Authentic Accessories By Mopar

• The following highlights just some of the

many Authentic Jeep Accessories by Mopar

featuring a fit, finish, and functionality spe-

cifically for your Jeep Renegade.

• In choosing Authentic Accessories you gain

far more than expressive style, premium

protection, or extreme entertainment, you

also benefit from enhancing your vehicle

with accessories that have been thoroughly

tested and factory-approved.

• For the full line of Authentic Jeep Accesso-

ries by Mopar, visit your local dealership or

online at mopar.com for U.S. residents and

mopar.ca for Canadian residents.

NOTE:

All parts are subject to availability.

EXTERIOR:

• Spare Tire Kit • Front End Cover • Body Graphics

• Air Deflectors • Splash Guards • Trailer Hitch

• Wheel Locks

INTERIOR:

• Premium Floor Mats • Door Sill Guards • Molded Cargo Tray

• Katzkin Leather Interiors • Bright Pedal Kit • Camping Tent

• Slush Mats

221

ELECTRONICS:

• Mopar Web (WiFi) • Park Distance Sensors • Rear View Camera

• Electronic Vehicle Tracking System • Heated Windshield Washer Solvent

CARRIERS:

• Roof Top Cargo Basket • Sport Utility Bars • Roof-mount Bike Carrier

• Roof-mount Ski and Snowboard Carrier • Hitch-mount Bike Carriers • Roof Cargo Box Carrier

MOPAR PERFORMANCE:

• Cat-back Exhaust

TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS

222

MULTIMEDIA

CYBERSECURITY ...........225

TIPS CONTROLS AND GENERAL

INFORMATION .............226

Steering Wheel Audio Controls ......226

Reception Conditions ............226

Care And Maintenance ...........226

Anti-Theft Protection ............226

SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN — IF

EQUIPPED ................227

SiriusXM Guardian — If Equipped

(Available on Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With

8.4–inch Display) .............227

SiriusXM Guardian Activation ......228

Download The Uconnect App .......228

Renewing Subscriptions (Uconnect 4C/4C

NAV With 8.4-inch Display) ........229

Maintaining Your SiriusXM Guardian

Account ...................229

Built-In Features ..............229

SiriusXM Guardian Remote Features . .232

UCONNECT 3 WITH 5–INCH DIS-

PLAY—IFEQUIPPED ........234

Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display At A

Glance.....................235

Clock Setting ................236

Audio Setting ................236

Radio Operation ..............237

Voice Text Reply (Not Compatible With

iPhone) ....................237

UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH DIS-

PLAY.....................238

Uconnect 4 At A Glance .........238

Drag & Drop Menu Bar ...........240

Radio .....................241

Android Auto — If Equipped .......242

Apple CarPlay Integration — If

Equipped ...................243

UCONNECT 4C/4C NAV WITH 8.4-

INCHDISPLAY .............245

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV At A Glance . . .245

Drag & Drop Menu Bar ...........246

Radio .....................247

Android Auto — If Equipped .......248

Apple CarPlay Integration — If

Equipped ...................252

UCONNECT SETTINGS .......254

USB/MEDIA PLAYER CONTROL —

IF EQUIPPED ...............255

NAVIGATION — IF EQUIPPED . .255

Changing The Navigation Voice Prompt

Volume ....................255

Finding Points Of Interest .........257

Finding A Place By Spelling The Name .257

One-Step Voice Destination Entry . . . .257

Setting Your Home Location........257

Home .....................258

Adding A Stop ................259

Taking A Detour ...............259

SiriusXM Traffic Plus (4C NAV With

8.4–inch Display) ..............259

SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV With

8.4–inch Display) .............260

UCONNECT PHONE ..........261

Uconnect Phone (Bluetooth Hands Free

Calling) ....................261

MULTIMEDIA

223

Pairing (Wirelessly Connecting) Your Mobile

Phone To The Uconnect System .....264

Common Phone Commands

(Examples) ..................268

Mute (Or Unmute) Microphone During

Call ......................268

Transfer Ongoing Call Between Handset And

Vehicle ....................268

Phonebook ..................268

Voice Command Tips ............268

Changing The Volume ...........268

Using Do Not Disturb ...........269

Incoming Text Messages .........269

Helpful Tips And Common Questions To

Improve Bluetooth Performance With Your

Uconnect System ..............271

UCONNECT VOICE RECOGNITION

QUICKTIPS ...............272

Introducing Uconnect ...........272

Get Started ..................272

Basic Voice Commands...........273

Radio .....................273

Media .....................274

Phone .....................274

Voice Text Reply ...............275

Climate ....................276

Navigation (4C NAV) ............277

SiriusXM Guardian (4C/4C NAV)— If

Equipped ...................277

Vehicle Health Report/Alert (4C/4C

NAV)......................278

Mobile App (4C/4C NAV)..........278

SiriusXM Travel Link (4C NAV) ......279

Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped ......279

Using Do Not Disturb ............280

Android Auto — If Equipped .......280

Apple CarPlay — If Equipped .......281

General Information.............282

Additional Information ...........282

MULTIMEDIA

224

CYBERSECURITY

Your vehicle may be a connected vehicle and

may be equipped with both wired and wire-

less networks. These networks allow your ve-

hicle to send and receive information. This

information allows systems and features in

your vehicle to function properly.

Your vehicle may be equipped with certain

security features to reduce the risk of unau-

thorized and unlawful access to vehicle sys-

tems and wireless communications. Vehicle

software technology continues to evolve over

time and FCA US LLC, working with its sup-

pliers, evaluates and takes appropriate steps

as needed. Similar to a computer or other

devices, your vehicle may require software

updates to improve the usability and perfor-

mance of your systems or to reduce the po-

tential risk of unauthorized and unlawful ac-

cess to your vehicle systems.

The risk of unauthorized and unlawful access

to your vehicle systems may still exist, even if

the most recent version of vehicle software

(such as Uconnect software) is installed.

WARNING!

• It is not possible to know or to predict all

of the possible outcomes if your vehi-

cle’s systems are breached. It may be

possible that vehicle systems, including

safety related systems, could be im-

paired or a loss of vehicle control could

occur that may result in an accident

involving serious injury or death.

• ONLY insert media (e.g., USB, SD card,

or CD) into your vehicle if it came from a

trusted source. Media of unknown origin

could possibly contain malicious soft-

ware, and if installed in your vehicle, it

may increase the possibility for vehicle

systems to be breached.

• As always, if you experience unusual

vehicle behavior, take your vehicle to

your nearest authorized dealer immedi-

ately.

NOTE:

• FCA US LLC or your dealer may contact you

directly regarding software updates.

• To help further improve vehicle security and

minimize the potential risk of a security

breach, vehicle owners should:

– Routinely check

www.driveuconnect.com/support/

software-update.html (U.S. Residents)

or www.driveuconnect.ca (Canadian

Residents) to learn about available

Uconnect software updates.

– Only connect and use trusted media

devices (e.g. personal mobile phones,

USBs, CDs).

Privacy of any wireless and wired communi-

cations cannot be assured. Third parties may

unlawfully intercept information and private

communications without your consent. For

further information, refer to ”Data Collection

& Privacy” in your Uconnect Owner’s Manual

Supplement or “Onboard Diagnostic System

(OBD II) Cybersecurity” in “Getting To Know

Your Instrument Panel” in your Owner’s

Manual.

225

TIPS CONTROLS AND

GENERAL INFORMATION

Steering Wheel Audio Controls

The steering wheel audio controls are located

on the rear surface of the steering wheel.

Left Switch

• Push the switch up or down to search for

the next listenable station or select the next

or previous Media track.

• Push the button in the center to select the

next preset station on the radio.

Right Switch

• Push the switch up or down to increase or

decrease the volume.

• Push the button in the center to change the

source (AM, FM, SXM, Bluetooth, etc.)

Reception Conditions

Reception conditions change constantly

while driving. Reception may be interfered

with by the presence of mountains, buildings

or bridges, especially when you are far away

from the broadcaster.

The volume may be increased when receiving

traffic alerts and news.

Care And Maintenance

Observe the following precautions to ensure

the system is fully operational:

• The display lens should not come into con-

tact with pointed or rigid objects which

could damage its surface; use a soft, dry

anti-static cloth to clean and do not press.

• Never use alcohol, gas and derivatives to

clean the display lens.

• Prevent any liquid from entering the sys-

tem: this could damage it beyond repair.

Anti-Theft Protection

The system is equipped with an anti-theft

protection system based on the exchange of

information with the electronic control unit

(Body Computer) on the vehicle.

This guarantees maximum safety and pre-

vents the secret code from being entered

after the power supply has been discon-

nected.

If the check has a positive outcome, the

system will start to operate, whereas if the

comparison codes are not the same or if the

electronic control unit (Body Computer) is

replaced, the system will ask the user to enter

the secret code. See an authorized dealer for

further information.

Steering Wheel Audio Controls

MULTIMEDIA

226

SIRIUSXM GUARDIAN — IF

EQUIPPED

SiriusXM Guardian — If Equipped

(Available on Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With

8.4–inch Display)

WARNING!

ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay atten-

tion to the road. ALWAYS drive safely with

your hands on the steering wheel. You have

full responsibility and assume all risks

related to the use of the features and

applications in this vehicle. Only use the

features and applications when it is safe to

do so. Failure to do so may result in an

accident involving serious injury or death.

NOTE:

Your vehicle may be transmitting data as

authorized by the subscriber.

SiriusXM Guardian enhances your ownership

and driving experience. When connected to

an operable network, you can:

• Place a SOS Call to a SiriusXM Guardian

operator who can connect you to emergency

responders.

• Remotely lock/unlock your doors and start

your vehicle from virtually anywhere, using

the Uconnect App from your device. You

can also do so by logging into your owner

site, or by calling SiriusXM Guardian Care

when your vehicle has an operable network

connection. Services can only be used

where coverage is available.

• Receive text or email notifications if your

vehicle's security alarm goes off.

• Receive stolen vehicle assistance, using

GPS technology to help authorities locate

your vehicle if it is stolen.

• Get operator assistance using the ASSIST

button on your interior rearview mirror.

Before you drive, familiarize yourself with the

easy-to-use SiriusXM Guardian services.

1. The ASSIST and SOS Call buttons are

located on your rearview mirror. The AS-

SIST button is used for contacting Road-

side Assistance, Vehicle Care, SiriusXM

Guardian Care, and Uconnect Care. The

SOS Call button connects you to a

SiriusXM Guardian Care Agent, who can

connect you to emergency services.

2. The Uconnect “Apps

” button is lo-

cated in the center of the menu bar of the

radio touchscreen. This is where you can

manage your Apps.

3. The Uconnect Voice Command and

Uconnect Phone buttons are located on

the left side of your steering wheel. These

buttons let you use your voice to give

commands, make phone calls, send and

receive text messages, enter navigation

destinations, and control your radio and

media devices.

Included Trial Period For New Vehicles

Your new vehicle may come with an included

trial period for use of the SiriusXM Guardian

services starting at the date of vehicle pur-

chase (date based on vehicle sales notifica-

tion from your dealer). To activate the trial, you

must first register with SiriusXM Guardian. Af-

ter the trial period, if you wish to continue

your SiriusXM Guardian services you can

choose to purchase a subscription.

227

NOTE:

You can check UconnectPhone.com for sys-

tem and device compatibility.

SiriusXM Guardian Activation

To unlock the full potential of SiriusXM

Guardian in your vehicle, you must activate

your SiriusXM Guardian services.

1. Press the Apps icon on the bottom of your

in-vehicle touchscreen.

2. Select the Activate Services icon from

your list of apps.

3. Select “Customer Care” to speak with a

SiriusXM Guardian Customer Care agent

who will activate services in your vehicle,

or select “Enter Email” to activate on the

web.

Why sign up for SiriusXM Guardian? Here are

just a few examples of things you’ll be able to

do:

• Know that help, if you need it, is only a

button press away with Assist.

• Lock and unlock your vehicle doors from

hundreds of miles away.

• Find your vehicle, no matter where you

parked, using the convenient Vehicle

Finder function.

• Use Send & Go to send a navigation route

from your mobile phone to your vehicle’s

navigation system.

For further information:.

• U.S. residents visit:

www.siriusxm.com/guardian

• Canadian residents visit:

www.siriusxm.ca/guardian

Download The Uconnect App

You’re only a few steps away from using

remote commands and other valuable ser-

vices.

To use the Uconnect App:

• Search for and download the Uconnect App

from the store on your compatible iPhone or

Android powered device.

• Log in to the app using the email address

and password you created when you acti-

vated the services.

Mobile App

MULTIMEDIA

228

• Press the “Remote” button on the bottom

menu bar of the app to Lock/Unlock, Re-

mote Start (if equipped), and activate your

horn and lights remotely.

• Press the “Location” button on the bottom

menu bar of the app to bring up a map to

locate your vehicle or send a location to

your vehicle’s navigation system.

• Press the menu button (three horizontal

lines) in the upper left corner of the app to

access settings and support information.

Renewing Subscriptions (Uconnect 4C/4C

NAV With 8.4-inch Display)

Subscriptions can be purchased online by log-

ging into your owner account. If you need help

push the ASSIST button on the rearview mirror,

then select SiriusXM Guardian Care or:

• U.S. residents dial:1-844-796-4827

• Canadian residents dial:1-877-324-9091

Maintaining Your SiriusXM Guardian

Account

Selling Your Vehicle

When you sell your vehicle, we recommend that

you remove your SiriusXM Guardian Account

information from the vehicle. You can do this by

pressing the ASSIST button in your vehicle and

selecting SiriusXM Guardian, or call:

• U.S. residents:1-844-796-4827

• Canadian residents:1-877-324-9091

Built-In Features

WARNING!

ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on

the wheel. You have full responsibility and

assume all risks related to the use of the

Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian

services, and applications in this vehicle.

Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM

Guardian services when it is safe to do so.

Failure to do so may result in an accident

involving serious injury or death.

WARNING!

• ALWAYS obey traffic laws and pay atten-

tion to the road. Some features are lim-

ited while the vehicle is in motion. Some

services, including SOS, will NOT work

without a subscription and an operable

network connection.

• Ignoring the rearview mirror light could

mean you may not have SOS Call service

if needed. If the rearview mirror light is

illuminated, have an authorized dealer

service the SOS Call system immedi-

ately.

• The Occupant Restraint Controller

(ORC) turns on the Air Bag Warning

Light on the instrument panel if a mal-

function is detected in any part of the

airbag system. If the Air Bag Warning

Light is illuminated, the air bag system

may not be working properly and the

SOS Call system may not send a signal to

a SOS Call operator if an air bag is

deployed. If the Air Bag Warning Light is

illuminated, have an authorized dealer

service your vehicle immediately.

229

WARNING!

• If anyone in the vehicle could be in

danger (e.g., fire or smoke is visible,

dangerous road conditions or location),

do not wait for voice contact from a SOS

Call operator. All occupants should exit

the vehicle immediately and move to a

safe location.

• The SOS Call system is embedded into

the vehicle’s electrical system. Do not

add aftermarket electrical equipment to

the vehicle’s electrical system. This may

prevent your vehicle from sending a sig-

nal to initiate an emergency call. To

avoid interference that can cause the

SOS Call system to fail, never add after-

market equipment (e.g., two-way mobile

radio, CB radio, data recorder, etc.) to

your vehicle’s electrical system or

modify the antennas on your vehicle.

• IF YOUR VEHICLE LOSES BATTERY

POWER FOR ANY REASON (INCLUD-

ING DURING OR AFTER AN ACCI-

DENT), the Uconnect features, apps,

and SiriusXM Guardian services, among

others, will not operate.

NOTE:

Your vehicle may be transmitting data as

authorized by the subscriber.

1. ASSIST Call (4C/4C NAV) — If Equipped —

The rearview mirror contains an ASSIST

button, allowing you to speak to a call

center agent for support:

• Roadside Assistance Call — If you get a

flat tire, or need a tow, you’ll be con-

nected to someone who can help any-

time. Additional fees may apply. Addi-

tional information in this section.

• Uconnect Care — In vehicle support for

Uconnect Apps and Features.

• SiriusXM Guardian Care — In vehicle

support for SiriusXM Guardian ser-

vices.

• Vehicle Care — Total support for your

FCA US LLC vehicle.

NOTE:

In order to provide SiriusXM Guardian Ser-

vices to you, we may record and monitor your

conversations with Roadside Assistance,

Uconnect Care, SiriusXM Guardian Care, or

Vehicle Care, whether such conversations are

initiated through the SiriusXM Guardian ser-

vices in your vehicle, your device, or via a

landline device, and may share information

obtained through such recording and moni-

toring in accordance with regulatory require-

ments. You acknowledge, agree, and consent

to any recording, monitoring or sharing of

information obtained through any such call

recordings.

Assist And SOS

1 — SOS Button

2 — ASSIST Button

MULTIMEDIA

230

2. Emergency SOS Call (If Equipped) — The

rearview mirror contains a SOS Call but-

ton that, when pressed, may place a call

from your vehicle to a SiriusXM Guardian

Care operator, who can connect you to

emergency service operators, to request

help from local police, fire or ambulance

personnel. If this button is accidentally

pressed, you will have ten seconds to stop

the call. To cancel, press the SOS Call

button again or press the “Cancel” button

shown on the touchscreen. After ten sec-

onds has passed, the SOS call will be

placed and only the SOS Call operator can

cancel it. The LED light on the rearview

mirror will turn green once a connection to

a SOS Call operator has been made. The

green LED light will turn off once the SOS

Call is terminated. Have an authorized

dealer service the vehicle if the rearview

mirror light is continuously red. On

equipped vehicles, this feature requires a

functioning electrical system, a subscrip-

tion, and an operable network connection.

If a connection is made between a SOS Call

operator and your vehicle, you understand

and agree that SOS Call operators will stay

on the line, even after you connect with

emergency services. The Emergency ser-

vices operator may, like any other emer-

gency call, record conversations and

sounds in and near your vehicle upon

connection.

3. Theft Alarm Notification — If Equipped —

The Theft Alarm Notification feature noti-

fies you via email or text (SMS) message

when the vehicle’s factory-installed secu-

rity alarm system has been triggered.

There are a number of reasons why your

alarm may have been triggered, one of

which could be that your vehicle was sto-

len. If so, please see the details of the

Stolen Vehicle Assistance service below.

When activated, Theft Alarm Notification

is automatically set to send you an email

at the email address you provide should

the alarm go off. You may also opt to have

a text message sent to your device.

4. Stolen Vehicle Assistance — If your vehicle

is stolen, contact local law enforcement

immediately to file a stolen vehicle report.

Once this report has been filed, SiriusXM

Guardian Care can help locate your ve-

hicle. The SiriusXM Guardian Care agent

will ask for the stolen vehicle report num-

ber issued by local law enforcement. As

long as your vehicle has a SiriusXM Guard-

ian subscription and an operable network

connection, the agent may be able to

locate the stolen vehicle and work with

law enforcement to help recover it. Your

vehicle must have an operable network

connection and must be registered with

SiriusXM Guardian with an active sub-

scription that includes the applicable

feature.

5. 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot — If Equipped — Allows

you and your passengers to connect their

portable devices to the built-in 4G Wi-Fi

capabilities of your Uconnect system.

Purchasing 4G Wi-Fi Hotspot requires the

use of an Internet-enabled portable

device.

NOTE:

Uconnect offers a complimentary

3–month trial period that includes 1GB of

total data. The trial can be activated any

time within the first year of new vehicle

ownership.

231

a. To start, the Enable Wi-Fi Hotspot box

should be un-checked.

b. Select the Wi-Fi Hotspot Setup option

from the toushcreeen to locate your

Hotspot Name and Password. Make

note of this information.

c. Tap the Back Arrow to return to the

main Wi-Fi Hotspot page, then check

the box to Enable Wi-Fi Hotspot.

d. From your portable device Wi-Fi set-

tings menu, select the Hotspot Name

from the list of available networks and

enter the provided Password.

e. Open the web browser on your por-

table device and enter the following

web address:

https://myvehicle.att.com/#/login.

f. Create a myVehicle account or log in to

your existing one.

g. Select and purchase the desired sub-

scription option. The Wi-Fi Hotspot

will activate after a few minutes.

For additional assistance, call AT&T Cus-

tomer Care at: 866-595-1330.

NOTE:

Your vehicle must have a working electrical

system for any of the in vehicle SiriusXM

Guardian services to operate.

SiriusXM Guardian Remote Features

If you own a compatible iPhone or Android

powered device, the Uconnect App allows

you to remotely lock or unlock your doors,

start your engine or activate your horn and

lights from virtually anywhere. Your vehicle

must be equipped with remote start, must

have a SiriusXM Guardian subscription, and

must have an operable network connection.

Services can only be used where coverage is

available. You can download the App from

Mopar Owner Connect or from the App Store

(iPhone) or Google Play Store (Android). Visit

UconnectPhone.com to determine if your de-

vice is compatible. For Uconnect Phone cus-

tomer support and to determine if your device

is compatible.

U.S. residents - visit UconnectPhone.com or

call 1-877-855-8400.

Canadian residents - visit

UconnectPhone.com or call:

1-800-465-2001 (English) or

call:1-800-387-9983 (French).

Remote Start (If Equipped) — This feature

provides the ability to start the engine on your

vehicle, without the keys and from virtually

any distance. You can send a request to your

vehicle in one of two ways:

1. Using the Uconnect App from a compat-

ible device.

2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.

• After 15 minutes if you have not en-

tered your vehicle with the key, the

engine will shut off automatically.

• You can also send a command to turn-

off an engine that has been remote

started.

• This remote function requires your ve-

hicle to be equipped with a factory-

installed Remote Start system. To uti-

lize this feature after the Uconnect App

is downloaded, login with your user

name and password.

MULTIMEDIA

232

You will need your four digit SiriusXM Guard-

ian Security PIN to confirm the request.

Press the “remote start” icon on your

Uconnect App to remotely start the vehicle.

You can set-up notifications for your account

to receive an email or text (SMS) message

every time a command is sent. Login to

Mopar Owner Connect at mopar.com and

click on Edit Profile to manage SiriusXM

Guardian Notifications.

Remote Door Lock/Unlock — If Equipped —

This feature provides the ability to lock or

unlock the door on your vehicle, without the

keys and from virtually any distance. You can

send a request to your vehicle in one of three

ways:

1. Using the Uconnect App from a compat-

ible device.

2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.

3. By contacting SiriusXM Guardian Care on

the phone.

To use this feature after the Uconnect App is

downloaded, login using your user name and

password. You will need your four digit

SiriusXM Guardian Security PIN to confirm

the request. Press the “closed lock” icon on

your Uconnect App to lock the doors, and

press the “open lock” icon to unlock the

driver’s door.

You can set-up notifications for your account

to receive an email or text (SMS) message

every time a command is sent. Login to

Mopar Owner Connect at mopar.com and

click on Edit Profile to manage SiriusXM

Guardian Notifications.

Remote Horn And Lights — If Equipped — It’s

easy to locate a vehicle in a dark, crowded or

noisy parking area by activating the horn and

lights. It may also help if you need to draw

attention to your vehicle for any reason. You

can send a request to your vehicle in one of

three ways:

1. Using the Uconnect App from a compat-

ible device.

2. From the Mopar Owner Connect website.

3. By contacting the SiriusXM Guardian Care

on the phone.

To use this feature after the Uconnect App is

downloaded, login using your user name and

password. You will need your four digit

SiriusXM Guardian Security PIN to confirm

the request. You can set-up notifications for

your account to receive an email or text

(SMS) message every time a command is

sent. Login to Mopar Owner Connect at

mopar.com and click on Edit Profile to man-

age SiriusXM Guardian Notifications.

233

Vehicle Finder

The Vehicle Finder feature of the Uconnect

Mobile App allows you to find the location of

your vehicle when you can't remember where

it's parked. You can also sound the alarm and

flash the lights to make finding your vehicle

even easier.

To find your vehicle:

1. Press the “Location” tab on the Uconnect

Mobile App bottom bar.

2. Select the “Vehicle” icon to determine

the location of your vehicle.

3. Select the “Find Route” button that ap-

pears, once your vehicle is located.

4. Select your preferred Navigation App to

route a path to your vehicle.

Send & Go

The Send & Go feature of the Uconnect

Mobile App allows you to search for a desti-

nation on your mobile device and then send

the route to your vehicle’s Uconnect Naviga-

tion system.

To send a navigation route to your vehicle:

1. Press the “Location” tab on the Uconnect

Mobile App bottom bar.

2. Either type in the destination you would

like to navigate to, or search through one

of the categories provided.

3. Select the destination you want to route to

from the list that appears.

4. Press the “Send To Vehicle” button, and

then confirm the destination by pressing

“Yes,” to send the navigation route to the

Uconnect Navigation in your vehicle.

5. Finally, confirm the route inside your ve-

hicle by pressing the “Go Now” option on

the pop-up that appears on the touch-

screen, when the vehicle is started.

MULTIMEDIA

234

UCONNECT 3 WITH 5–INCH DISPLAY — IF EQUIPPED

Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display At A Glance

Uconnect 3 With 5–inch Display Radio Buttons

1 — RADIO Button

2 — COMPASS Button

3 — SETTINGS Button

4 — MORE Functions Button

5 — BROWSE/ENTER Button — TUNE/SCROLL Knob

6 — SCREEN OFF Button

7 — MUTE Button

8 — System On/Off — Volume Control Knob

9 — Uconnect PHONE Button

10 — MEDIA Button

235

CAUTION!

Do NOT attach any object to the touchscreen,

doing so can result in damage to the touch-

screen.

Clock Setting

To start the clock setting procedure:

1. Press the Settings button on the face-

plate, then press the “Clock and Date”

button.

2. Press the “Set Time” button on the

touchscreen.

3. Press the “Up” or “Down” arrows to ad-

just the hours or minutes, then select the

“AM” or “PM” button on the touchscreen.

You can also select 12hr or 24hr format

by pressing the desired button on the

touchscreen.

4. Once the time is set press the “Done”

button on the touchscreen to exit the time

screen.

NOTE:

In the Clock Setting Menu you can also select

Display Clock. Display Clock turns the clock

display in the status bar on or off.

Audio Setting

1. Press the “Settings” button on the

faceplate.

2. Scroll down and press the “Audio” button

on the touchscreen to open the Audio

menu.

3. The Audio Menu shows the following op-

tions for you to customize your audio

settings.

Equalizer

Press the “Equalizer” button on the touch-

screen to adjust the Bass, Mid and Treble.

Use the “+” or “-” button on the touchscreen

to adjust the equalizer to your desired set-

tings.

Balance/Fade

Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the

touchscreen to adjust the sound from the

speakers. Use the arrow buttons on the

touchscreen to adjust the sound level from

the front and rear or right and left side speak-

ers. Press the Center “C” button on the

touchscreen to reset the balance and fade to

the factory setting.

Speed Adjusted Volume — If Equipped

Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button

on the touchscreen to select between OFF, 1,

2 or 3. This will decrease the radio volume

relative to a decrease in vehicle speed.

Loudness — If Equipped

Press the “Loudness” button on the touch-

screen to select the Loudness feature. When

this feature is activated it improves sound

quality at lower volumes.

Surround Sound — If Equipped

Press the “Surround Sound” button on the

touchscreen, select On or Off followed by

pressing the back arrow button on the touch-

screen. When this feature is activated, it

provides simulated surround sound mode.

MULTIMEDIA

236

Radio Operation

Store Radio Presets Manually

The Radio stores up to 12 presets in each of

the Radio modes. There are four visible pre-

sets at the top of the radio screen. Pressing

the “All” button on the touchscreen on the

radio home screen displays all of the preset

stations for that mode.

To store a radio preset manually, follow the

steps below:

1. Tune to the desired station.

2. Press and hold the desired numbered but-

ton on the touchscreen for more than two

seconds, or until you hear a confirmation

beep.

Seek Next/Previous Buttons

• Press the Seek up or Seek down button to

seek through radio stations in AM, FM or

SXM bands.

• Hold either button to bypass stations with-

out stopping.

Voice Text Reply (Not Compatible With

iPhone)

Once your Uconnect system is paired with a

compatible mobile device, the system can

announce a new incoming text message, and

read it to you over the vehicle audio system.

You can reply to the message using Voice

Recognition by selecting, or saying, one of

the 18 pre-defined messages.

Here’s How:

1. Push the Voice Recognition (VR)

and Phone button and wait for the beep,

then say “reply.” Uconnect gives the fol-

lowing prompt: “Please say the message

you would like to send.”

2. Wait for the beep and say one of the

pre-defined messages. (If you are not

sure, you can say “help”). Uconnect will

then read the pre-defined messages

allowed.

3. As soon as you hear the message you

would like to send, you can interrupt the

list of prompts by pushing the Uconnect

phone button and saying the phrase.

Uconnect will confirm the message by

reading it back to you.

4. Push the Phone button and say “Send.”

Radio Operation

1 — Radio Sta-

tion Preset

2 — All Presets

3 — Seek Next

4—

Audio Set-

tings

5 — Station In-

formation

6 — Direct Tune

7 — Radio Band

8 — Seek Previ-

ous

237

PRE-DEFINED VOICE TEXT REPLY RESPONSES

Yes.

Stuck in traf-

fic.

See you later.

No.

Start without

me.

I’ll be late.

Okay.

Where are

you?

I will be <5,

10, 15, 20,

25, 30, 45,

60>* min-

utes late.

Call me.

Are you there

yet?

I’ll call you

later.

I need direc-

tions.

See you in

<5, 10, 15,

20, 25, 30,

45, 60>*

minutes.

I’m on my

way.

Can’t talk

right now.

I’m lost. Thanks.

*Use only the numbering listed or the system

may not transcribe the message properly.

Siri Eyes Free — If Equipped

Siri lets you use your voice to send text

messages, select media, place phone calls

and much more. Siri uses your natural lan-

guage to understand what you mean and

responds back to confirm your requests. The

system is designed to keep your eyes on the

road and your hands on the wheel by letting

Siri help you perform useful tasks.

To enable Siri push and hold, then release the

Uconnect Voice Recognition (VR) button on

the steering wheel. After you hear a double

beep you can ask Siri to play podcasts and

music, get directions, read text messages

and many other useful requests.

UCONNECT 4 WITH 7-INCH

DISPLAY

Uconnect 4 At A Glance

CAUTION!

Do NOT attach any object to the touch-

screen, doing so can result in damage to

the screen.

NOTE:

Uconnect screen images are for illustration

purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-

ware for your vehicle.

Setting The Time

• For Uconnect 4, turn the unit on, and then

press the time display at the top of the

screen. Press “Yes.”

• If the time is not displayed at the top of the

screen, press the “Settings” button on the

touchscreen. In the Settings screen, press

the “Clock & Date” button on the touch-

screen, then check or uncheck this option.

• Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours and

Set Time Minutes to adjust the time.

• If these features are not available, uncheck

the Sync Time box.

• Press “X” to save your settings and exit out

of the Clock Setting screen.

Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Radio

Screen

MULTIMEDIA

238

Audio Settings

• Press the “Audio” button on the touch-

screen to activate the Audio settings screen

to adjust Balance\Fade, Equalizer, Speed

Adjusted Volume, Surround Sound, Loud-

ness, AUX Volume Offset, Auto Play, and

Radio Off With Door.

• You can return to the Radio screen by

pressing the “X” located at the top right.

Balance/Fade

• Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the

touchscreen to Balance audio between the

front speakers or fade the audio between

the rear and front speakers.

• Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or

“Right” buttons on the touchscreen or

press and drag the Speaker Icon to adjust

the Balance/Fade.

Equalizer

• Press the “Equalizer” button on the touch-

screen to activate the Equalizer screen.

• Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touch-

screen, or press and drag over the level bar

for each of the equalizer bands. The level

value, which spans between plus or minus

nine, is displayed at the bottom of each of

the bands.

Speed Adjusted Volume

• Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button

on the touchscreen to activate the Speed

Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Ad-

justed Volume is adjusted by pressing the

volume level indicator. This alters the auto-

matic adjustment of the audio volume with

variation to vehicle speed.

Loudness — If Equipped

• Press the “On” button on the touchscreen

to activate Loudness. Press “Off” to deac-

tivate this feature. When Loudness is On,

the sound quality at lower volumes

improves.

AUX Volume Offset

• Press the “AUX Volume Offset” button on

the touchscreen to activate the AUX Vol-

ume Offset screen. The AUX Volume Offset

is adjusted by pressing of the “+” and “–”

buttons. This alters the AUX input audio

volume. The level value, which spans be-

tween plus or minus three, is displayed

above the adjustment bar.

Auto Play — If Equipped

• Press the “Auto Play” button on the touch-

screen to activate the Auto Play screen. The

Auto Play feature has two settings “On” and

“Off.” With Auto Play on, music begins

playing from a connected device, immedi-

ately after it is connected to the radio.

Auto On Radio — If Equipped

• The Radio automatically turns on when

vehicle is in run or will recall whether it was

on or off at last ignition off.

239

Radio Off With Door — If Equipped

• Press the “Radio Off With Door” button on

the touchscreen to activate the Radio Off

With Door screen. The Radio Off With Door

feature, when activated, keeps the radio on

until the driver or passenger door is opened,

or when the Radio Off Delay selected time

has expired.

Drag&DropMenuBar

The Uconnect features and services in the

main menu bar are easily changed for your

convenience. Simply follow these steps:

1. Press the “Apps

” button to open the

App screen.

2. Press and hold, then drag the selected

App to replace an existing shortcut in the

main menu bar.

The new app shortcut, that was dragged

down onto the main menu bar, will now

be an active App/shortcut.

NOTE:

This feature is only available if the vehicle is

in PARK.

Uconnect 4 Main Menu

MULTIMEDIA

240

Radio

Uconnect 4 With 7–inch Display Radio

1 — Radio Station Presets

2 — Toggle Between Presets

3 — Status Bar

4 — Main Category Bar

5 — Audio Settings

6 — Seek Up

7 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station

8 — Seek Down

9 — Browse And Manage Presets

10 — Radio Bands

241

WARNING!

ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on

the wheel. You have full responsibility and

assume all risks related to the use of the

Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian

services, and applications in this vehicle.

Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM

Guardian services when it is safe to do so.

Failure to do so may result in an accident

involving serious injury or death.

• To access the Radio mode, press the “Ra-

dio” button on the touchscreen.

Selecting Radio Stations

• Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or

SXM) button on the touchscreen.

Seek Up/Seek Down

• Press the Seek up or down arrow buttons on

the touchscreen for less than two seconds

to seek through radio stations.

• Press and hold either arrow button on the

touchscreen for more than two seconds to

bypass stations without stopping. The radio

will stop at the next listenable station once

the arrow button on the touchscreen is

released.

Direct Tune

• Tune directly to a radio station by pressing

the “Tune” button on the screen, and en-

tering the desired station number.

Store Radio Presets Manually

Your radio can store 36 total preset stations,

12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM). They

are shown at the top of your radio screen. To

see the 12 preset stations per band, press the

arrow button on the touchscreen at the top

right of the screen to toggle between the two

sets of six presets.

To store a radio preset manually, follow the

steps below:

1. Tune to the desired station.

2. Press and hold the desired numbered but-

ton on the touchscreen for more than two

seconds or until you hear a confirmation

beep.

Android Auto — If Equipped

NOTE:

Feature availability depends on your carrier

and mobile phone manufacturer. Some

Android Auto features may or may not be

available in every region and/or language.

Android Auto is a feature of your Uconnect

system, and your Android 5.0 Lollipop, or

higher, powered smartphone with a data

plan, that allows you to project your smart-

phone and a number of its apps onto the

touchscreen radio display. Android Auto au-

tomatically brings you useful information,

and organizes it into simple cards that appear

just when they are needed. Android Auto can

be used with Google's best-in-class speech

technology, the steering wheel controls, the

knobs and buttons on your radio faceplate,

and the radio display’s touchscreen to control

many of your apps. To use Android Auto

follow the following steps:

1. Download the Android Auto app from the

Google Play store on your Android-

powered smartphone.

MULTIMEDIA

242

2. Connect your Android powered smart-

phone to one of the media USB ports in

your vehicle. If you have not downloaded

the Android Auto app to your smartphone

before plugging in the device for the first

time, the app begins to download.

NOTE:

Be sure to use the factory-provided USB

cable that came with your phone, as af-

termarket cables may not work.

Your phone may ask you to approve the

use of the Android Auto app before use.

3. Once the device is connected and recog-

nized, Android Auto should automatically

launch, but you can also launch it by

touching the Android Auto icon on the

touchscreen, located under Apps.

Once Android Auto is up and running on your

Uconnect system, the following features can

be utilized using your smartphone’s data

plan:

• Google Maps for navigation

• Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio,

etc. for music

• Handsfree Calling, and Texting for commu-

nication

• Hundred of compatible apps, and many

more!

NOTE:

To use Android Auto, make sure you are in an

area with cellular coverage. Android Auto

may use cellular data and your cellular cov-

erage is shown in the upper right corner of the

radio screen. Once Android Auto has made a

connection through USB, Android Auto will

also connect via Bluetooth.

NOTE:

Requires compatible smartphone running

Android™ 5.0 Lollipop or higher and down-

load app on Google Play. Android, Android

Auto and Google Play are trademarks of

Google Inc.

Apple CarPlay Integration — If Equipped

NOTE:

Feature availability depends on your carrier

and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple

CarPlay features may or may not be available

in every region and/or language.

Android Auto

Google Maps Data And Cellular Coverage

243

Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple Car-

Play, the smarter, more secure way to use

your iPhone in the car, and stay focused on

the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen

display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and

your voice with Siri to get access to Apple

Music, Maps, Messages, and more.

To use CarPlay, make sure you are using

iPhone 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Set-

tings, that your iPhone is unlocked for the

very first connection only, and then use the

following procedure:

1. Connect your iPhone to one of the media

USB ports in your vehicle.

NOTE:

Be sure to use the factory-provided Light-

ning cable that came with your phone, as

aftermarket cables may not work.

2. Once the device is connected and recog-

nized, CarPlay should automatically

launch, but you can also launch it by

touching the CarPlay icon on the touch-

screen, located under Apps.

Once CarPlay is up and running on your

Uconnect system, the following features can

be utilized using your iPhone’s data plan:

• Phone

• Music

• Messages

• Maps

NOTE:

To use CarPlay make sure that cellular data is

turned on, and that you are in an area with

cellular coverage. Your data and cellular cov-

erage is shown on the left side of the radio

screen.

NOTE:

Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for

phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply.

Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple

Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc.

iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-

tered in the US and other countries. Apple

CarPlay CarPlay Data And Cellular Coverage

MULTIMEDIA

244

UCONNECT 4C/4C NAV

WITH 8.4-INCH DISPLAY

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV At A Glance

WARNING!

ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on

the wheel. You have full responsibility and

assume all risks related to the use of the

Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian

services, and applications in this vehicle.

Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM

Guardian services when it is safe to do so.

WARNING!

Failure to do so may result in an accident

involving serious injury or death.

CAUTION!

Do NOT attach any object to the touch-

screen, doing so can result in damage to

the screen.

NOTE:

Uconnect screen images are for illustration

purposes only and may not reflect exact soft-

ware for your vehicle.

Setting The Time

• Model 4C NAV synchronizes time automati-

cally via GPS, so it should not require any

time adjustment. If you do need to set the

time manually, follow the instructions be-

low for Model 4C NAV.

• For Model 4C, turn the unit on, and then

press the time display at the top of the

screen. Press “Yes.”

• If the time is not displayed at the top of the

screen, press the “Settings” button on the

touchscreen. In the Settings screen, press

the “Clock” button on the touchscreen,

then check or uncheck this option.

• Press “+” or “–” next to Set Time Hours and

Set Time Minutes to adjust the time.

• If these features are not available, uncheck

the Sync Time box.

• Press “X” to save your settings and exit out

of the Clock Setting screen.

Background Themes

• Screen background themes are selectable

from a pre-loaded list of themes. If you’d

like to set a theme, follow the instructions

below.

• Press the “Settings” button on the touch-

screen and select the display menu.

• Then press “Set Theme” button on the

touchscreen and select a theme.

Uconnect 4/4C NAV Radio

245

Audio Settings

• Press the “Audio” button on the touch-

screen to activate the Audio settings screen

to adjust Balance\Fade, Equalizer, and

Speed Adjusted Volume.

• You can return to the Radio screen by

pressing the “X” located at the top right.

Balance/Fade

• Press the “Balance/Fade” button on the

touchscreen to Balance audio between the

front speakers or fade the audio between

the rear and front speakers.

• Pressing the “Front,” “Rear,” “Left,” or

“Right” buttons on the touchscreen or

press and drag the Speaker Icon to adjust

the Balance/Fade.

Equalizer

• Press the “Equalizer” button on the touch-

screen to activate the Equalizer screen.

• Press the “+” or “–” buttons on the touch-

screen, or press and drag over the level bar

for each of the equalizer bands. The level

value, which spans between plus or minus

nine, is displayed at the bottom of each of

the Bands.

Speed Adjusted Volume

• Press the “Speed Adjusted Volume” button

on the touchscreen to activate the Speed

Adjusted Volume screen. The Speed Ad-

justed Volume is adjusted by pressing the

volume level indicator. This alters the auto-

matic adjustment of the audio volume with

variation to vehicle speed.

Drag&DropMenuBar

The Uconnect features and services in the

main menu bar are easily changed for your

convenience. Simply follow these steps:

1. Press the “Apps

” button to open the

App screen.

2. Press and hold, then drag the selected

App to replace an existing shortcut in the

main menu bar.

The new app shortcut, that was dragged

down onto the main menu bar, will now

be an active App/shortcut.

NOTE:

This feature is only available if the vehicle is

in PARK.

Uconnect 4C/4C NAV With 8.4–inch

Display Main Menu

MULTIMEDIA

246

Radio

Uconnect 4C NAV Radio

1 — Radio Station Presets

2 — Toggle Between Presets

3 — Status Bar

4 — View Small Navigation Map

5 — HD Radio

6 — Main Category Bar

7 — Audio Settings

8 — Seek Up

9 — Direct Tune To A Radio Station

10 — Seek Down

11 — Browse And Manage Presets

12 — Radio Bands

247

WARNING!

ALWAYS drive safely with your hands on

the wheel. You have full responsibility and

assume all risks related to the use of the

Uconnect features, SiriusXM Guardian

services, and applications in this vehicle.

Only use Uconnect features and SiriusXM

Guardian services when it is safe to do so.

Failure to do so may result in an accident

involving serious injury or death.

• To access the Radio mode, press the “Ra-

dio” button on the touchscreen.

Selecting Radio Stations

• Press the desired radio band (AM, FM or

SXM) button on the touchscreen.

Seek Up/Seek Down

• Press the Seek up or down arrow buttons on

the touchscreen for less than two seconds

to seek through radio stations.

• Press and hold either arrow button on the

touchscreen for more than two seconds to

bypass stations without stopping. The radio

will stop at the next listenable station once

the arrow button on the touchscreen is

released.

Direct Tune

• Tune directly to a radio station by pressing

the “Tune” button on the screen, and en-

tering the desired station number.

Store Radio Presets Manually

Your radio can store 36 total preset stations,

12 presets per band (AM, FM and SXM). They

are shown at the top of your radio screen. To

see the 12 preset stations per band, press the

arrow button on the touchscreen at the top

right of the screen to toggle between the two

sets of six presets.

To store a radio preset manually, follow the

steps below:

1. Tune to the desired station.

2. Press and hold the desired numbered but-

ton on the touchscreen for more than two

seconds or until you hear a confirmation

beep.

HD Radio — If Equipped

• HD Radio (available on Uconnect 4C/4C

NAV) operates similar to conventional radio

except it allows broadcasters to transmit a

high-quality digital signal.

• With an HD radio receiver, the listener is

provided with a clear sound that enhances

the listening experience. HD radio can also

transmit data such as song title or artist.

Android Auto — If Equipped

NOTE:

Feature availability depends on your carrier

and mobile phone manufacturer. Some

Android Auto features may or may not be

available in every region and/or language.

Android Auto is a feature of your Uconnect

system, and your Android 5.0 Lollipop, or

higher, powered smartphone with a data

plan, that allows you to project your smart-

phone and a number of its apps onto the

touchscreen radio display. Android Auto au-

tomatically brings you useful information,

and organizes it into simple cards that appear

just when they are needed. Android Auto can

be used with Google's best-in-class speech

MULTIMEDIA

248

technology, the steering wheel controls, the

knobs and buttons on your radio faceplate,

and the radio display’s touchscreen to control

many of your apps. To use Android Auto

follow these steps:

1. Download the Android Auto app from the

Google Play store on your Android-

powered smartphone.

2. Connect your Android powered smart-

phone to one of the media USB ports in

your vehicle. If you have not downloaded

the Android Auto app to your smartphone

before plugging in the device for the first

time, the app begins to download.

NOTE:

Be sure to use the factory-provided USB

cable that came with your phone, as af-

termarket cables may not work.

Your phone may ask you to approve the

use of the Android Auto app before use.

3. Once Android Auto has made a connec-

tion through USB, Android Auto will also

connect via Bluetooth. The system dis-

plays the Android Auto home screen.

Android Auto automatically launches, but

if it does not, refer to the Uconnect Own-

er’s Manual Supplement for the procedure

to enable the feature “AutoShow.” You

can also launch it by pressing Android

Auto located in the “Apps” menu. If you

use Android Auto frequently you can move

the app to the menu bar at the bottom of

the touchscreen. Press the “Apps” button

and locate the Android Auto app; then

drag the selected App to replace an exist-

ing shortcut in the main menu bar.

Once Android Auto is up and running on your

Uconnect system, the following features can

be utilized using your smartphone’s data

plan:

• Google Maps for navigation

• Google Play Music, Spotify, iHeart Radio,

etc. for music

• Handsfree Calling, and Texting for commu-

nication

• Hundred of compatible apps, and many

more!

NOTE:

To use Android Auto, make sure you are in an

area with cellular coverage. Android Auto

may use cellular data and your cellular cov-

erage is shown in the upper right corner of the

radio screen.

Android Auto

249

NOTE:

Requires compatible smartphone running

Android™ 5.0 Lollipop or higher and down-

load app on Google Play. Android, Android

Auto and Google Play are trademarks of

Google Inc.

Maps

Push and hold the VR button on the steering

wheel or tap the microphone icon to ask

Google to take you to a desired destination by

voice. You can also touch the Navigation icon

in Android Auto to access Google Maps.

NOTE:

If the VR button is not held, and is only

pushed, the built-in Uconnect VR prompts

you and any spoken navigation command

launches the built-in Uconnect navigation

system.

While using Android Auto, Google Maps pro-

vides voice-guided:

• Navigation

• Live traffic information

• Lane guidance

NOTE:

If you are using the built-in Uconnect navi-

gation system, and you try and start a new

route using Android Auto, via voice or any

other method, a pop-up appears asking if you

would like to switch from Uconnect naviga-

tion to smartphone navigation. A pop-up also

appears, asking if you’d like to switch, if

Android Auto is currently in use and you

attempt to launch a built-in Uconnect route.

Selecting “Yes” switches the navigation type

to the newly used method of navigation and a

route is planned for the new destination. If

“No” is selected the navigation type remains

unchanged.

For further information, refer to

www.android.com/auto/ (U.S. Residents) or

https://www.android.com/intl/en_ca/auto/

(Canadian Residents).

For further information on the navigation

function, please refer to

https://support.google.com/android or

https://support.google.com/androidauto/.

Google Maps Data And Cellular Coverage

Google Maps

MULTIMEDIA

250

Music

Android Auto allows you to access and stream

your favorite music with apps like Google Play

Music, iHeartRadio, and Spotify. Using your

smartphone’s data plan, you can stream end-

less music on the road.

NOTE:

For music apps, playlists, and stations to

work with Android Auto, they must be set up

on your smartphone before using Android

Auto.

NOTE:

To see the metadata for the music playing

through Android Auto, select the Uconnect

System’s media screen.

For further information refer to

https://support.google.com/androidauto.

Communication

With Android Auto connected, press and hold

the VR button on the steering wheel to acti-

vate voice recognition specific to the Android

Auto. This will allow you to send and reply to

text messages, have incoming text messages

read out loud, and place and receive hands-

free calls.

Apps

The Android Auto App will display all the

compatible apps that are available to use

with Android Auto, every time it is launched.

You must have the compatible app down-

loaded, and you must be signed in to the app

for it to work with Android Auto. Refer to

g.co/androidauto to see the latest list of avail-

able apps for Android Auto.

Android Auto Music

Android Auto Contact

Android Auto Phone

251

Apple CarPlay Integration — If Equipped

NOTE:

Feature availability depends on your carrier

and mobile phone manufacturer. Some Apple

CarPlay features may or may not be available

in every region and/or language.

Uconnect works seamlessly with Apple Car-

Play, the smarter, more secure way to use

your iPhone in the car, and stay focused on

the road. Use your Uconnect Touchscreen

display, the vehicle's knobs and controls, and

your voice with Siri to get access to Apple

Music, Maps, Messages, and more.

To use CarPlay, make sure you are using

iPhone 5 or later, have Siri enabled in Set-

tings, that your iPhone is unlocked for the

very first connection only, and then use the

following procedure:

1. Connect your iPhone to one of the media

USB ports in your vehicle.

NOTE:

Be sure to use the factory-provided Light-

ning cable that came with your phone, as

aftermarket cables may not work.

2. Once the device is connected, the system

displays the CarPlay home screen. Apple

CarPlay automatically launches, but if

not, refer to the Uconnect Owner’s

Manual Supplement for the procedure to

enable the feature “AutoShow.” You can

also launch it by pressing the CarPlay icon

located in the “Apps” menu. If you use

Apple CarPlay frequently you can move

the app to the menu bar at the bottom of

the touchscreen. Press the “Apps” button

and locate the CarPlay app; then drag and

drop the selected App to replace an exist-

ing shortcut in the main menu bar.

Once CarPlay is up and running on your

Uconnect system, the following features can

be utilized using your iPhone’s data plan:

• Phone

• Music

• Messages

• Maps

NOTE:

To use CarPlay make sure that cellular data is

turned on, and that you are in an area with

cellular coverage. Your data and cellular cov-

erage is shown on the left side of the radio

screen.

CarPlay

CarPlay Data And Cellular Coverage

MULTIMEDIA

252

NOTE:

Requires compatible iPhone. See dealer for

phone compatibility. Data plan rates apply.

Vehicle user interface is a product of Apple

Apple CarPlay is a trademark of Apple Inc.

iPhone is a trademark of Apple Inc., regis-

tered in the US and other countries. Apple

Phone

With CarPlay, press and hold the VR button

on the steering wheel to activate a Siri voice

recognition session. You can also press and

hold the Home button within CarPlay to start

talking to Siri. This allows you to make calls

or listen to voice mail as you normally would

using Siri on your iPhone.

NOTE:

Only temporarily pushing the VR button on

the steering wheel launches a built-in VR

session, not a Siri session, and it will not

function with CarPlay.

Music

CarPlay allows you to access all your artists,

playlists, and music from iTunes. Using your

iPhone’s data plan, you can also use select

third party audio apps including music, news,

sports, podcasts and more.

Messages

Just like your iPhone, CarPlay allows you to

use Siri to send or reply to text messages.

Since everything is done by voice, Siri can

Jeep 2018 RENEGADE Car

Product's Documents

User Manual

Specifications

Jeep® 2018 RENEGADE Questions and Answers

Related Products

INFANS TY328019 12V Kids Ride-on Jeep Car, 2.4 G Remote Control

Jeep® 2017 JEEP Car

Jeep® 2019 JEEP WRANGLER Car

Jeep® 2017 JEEP WRANGLER Car

Jeep® JEEP COMPASS Car

Jeep® 2021 JEEP CHEROKEE Car